Hindi Grammar and Reader [Reprint 2016 ed.] 9781512800258

Table of contents :
Acknowledgments
Foreword
Table of Contents
Introduction
Lesson 1
Lesson 2
Lesson 3
Lesson 4
Lesson 5
Lesson 6
Lesson 7
Lesson 8
Lesson 9
Lesson 10
Lesson 11
Lesson 12
Lesson 13
Lesson 14
Lesson 15
Lesson 16
Lesson 17
Lesson 18
Lesson 19
Lesson 20
Lesson 21
Lesson 22
Lesson 23
Lesson 24
Lesson 25
Lesson 26
Lesson 27
Lesson 28
Lesson 29
Lesson 30
Lesson 31
Lesson 32
Lesson 33
Lesson 34
Lesson 35
Lesson 36
Lesson 37
Lesson 38
Lesson 39
Lesson 40
Glossary
INDEX

Citation preview

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

UNIVERSITY OF PENNSYLVANIA SOUTH ASIA KBGIONAL STUDIBS, PHILADELPHIA, PENNSYLVANIA

HINDI

Grammar and Reader by

ERNEST BENDER Oriental Studies Department and South Asia Regional Studies Department. University of Pennsylvania

®

Philadelphia University of Pennsylvania Press

©

1967 by the Trustees of the University of Pennsylvania

Library of Congress Catalogue Card N u m b e r :

66-16089

T h e final version of this book was completed under a contract with the United States Office of Education, Department

of Health,

Education

Second Printing, 1968 This second printing contains over two hundred diacritical emendations. For correct instruction and learning, this printing is therefore to be preferred to the first ( 1 9 6 7 ) printing.

7519 Printed in the United States of America

and

Welfare.

TO MY STUDENTS — WHO ASKED FOR IT —

Acknowledgments To Professor W . Norman Brown belongs the credit for the successful completion of this book. I am greatly indebted to Dr. Sheelvati Misra for her invaluable assistance over the years. To Dr. Elizabeth Furber I am grateful for her comments on an earlier version of this book which contributed greatly to the final presentation. I extend my thanks to Mrs. Regina M. Long for her careful supervision of the typescript through its preparation. I am delighted to be given the opportunity to express my gratitude for their generous support through the years of my work to Dr. Mortimer Graves and the American Council of Learned Societies, to the Rockefeller Foundation, and to the Carnegie Corporation of New York. I extend my thanks to the United States Office of Education, Department of Health, Education, and Welfare, both for its support and for making the publication of this book possible.

Philadelphia, 1961

Ernest Bender

7

Foreword This book is the product of many years of successful teaching of Hindi at the University of Pennsylvania by Professor Ernest Bender. The first materials were collected in 1948; these have since been checked, amplified, rearranged, rephrased in succeeding years from study of the speech of native-born users of Hindi, some temporarily resident in the United States, others living in India. This critical process has been conducted in repeated annual usage in the classroom. Such a process could be continued indefinitely, but by now the materials seem to have been so well refined and tested and to be so well adapted to use by American teachers and students that they should be made available in printed form. The course of study presented in Professor Bender's work leads a student—or a class—by simple and logical progression through the phonological, morphological, and syntactic features of "standard" Hindi, and provides a selected but wide-ranging vocabulary. A student who has mastered the course will have a well developed capacity for speaking, reading, and writing Hindi, with which he can communicate on a fairly advanced level with speakers of Hindi in their homeland. Using this competence as a starting point he will be able, if he so desires, to proceed further to an expert's mastery of idiom, nuances among synonyms, stylistic literary variation, subtle aesthetic values. Few will ever go so far, most users will aim only at fluency in social and professional communication. But that is no slight purpose in itself.

Philadelphia, 1961

W . Norman Brown

9

Table of Contents

ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS FOREWORD INTRODUCTION LESSON 1 1.1-1.13: phonology; 1.15-1.17: conversational texts.

LESSON 2

Page 7 9 15 25 31

2.1:present tense of verb, present participle, present tense of verb to be, h o n i , personal pronouns; 2.2: masculine nouns in -a; 2.3: feminine nouns in -i; 2.4: numbers 1 to 10; 2.5-2.6: conversational texts.

LESSON 3

3.1: infinitive construction with cahna; 3.2: predicate-adjective construction, adjective in -a; 3.3: masculine nouns having same form for subject singular and plural; 3.4: feminine nouns ending in -e in subject plural; 3.5: numbers 11 to 20; 3.6-3.7: conversational texts.

36

LESSON 4

41

4.2: feminine nouns in iya; 4.3: adjectives in -a; 4.4: adverbs; 4.5; numerals as adjectives; 4.6: numbers 21 to 30; 4.7-4.8: conversational texts. LESSON 5

47

5.1: direct object of personal pronoun, postposition; 5.2-5.6: direct object of noun; 5.7: numbers 31 to 40; 5.8-5.9: conversational texts. LESSON 6

54

6.1: adjectives modifying nouns in object f o r m ; 6.2-6.3.3: demonstrative pronouns and adjectives; 6.4: numbers 41 to 60; 6.5-6.6: conversational texts.

LESSON 7

62

7.1-7.1.1: imperative; 7.2: time expressions; 7.3: numbers 61, on; 7.3.2: dates; 7.4-7.5: conversational texts. LESSON 8

65

Review of lessons 1 to 7.

LESSON 9

74

9.1-9.4.4: postpositions (-me, -ko, -par, -se); 9.5: conversational text. L E S S O N 10

80

10.1-10.4.3: postpositional phrases (-ke plche, -ke nice, -ke sath, -ke s a m n e ) ; 10.5-10.6: conversational texts.

11

12

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

Page L E S S O N 11 11.1-11.3: postpositional phrases (-kë pis, -kê liyë); 11.4: adjectives ending in consonants; 11.5-11.5.2: interrogative sentences; 11.6: conversational text. L E S S O N 12 12.1-12.1.2: interrogative adverbs; 12.2: construction with sakni; 12.3-12.6: negation; 12.7-12.8: conversational texts. L E S S O N 13 13.1: negation; 13.2-13.3: negative question; 13.4: negative of sakni construction; 13.5-13.5.3: pronominal possessive adjectives; 13.6: conversational text. L E S S O N 14 14.1-14.2.1: "genitive" construction; 14.3: first and second person pronouns in compound postpositional phrases; 14.4: subjunctive; 14.5: conversational text. L E S S O N 15 15.1-15.2.2: future; 15.3-15.3.2: pasand karnä construction; 15.4: conversational text. L E S S O N 16 Review of lessons 9 to 15. L E S S O N 17 17.1-17.2: constructions translating English "ought to," "should," "need,' "have to," "must" (cihiyë, hai, parti hai); 17.3-17.3.4: indefinite adjective and pronoun (k5I); 17.4-17.4.1: kuch; 17.5: reading text. L E S S O N 18 18.1-18.1.4: conditional sentences; 18.2-18.4: interrogative adjectives and pronouns (kaun, kyä, kaun-sä, kitnä); 18.5: reading text. L E S S O N 19 19.1-19.1.2: "imperfect" or "past continuous"; 19.2-19.3: past of câhiyê construction; 19.4: "contrary to fact" or "unreal subjunctive" construction; 19.5: ordinal numbers; 19.6: reading text. L E S S O N 20 20.1-20.1.4: formation of past participle and perfect tense of intransitive verb; 20.2-20.2.2: pasand hönä construction; 20.3-20.3.6: comparative and superlative constructions; 20.4: reading text. L E S S O N 21 21.1-21.2.4: perfect tense of transitive verb; 21.3: reading text. L E S S O N 22 22.1-22.1.4: past participles of jänä, hönä, dëni, lënâ, karnä; 22.2: kaun-sä; 22.5-22.5.5: constructions translating possession; 22.6: reading text. L E S S O N 23 23.1-23.1.1: "present progressive" or "present continuative" and "past progressive" or "past continuative"; 23.2: negative of future; 23.2.1: negative of conditional sentences; 23.2.2-23.2.3: negative of câhiyê and hai constructions; 23.2.4: negative of "contrary to fact" construction; 23.2.5-23.4.2: negative of past tenses; 23.6: reading text.

85

92

98

103

109

116 127

136

145

153

162 170

178

CONTENTS

LESSON 24

13

Page

185

24.1-24.44: review of lessons 17 to 23; 24.45-24.51: translations of reading texts of lessons 17 to 23.

LESSON 25

205

25.1-25.2: relative constructions; 2 5 3 : reading text.

LESSON 26

212

26.1-26.4.1: relative constructions; 26.5: reading text.

LESSON 27

220

27.1-27.5: relative constructions; 27.6: and ( a u r ) ; 27.7: reading text.

LESSON 28

228

28.1-28.7: verbal clusters (with dënâ, lënâ, j i n i , d i lui, parnâ, uthnâ, c u k n i ) ; 28.9: reading text.

LESSON 29

237

29.1-29.2: "direct discourse"; 2 9 3 : "indirect discourse"; 29.4: construction with hôni; 29.5: reading text.

LESSON 30

245

30.1: gerund ("conjunctive participle" or "absolutive"); 3 0 . 2 - 3 0 2 3 : infinitive before postpositions or postpositional phrases (i.e., infinitive as n o u n ) ; 3 0 3 : reading text.

LESSON 31

252

31.1-31.1.2: participial adjectival constructions; 31.2: -vâlâ formations; 3 1 3 31.4: participial adverbial constructions; 31.5: reading text.

LESSON 32

259

32.1-32.42: review of lessons 25 to 31; 32.43-32.49: translations of reading texts of lessons 25 to 31.

LESSON 33

278

33-33,1: past participial adjectival construction; 33.2-33.2.1: -kë jaisâ, jaisâ; 333-33.3.3: temporal constructions; 33.4-33.4.1: milnâ ( = "meet," "find," etc.); 33.6: gerund; 33.7: reading text.

LESSON 34

285

34.1-34.1.2: constructions with lagni; 34.2: participles in adverbial phrases; 3 4 3 : present participle + rahnâ; 34.4-34.4.1: present participle + jânâ; 34.5: past participle ( = gerund) + karnâ; 34.6: reading text

LESSON 35

294

35.1: present participle as adverb; 35.2: bina + past participle; 3 5 3 : possession indicating relationship; 35.4: addition, subtraction, multiplication, division; 35.5-35.5.1: time expressions; 35.7: reading text.

LESSON 36 36.1-36.1.4: verbal stem alternations (formation of causative stems); 36.2: repetition of words; 36.3: emphatic particle (-hi, -x, -hi); 36.4: reading text.

LESSON 37

37.1: "passive" construction; 37.2-37.2.1: infinitive as noun and adjective; 37.2.2: infinitive in object form without postposition; 37.2.3: infinitive with dënâ = "let"; 37.3: reading text.

301

309

14

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

Page

LESSON 38

315

38.1-38.1.1: construction with -sa; 38.2-38.2.1: constructions with jaisi and vaisâ; 38.2.2: kaisa; 38.3: jitna; 38.4: karib; 38.5: kôï ëk; 38.6: reading text

LESSON 39

'

321

Rural Economic Survey Questionnaire.

LESSON 40

327

40.1^40.30: review of lessons 33 to 38; 4031-40.36: translations of reading texts of lessons 33 to 38.

GLOSSARY INDEX

340 454

Introduction The Constitution of India designates Hindi as the official language of the land. The area in which people speak Hindi as their mother tongue includes the states of Uttar Pradesh, Madhya Pradesh, Rajasthan, Bihar and parts of the Panjab, and the territories of Delhi and Himachal Pradesh. It also functions as the official language for local government and administration in this area. Hindi has a variety of dialects to be encountered all through northern India. ( T e r m s for these are Hindustani, Bazar Hindustan! and Khar! Bolt. Still another dialect, DakkhinT, is spoken in Hyderabad.) It ranges from village dialects to literary Hindi and the standard upon which the official language is based. This standard is based on the dialect spoken by the educated classes of Uttar Pradesh (the former United Provinces). The language of this course is also based on the Hindi dialect of the educated classes of Uttar Pradesh. The purpose of this course is to provide an American learner with the basic grammatical equipment and vocabulary necessary to conduct his affairs in areas of India in which Hindi is the language of communication, Developed over a period of fifteen years, it is designed to be administered to students, who have little or no linguistic training, by a team consisting of an Indian assistant, having Hindi for his (or her) mother tongue, and a American linguist, with some experience in Hindi, who provides the grammatical exegesis. The linguist conducts the language drill in English, and the Hindi assistant, in Hindi. The organization of the course is basically simple in concept and approximates the techniques in use for programming teaching machines. (In fact, with minor adjustments, it could be converted to a mechanical device.) It has a dual aim, pursued concurrently,—to provide the student with a firm comprehension of the basic grammar and indoctrinate him with the necessary linguistic habits, and to introduce him to and familiarize him with the "language in action," spoken as well as written. The first aim is represented by the grammatical sections and drill exercises of the lessons, and the second by the accompanying conversations and reading texts. In the initial stages—that is, the first sixteen lessons—the student is advised to memorize, verbatim, the simple conversations included in these lessons. To avoid the pitfalls of confronting the learner with the burden of having to deal with a number of grammatical constructions and to learn vocabulary at one and the same time, attention should not be given to identifying the individual constituents of the utterances. As he acquires the necessary grammatical com-

15

16

HINDI GRAMMAR

AND

READER

prehension and linguistic habits, the student returns periodically to the conversations and practices, manipulating the constructions he has mastered up to that time—i.e., replacing the components of certain utterances with the proper forms and words to express new ideas. F r o m Lesson 17 on, the conversations, which are fully annotated, are longer and more complex, graduating into reading texts. T h e book is arranged in five parts of eight lessons each, the last, or eighth, constituting a review. Appended are a glossary, containing all the words provided in the book, and an index. G r a m m a r is presented through the medium of "equivalent constructions," rather than

by rules to lie learned by rote. T h e

sentences of sections dealing

with

grammatical instruction are arranged in parallel columns—the sentences of the left-hand column exemplifying the Hindi construction to be learned, and the right-hand column providing the equivalent English translation. T h e accompanying grammatical discussion elucidates the constituents, formation, and usage of the construction. T h e lessons start with the simplest sentence types, for example, Noun-verb man w a l k s . " ) , Pronoun-Verb ( " H e walks."), Noun-Adjective ( " [ T h e ]

(["The|

boy is g o o d . " ) ,

N o u n - N o u n ( " [ T h e ] man is [ a ] f a r m e r . " ) . T h e elements of the sentence are identified and explained, and there follows drill in construction with vocabulary replacement in the example sentences to form new meaningful sentences; pronouns are replaced by other pronouns, nouns by nouns, and verbs by the different verbs learned up to this point. ( T h e grammatical explanation need not be presented through the medium o f technical terminology. F o r the student not versed in the terms, " n o u n , " "verb," " s u b j e c t , " "predicate," etc., explanation can be given in terms of the equivalent words in the accompanying English translation. In the Hindi sentence admi calta hai, the student is told that " a d m i " has the same function as " m a n " in the English "equivalent" " [ T h e | man w a l k s . " and "calta h a i " that of 'walks.") Each new Hindi construction is based on

constructions

already mastered. T h e accompanying English translation functions as an identification device and the emphasis is directed to the comprehension and mastery of the

Hindi

construction. In the initial stages only one grammatical element is introduced in each new exercise, and this practice is followed, wherever possible, in the succeeding lessons. T h u s , the student gradually learns to think in terms of Hindi and, upon completion of formal instruction, continues the refining process by relating any new construction he may encounter to those he already knows. T h e initial phase of the course stresses the spoken language. Emphasis is directed to the student's acquiring "an ear for the language," that is, training him to distinguish the critical phonological features—for example, the differing qualities of vowels (see sections 1.1-1.1.1,

1.4-1.4.1,

1.8) and the characteristics

which

distinguish

the aspirated

(see

sections 1.2.2, 1.9) from the non-aspirated (see sections 1.2.1, 1.5) consonants—and to utter the H i n d i sounds so that the native speaker can readily recognize them.

The

lessons are graduated, proceeding (Lesson 17) into reading exercises, which are provided in the form of romanized texts. Shortly after this the student is taught the native, or Devanagarl, script. ( T h e companion volume to this will contain the Devanagarl transcription of all the conversations and texts contained in this book.) T h e postponement of reading instruction in the native script is purposeful. Experience has demonstrated the need to minimize the handicaps under which a learner labors if he has to contend with the intricacies of a new grammar, phonology and a strange alphabet, concurrently. Stu-

17

INTRODUCTION

d e n t s as well as instructors have found the results of this arrangement gratifying. W e n o w proceed to describe the operation of this course in detail. Lesson 1 discusses the H i n d i sounds and the symbols employed to represent them. Several short conversations with elucidatory notes follow. T h e conversations are designed to provide the student with practice in hearing the l a n g u a g e as it is spoken, a s well as for purposes of practice in pronunciation. T h e accompanying E n g l i s h translations are not literal renditions of the H i n d i , but the English equivalents of the H i n d i sentences. T h e student, at this time, should not try to isolate separate words to determine their E n g l i s h m e a n i n g , but should m e m o r i z e each H i n d i sentence as a whole. G r a m m a t i c a l explanations are given in the lessons following. ( S e e section 1.14.) A s has been r e m a r k e d before, the instructor will periodically return to the conversations and drill the student in the grammatical construction he has mastered—that is, train him to replace recognized elements or phrases with the necessary f o r m s and words to produce new

utterances.

T h i s dual approach—namely, the indoctrination of the student in the necessary g r a m matical comprehension and linguistic habits by m e a n s of drill in the pertinent exercises, and the memorization of the conversations and their subsequent rephrasing—will be constantly maintained throughout this and the following lessons. Lesson 2 begins with the H i n d i equivalent of the p a r a d i g m s of an E n g l i s h verb in the present tense with the appropriate pronominal subjects. In this a n d the other sections which give grammatical examples the construction under examination will be included within a full utterance or sentence. ( H e r e , for example, in section 2.1, each verb with its pronominal subject comprises a complete sentence.) In section 2.1, as in other sections dealing with g r a m m a r , the H i n d i sentences are are listed in the left-hand c o l u m n , thus: m a l dekhta hu, m a i dekhti h o , vah dekhta hai, vah dekhti hai, h a m d e k h t e h a i , h a m dekhti hai, etc., a n d the corresponding E n g l i s h sentences in the righthand column read: " I ( m s c . ) see.," " I ( f m . ) see.," " H e sees.," " S h e sees.," " W e ( m s c . ) see.," " W e ( f m . ) see.," and so on. T h e procedure in the handling of sections of this k i n d is for the native speaker to pronounce the sentences to the students—first slowly, and then, at a normal rate—and to drill them in their pronunciation. After this the linguist explains the g r a m m a t i c a l formation under consideration. Once the pronunciation of the sentences has been mastered a n d committed to m e m o r y , the next step is drill in the replacement of the pertinent constituent elements of the sentences to fashion n e w m e a n i n g f u l sentences. T h i s drill is conducted, on the one hand, by the native speaker to exercise the students in aural recognition and, on the other, by the linguist to give them practice in translation from English into H i n d i . N e w vocabulary is usually

provided

in sentences of the s a m e type as the example sentences (see section 2.1.1). Since the constituent elements have been identified and their formation discussed in the g r a m matical section (in this case, of section 2.1), the focal point of attention is k n o w n — namely, the verb, or more precisely, the verbal stem. T h i s is extracted f r o m each sentence (see section 2.1.2) for the substitution exercises in which all the possible permutations are tried, using the vocabulary

which is given—i.e., pronouns and verbs—

to

fashion m e a n i n g f u l sentences. T h i s is the procedure to be followed in the subsequent lessons. ( A s for the translation exercises of the type given in sections 2.1.3 a n d 2.1.4, the instructor may assign these for work to be done out of class or in class, as he sees fit. Other teaching aids comprise tape-recordings of the H i n d i example sentences, as well

18

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

as of the conversations. (These are supplemental to the course, to be used for drill in comprehension and pronunciation, and are to be assigned for laboratory sessions.) T h e lessons which follow progressively replace and expand the constituents of the sentence type given in section 2.1. Sections 2.2 and 2.3 introduce nouns. Here the student encounters the simple substitution of the third person pronoun, singular and plural, (i.e., vah and ve) with the noun forms under study—masculine nouns, with the proper participial ending and auxiliary verb, and feminine nouns with their corresponding forms. For example, section 2.2 deals with masculine nouns ending in -a in the subject form, singular, which replace the -a with -e in the subject form, plural. Therefore, the formation of a simple sentence with a nominal subject from one with a pronominal subject is accomplished by a single substitution. ( T h e substituted elements are underlined.) For example, vah of vah calta hai " H e walks." is replaced by larka to fashion larka calta hai. " T h e boy walks." Similarly, ve of v£ calte hai "They walk." is replaced by larke to fashion larke calte hai " T h e boys walk." Furthermore, in section 2.3, vah of vah calti hai. "She walks." is replaced by lark! to form lark! caltl hai " T h e ffirl walks."; and ve of ve caltl hai is replaced by larkiya, resulting in larkiya caltl hai " T h e girls walk." T h e drill described above is then carried out with pronouns substituted by nouns to form as many meaningful sentences as possible. Several simple conversations follow. Lesson 3 expands the sentence type (henceforth, indicated by the symbols ( N V ) ) with the infinitive. More precisely, it illustrates the use of the infinitive with the verb cahna "to want, wish." Since the verb cahna functions like the verbs already mastered, the new element is the infinitive, which is the point of concentration for drill. Observe the progression from vah cahta hai. " H e wants." to larka cahta hai " T h e boy wants." to larka bolna cahta hai. " T h e boy wants to speak." W e then continue with the exercise on the infinitive: larka bolna cahta hai. " T h e boy wants to speak.," larka daurna cahta hai "The boy wants to run.," larka khelna cahta hai " T h e boy wants to play.," and so on. Subsequent drill, both by the native speaker, as well as the linguist, is not confined to the infinitive alone, but includes all the members of each sentence—pronoun, noun and verb. For example, vah khelna cahta hai " H e wants to play.," larka khelna clhta hai " T h e boy wants to play.," ve khelna cahte hai "They want to play.," larke khelna cahte hai " T h e boys want to play.," vah khelna cahti hai "She wants to play.," Iarki khelna cahti hai " T h e girl wants to play.," ve khelna cahti hai "They ( f m . ) want to play.," larkiya khelni cahti hai " T h e girls want to play.," kutta khelna cahta hai " T h e dog wants to play.," kutta daurna cahta hai. " T h e dog wants to run.," kutta khana cahta hai " T h e dog wants to eat.," kutta kudna cahta hai " T h e dog wants to jump.," vah kudna cahta hai. " H e wants to jump.," vah kudna cahti hai "She wants to jump.," mal kudna cahti hu " I want to jump.," ham kudna cahte hai " W e want to jump.," turn kudna cahte ho "You want to jump.," and so on, until all the possible permutations are accomplished or the time allotted exhausted. (This, of course, can not be carried out in only one or even a continuous succession of drills, but at recurring intervals, depending on how much time is allotted to the course and how it is scheduled.) T h e linguist, as usual, reverses this procedure, drilling from English to Hindi. Section 3.2 introduces a new sentence type (or, as will be demonstrated shortly, a variation of the sentence type, N V , already learned). T h e new element is the predicate adjective. Here is introduced the class of adjectives whose subject form, masculine, ends

INTRODUCTION

19

in -a for the singular and -e for the plural; and whose subject form, feminine, singular ancd plural, ends in -I. (It may be helpful to note that the adjective occupies the same possition in the sentence and functions like the participial form of the verb in the previoous sentences. Compare larka calta hai "The boy walks." and larka accha hai "The boy is |good.," larke calte hai "The boys walk." and larke acche hai "The boys are good.," larkkl calti hai "The girl walks.," and larki acchi hai "The girl is good.," and larkiya caHti hai "The girls walk." and larkiya acchi hai "The girls are good.") Other noun typoes follow (sections 3.3, 3.4 and 4. ); drill in which follows the method discussed. In section 4.3 we expand the subject of the sentence type, NV, with the adjective desscribed in section 3.2 (i.e., which changes its form for gender, number and case): accha larkka calta hai "The good boy walks.," acche larke calte hai "The good boys walk.," accfchi larki calti hai. "The good girl walks.," acchi larkiya calti hai "The good girls waklk." Section 4.4 introduces adverbs (i.e., expands the predicate), thereby increasing the scoppe of the drill sessions and thus furnishing the student with the means for fuller exppression: admi jate hai "The men go.," a dm! bahar jate hai "The men go ouC," admi anddar jate hai "The men go in.," admi vaha jate hai "The men go there^" admi age jate haii "The men go ahead.," admi nice jate hai "The men go down.," admi nice jata hai "TThe man goes down.," dubla admi nice jata hai. "The lean man goes down," dubla admi nicce jina cahta hai "The lean man wants to go down.," dubG larki andar jana cahti hai "TThe lean girl wants to go in.," dubli larki jaldi-se jana cahti hai "The lean girl wants to ggo quickly.," dubG larki jaldi-se khana cahti hai "The lean girl wants to eat quickly.," and! so on. Lesson 5 takes up the Hindi equivalent of the English "direct object," pronoun andj noun, respectively, i.e., another expansion of the predicate of the sentence: admi us-kko dekhta hai "The man sees him.," and admi larke-ko dekhta hai "The man sees the boyy." Here, moreover, the student experiences for the first time the function of the postposition (i.e., -ko). Lesson 6 demonstrates adjectives (see section 3.2) modifying nouns in tthe object form: admi chote larke-ko dekhta hai "The man sees the little boy.," and adrml choti larki-ko dekhta hai "The man sees the little girL"; and the demonstrative adjectives and pronouns: yah larka accha hai "This boy is good.," vah larki acchi hai "TBiat girl is good.," admi is larki-ko dekhta hai "The man sees this girL," and admi us larkke-ko dekhta hai "The man sees that boy." With the mastering, in Lesson 7, of the impperative forms, the opportunities for variation in expression are further increased. Lessson 8 is, as is every subsequent eighth lesson, a review. The instructor may at this poimt direct the student's attention to the conversations committed to memory to further expiloit the possibilities for fashioning new conversations. During the progress of the course the student should be encouraged to maintain a vocaabulary list as well as a corpus of idiomatic expressions or stereotyped phrases to be i memorized for use in conversation drill. With the grammatical and lexical equipmemt provided up to this stage, along with the incidental information which will be treatted more fully in succeeding lessons, the student can participate in simple conversations with the native speaker. (For example, the third sentence of the first conversation [1.33.1] is a question. The instructor will note at that point that Hindi questions are fashiioned by affixing the particle kya to the beginning of the sentence [11.5, £f.]. Sentencce 8 contains "polite" imperatives and sentence 10 "direct discourse" [29.1, 29.2]. The

20

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

seventh sentence of the third conversation [1.3.3] illustrates the use of nahl to express negation [cf. 23.2-23.4.2], etc.) A conversation exercise at the completion of the first four lessons may run something along these lines between the Hindi speaker and the student. (The remarks contained within square brackets identify the conversation and sentence in which the construction appears. We bear in mind that by this time the student has had adequate drill—aural, as well as oral—in the substitution and expansion of the elements of an utterance.) Hindi Speaker: Student: Hindi Speaker: Student:

ñamaste. ñamaste. ip-kâ nâm kyà hai? mera nâm Grin hai.

ip-kâ nâm kyâ hai? Hindi Speaker: mëri nâm Ravi hai. kyâ mai âp-së kuch savâl pûch saktâ hû? Student: pûchiyë. Hindi Speaker: âp-kë pâs samay hai? Student: jï ha. ip kyâ câhtë haï? Hindi Speaker: mujhë âp-kï madad câhiyë. Student: mai âp-kl kaisï madad kar saktâ hu? Hindi Speaker: mal musibat-më hû. Student: kyô? kyâ huâ? Hindi Speaker: chôtï-sï bât hai. âp-kë pâs môtar hai? Student: jï hâ. kyô? Hindi Speaker: mujhë motar câhiyë. Student: kyô? âp-kô môtar kyô câhiyë? Hindi Speaker: mai sahar jaldï-së jânâ câhtâ hû. Student: bahut acchâ. mërë sâth âiyë. Hindi Speaker: bahut bahut dhanyavâd.

Hello. Hello. What is your name? [4.7, sentence 5.] My name is Green. [4.7, sentence 8 for mera. ] What is your name? My name is Ravi. Can I ask you some questions? [4.7, sentence 3.] (Please) ask. [4.7, sentence 4.] Do you have time? [2.6, sentence 7.] Yes. What do you want? [2.6, sentence 2.] I need your help. [2.6, sentence 3.] How can I help you? [2.6, sentence 4.] I'm in trouble. [2.6, sentence 11.] Why? What happened? [2.6, sentence 12.] A rather small thing. [1.17, sentence 13.] You have an automobile? [2.6, sentence 7. | Yes. Why? I need an automobile. [2.5, sentence 5.] Why? Why do you need an automobile? I wish to go to the city quickly. [1.15, sentence 14.] Very welL Please come with me. [3.7, sentence 1.] Thank you very much.

The preceding conversation is an illustration of the kind of work which can be carried out with the materials of the first four lessons. We stress, as we have stressed before and will continue to stress, that proportionate attention must be given to grammatical (including vocabulary) drill; for if the student is not provided with the necessary linguistic reflexes, his progress in the colloquial—and later, the written—language will be hindered. Lessons 9, 10 and 11 continue with the expansion of the sentence type by postpositional phrases. Sections 11.4 and 11.4.1 discuss a second type of adjective (i.e., one

INTRODUCTION

21

whiich has the same form for gender, number and case), and 11.5 to 11.5.1 the formation of ¡interrogative sentences (see the remarks relating to this in the paragraph preceding the example conversation, above). A new element is introduced in 12.2, a verbal cluster, conssisting of a verbal stem and a verb (see Lesson 28 for a fuller treatment). Here the veiibal cluster translates the English verbal phrase comprising the verb "can" ("to be able") andl a second verb. For example, larka Hindi bol sakta hai "The boy can speak Hindi." andl larki Aiigrezi satnajh sakti hai "The girl can understand English." To be exact, thiss is not a "new" element, but rather an expansion of the verb, for the verbal cluster funactions as a unit, identical with the "simple" verbs previously encountered. In the sarme manner that the student has been conditioned to the utterance, adml chote larke-ko deklhta hai "The man sees the little boy.," so he assimilates the extension with sakna: a dim! chote larke-ko dekh sakta hai "The man can sec the little boy." Subsequent sections lead the student through the formation of negative sentences, posssessive adjectives, and in Lesson 14, the equivalent to the English genitive construction —tHie -ka postpositional phrase, which again, is a substitution and extension of the adjecttive (see 4.3, et passim). Compare: chota bhal Hindi bolta hai "The little brother speaaks Hindi." and us-ka bhal Hindi bolta hai "His brother speaks Hindi." or larke-ka bhail Hindi bolta hai "The boy's brother speaks Hindi."; and mal chote bhU-sc saval pudhta hu "I ask the littk brother questions." and mal us-ke bhiu-se saval puchta hu "I ask his brother questions.," or mal larke-ke bhal-se saval puchta hu "I ask the boy'» brotther questions." With the introduction of the subjunctive (section 14.4) and the futuire (section 15.1), the formation of complex sentences can be considered (sections 18.11, ff.); and thus this procedure is maintained through the succeeding lessons, with the addlition of new constructions and refresher drills. Continued experience will instill a feeliing for nuances and style. This, in substance, is the way the learner—or, as a matter of ffact, any other American—has acquired and continually augments the dialect of English he uses. From Lesson 17 on, the texts, larger and fully annotated, are designed to acquaint the student with the flexibility and range of expression of the language—conversational, narrrative, expository, etc. (At about this point the student is ready to undertake reading in tlhe script, the instructional materials for which are contained in the companion volume, Inrooductory Hindi Readings.) English newspapers and magazine articles concerned with Indiian topics have been found to be very useful in providing additional topics for exercisses in advanced conversation and composition. Slides illustrating various aspects of the Indiian scene may be employed for supplementary conversational materials. These may be mtilized in several ways. The native speaker may use the contents of the slides (or pictiures) for themes of addresses to the students, after which he questions the students aboiut the content of his talks. Another approach is for the native speaker to record a nuimber of discourses, which at the proper times, are played back to the students (with or without the showing of slides or pictures) for exercise in aural recognition; or the studlents may be asked to discourse upon the contents of the slides or pictures. The time requirement for the completion of this course is dependent on the number of weekly hours allotted to it. A rough estimate, in terms of the course as it is described above, would be four semesters of sixteen weeks each, the first two semesters witlh seven hours of classes per week, and the second with four hours of classwork per

22

H I N D I GRAMMAR AND READER

week. For shorter courses, such as those offered during summer sessions, we recommend that the instructor reduce the number of example sentences to be memorized and concentrate on the student's acquiring the essentials of the grammar. In closing it may be of interest to note that the companion Urdu grammar parallels the arrangement of this book, making it possible for the student, who so desires or whose program of work requires training in both languages, to effect a facile transition from one to the other with a minimum of investment in time and effort. Furthermore, this book has a dual function. For the teacher it serves as a classroom text, while a researcher in Modern Indo-Aryan Languages can employ it as a Reference Grammar. The Index and the Table of Contents offer ample guides and the examples accompanying the grammatical statements (including observations on "usage") provide the necessary clarification.

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

Lesson 1 1. The symbols and the Hindi sounds which they represent. The student should read through the entire lesson carefully before returning to study the separate sections. 1.1 Vowels: a: has the value of the vowel in English father, balm, but without any trace of the diphthongization which occurs in English. a: has the value of the vowel in English cut, but, h u t i: approximates the value of the vowel in English meet, beat, but without the final y-glide of the English sound. i: while approximating the value of the vowel in English bit, hit, can be described as having the quality of the long i described above, but shorter in length, u: has the value of the vowel in English boot, loot, shoot, but without the final w-glide of the English sound. u: while approximating the value of the vowel of English put, foot, can be described as being a little shorter in length than the u described above. R E M A R K S : ( 1 ) i (except in the particle ki and certain Sanskrit loan-words), and u, are pronounced long in final position—i.e., in a word. (2) a, a, i, i are unrounded vowels. Care should be taken not to round the lips in their pronounciation. 1.1.1 In the example words which follow the consonant sounds are the same as the English: nag snake, ag fire, gajan roaring, gan singing, gay cow, jana to go, jab when, bas! enough! sab all, gaj elephant, ab now, bis twenty, blj seed, Imam belief, jugnl firefly, min fish, jinis commodity, bina without, biman dejected, 'biya seed, bisaj lotus, misna to be mixed, un wool, jumna to be accumulated, jus! treacle, ujas brightness, ugana to raise, janu knee, bug mosquito, musna to be stolen, muni holy man. 1.2 Consonants: 1.2.1 Non-aspirate stops: t: This is not English t It is a voiceless sound made with the tip of the tongue spread out against the upper teeth or slightly protruding past the teeth, as in pronouncing the English spirant, th of thick, thorn. Care must be taken not to aspirate it or to pronounce it as a fricative. d: This is not English d. It is executed like the t described above, but it is voiced.

25

26

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

p: as in English pin, put, but without the puff of breath which follows the English sound, b: as in English bet, boat. 12.2 Nasals: n: as in English neigh, m: as in English meet, moat 1.2.3 r: is a voiced sound made with the tip of the tongue tapping once or twice at the base of the upper teeth. 1.2.4 h: is a voiced sound; never voiceless as in English. 1 3 Examples of the sounds described above are: das ten, ham we, sat seven, ap you, itna this much, piti father, bis twenty, patni wife, dam less, dam price, turn you, bura bad, un wool, upar up, baha floated, bas! enough!,bar time, bara twelve, sab all, dabana to press down, tin three, tis thirty, rasta road, mat not, imarat building, adml man, madad help. 1.4 Vowels: e: has the value of the vowel in English get, bet. [ N O T E : a, when followed by h, has the same value. Examples are: rahna to stay, nahar canal, sahna to endure.] e: has the value of the vowel in English say, pay, but without the final y-glide of the English sound. REMARKS: e, e are unrounded vowels. Care should be taken not to round the lips in their pronunciation. o: has the value of the vowel in English bought, caught. o: has the value of the vowel in English no, hoe, toe, but without the final w-glide of the English sound. 1.4.1 Diphthongs: ai: is made by pronouncing a (See 1.1, above.), followed immediately by i (See 1.1, above.). [ N O T E : a variant pronunciation, e (See 1.4.), is often encountered.] au: is made by pronouncing a, followed immediately by u (See 1.1, above.). 1.5 Non-aspirate stops: k: as in English coat, kite, but without the puff of breath which follows the English k-sound. g: as in English get, goat. c: as in English church, chin, but without the puff of breath which follows the English sound. j: as in English joke, jam. 1.5.1 y: as in English yes, yoke. When in final position following a vowel or between vowels, it is a glide-sound like that of the second member of the English diphthong in say, pay. 1: is a voiced sound made with the tip of the tongue spread out against the upper teeth, v: is a voiced sound approximating the w of English walk, wall. In a variant pronunciation the upper teeth brush lightly against the lower lip, approximating the v of English very, vat. 1.6 Examples of the sounds described in sections 1.4 to 1.5.1 are: behtar better, mehman guest, mehrib arch, mehnat toil, meharbani kindness, ek one, lena to take, kohra fog, ohda rank, mohar seal, or direction, log people, sona to sleep,

LESSON

1

27

do two, jo who, hai is, aisa such (this kind), kaisa what kind, paisa money, tairna to swim, nau nine, caubis twenty-four, kaun who, kam work, kitna how much, halka light, rokiia to stop, sarkar government, carna to graze, calna to walk, bacana to save, sac true, gala throat, gahra deep, cugna to peck, degca small kettle, nag snake, jina to go, juta shoe, bij seed, gaj elephant, seb apple, yad memory, garml summer, yatri traveller, gaya gone, liya taken, gay cow, girna to fall, vir hero, bolna to speak, mul root, vac speech, hava wind, lova fox, basula adze, vah! excellent! 1.7 Consonants (retroflex stops): t: is a voiceless, non-aspirate consonant made with the tip of the tongue touching the hard palate farther back than the contact-point for making English td: is a voiced consonant made with the tip of the tongue touching the upper palate farther back than the contact-point for making English ot, khara upright, ath eight, baithna to sit, thik exact, mitha sweet, rudh traditional, rudhl custom, barhna to grow, burha old. 1.10 Other nasal consonants: n (See 12.2), before t, th, d, dh, c, ch, j, jh, t, th, d, dh, is executed with the tongue in the same position as for making these sounds. When it occurs before the retroflex stops (t, th, d, dh), it is written with a dot beneath it, thus: n (n also occurs in Sanskrit loanwords—e.g., man! jewel, ran battle.) When it occurs before k, kh, g, gh, it is pronounced like the sound ng in English sing, singer, and written thus: n.

28

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

Examples are: ant end, andar in, andhi blind, incna to be pulled, injan engine, kunji key, anthl seed, anda egg, rang color, sangin bayonet. 1.11 Sibilants: s: as in English sap, singer. s: is a voiceless sound made with the tongue farther back than for making the sh of English shape, ship. s: is a variant of s, occurring before the retroflex stops, t, th. It is executed with the tip of the tongue at the contact-point for making the retroflex stops. Examples are: sat seven, asan easy, bas! enough!, sabd sound, sarad autumn, isvar God, kas whip, Kasi Banaras, ista desired, cesta attempt, adhisthit appointed. 1.12 Other sounds are those occurring mainly in Perso-Arabic loan-words and in European borrowings, along with one (h) which occurs only in Sanskrit loan-words. h: duhkha grief, duhsaha unbearable, prayah often. f: is a bilabial voiceless fricative, often a voiceless labio-dental fricative, as in English foot, fickle. Example are: daftar office, hafta week. z: a voiced sound as in English zip, zing. Examples are: bazar market, hazar thousand, k: is a k-sound made with the hump of the tongue touching the back of the soft palate. Examples are: hak true, hukam command. kh: is a voiceless fricative made with the tongue in the same position as for pronouncing k, but not touching the palate. Examples are: bukhar fever, akhir end. g: is a voiced guttural fricative made with the hump of the tongue farther back than for pronouncing kh. Examples are: bag garden, garib poor. R E M A R K S : k, kh and g are often pronounced as k, kh, and g, respectively. 1.13 Long or double consonants: These are indicated by writing the symbols twice—e.g., kk, tt, cc, etc. They are fashioned by maintaining the articulation almost twice as long as for making the single sound. In the case of the aspirates, when they are doubled, the aspiration comes at the end of the consonant cluster. They are written thus: kkh, cch, tth, etc. Examples are: bilE cat, battis thirty-two, unnls nineteen, kutta dog, tattu pony, mohalla neighborhood, mohabbat love, akkhad undisciplined, rude, accha good, atthari eighteen, addha half, ghatthi small landing-place, chutthx holiday, jhakkl chatterer, tatta screen, tarrar pickpocket, tutthajan blue vitriol, dabba leather oil vessel, nakku wicked, paddhati row, palli small village, baddha bound, chabbis twenty-six. 1.14 The conversations given here and in the lessons following are designed to provide the student with practice in hearing the language as it is spoken, as well as for purposes of practice in pronunciation. Care must be taken in pronounciation to give each symbol its proper sound value. (See discussion, above, 1.-1.13*) In groups of consonants each consonant must be given its proper value. The slurring of one into the other must be avoided. The English sentence which accompanies each Hindi sentence is not a literal translation of the Hindi, but the English equivalent of the Hindi sentence. The student, at this time, should not try to isolate separate words to determine their English meaning, but memorize each Hindi sentence as a whole. Grammatical explanations are given in the lessons following. [ • T h e numerals refer to sections.]

LESSON

do yatriyo-ki batclt. namaste. namaste. kya yah bas-ka adda hai? nahl. yah to stesan hai. phir bas-ka adda kahl hai? vah to d5 mil dur hai. kis taraf? ck mil bayi taraf jaiyc, aur phir diyf taraf muriye. Sri MurtI: bayi taraf, aur phir day? taraf?

Sri Sri Sri Sri Sri Sri Sri Sri

1.15 MurtI: «Gupta: MurtI: Gupta: ."MurtI: (Gupta: MurtI: (Gupta:

Sri (Gupta: ji hi. pahilc bayi taraf, aur phir day? taraf. Sri MurtI: kya ap jante hai ki bas kab jati hai? Sri Gupta: ap kaha jana cahte hai? Sri MurtI: mai Prayag jana cahta hu. Sri Gupta: vaha-kc liyc bas tin ghanto-mc chutti hai. Sri MurtI: tin ghanto-me? A

" *

w

tf

29

1

Conversation Between Two Travellers. Mr. MurtI: Hello. Mr. Gupta: Hello. Mr. MurtI: Is this the bus depot? Mr. Gupta: No. This is the train station. Mr. MurtI: Then where is the bus station? Mr. Gupta: That is two miles away. Mr. MurtI: In which direction? Mr. Gupta: Go to the left for one mile, and then turn right. Mr. MurtI: To the left, and then to the right? Mr. Gupta: Yes. First to the left, and then to the right. Mr. MurtI: Do you know when the bus leaves? Mr. Gupta: Where do you wish to go? Mr. MurtI: I wish to go to Allahabad. Mr. Gupta: That bus leaves in three hours. Mr. Mr. Mr. Mr.

MurtI: Gupta: MurtI: Gupta:

In three hours? Yes. In three hours. Then I will go by that bus. Then you should go right away. Remember. First go to the left for one mile, and then turn to the right Mr. MùrtI: Thank you very much. Goodbye.

Sri Gupta: ji ha. tin ghanto-mc. Sri MurtI: tab mai us bas-sc jauga. Sri Gupta: tab ap abhi jaldl jaiyc. yad rakhiye. pahile ck mil bayf or, aur phir day! 5r muriye. Sri MurtI: bahut bahut dhanyavad. namaste. REMARKS: (1) namaste is a polite form of address for greetings upon meeting, as well as for departure. (2) stesan is a borrowed word from English. The rule for s before t does not apply. (See 1.11.) (3) ap is the polite form of the second person pronoun. This is the form recommended for use. (4) Prayag is the older form for the name of the city of Allahabad. The other form is Dahabad. (5) The acknowledgement of thanks is not usually vocal. It can be indicated by a gesture of the hand or head—or both. 1.16 do dosto-ki batdt Conservation Between Two Friends. Sarad: namaste. Sarad: Hello. Rajendra: namaste. Rajendra: Hello. Sarad: ap kaise hai? Sarad: How are you? Rajendra: mai bahut accha hu. Rajendra: I am very well. ap kaise hai? How are you?

30

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

Sarad :

mal-bhí accha hü. kya ghar-me sab log acche hal? Rájéndra: ha. bhagvan-ki kripa haL ghar-me sab log thik hal. Sarad: mal ap-sc batcit nahi kar sakta. men bas atí haL ab calna cahiyel Rájéndra: ap-se milkar mujhe bahut khusi hui. mujhc ummld hai ki phir jaldi milege. Rájéndra: meri-bhí aisi ummíd haL Sarad: ñamaste. Rájéndra: ñamaste.

Sarad:

I am very well, too. Is everyone at home all right? Rajendra: Yes. It is God's kindness. Everyone at home is all right. Sarad: I cannot speak with you. My bus is coming. I must leave. Rajendra: I am very glad to have met you.

Sarad:

Sarad:

1.17 Mohan aur Sohan milte haí Móhan: Ram Ram Sóhan: Ram Ram Mohan: turn kaha jate ho? Sóhan: mal apné bhü-se milne jita hü. Móhan: tumhare chote bháí-se? Sóhan: nahi. bare bhai-se. Móhan: mal unhe nahi janta. ve kaha rahte hai? Sóhan: ve sahar-me rahte hai. Móhan: ve kya karte hai? Sóhan: ve vakil hai. Móhan: kya ap muslbat-me hai? Sóhan: nahi. ch5ti-si bat haL Móhan: sab thik thik to hai—na? Sóhan: jí ha. sab thik thak haL rneri bas ati hai. accha, ab mai jata hü. ñamaste. Móhan: ñamaste.

Rajendra: I hope so, too. Sarad: Good-by. Rajendra: Good-by. Mohan and Sohan Meet. Mohan: Ram Ram. Sohan: Ram Ram. Mohan: Where are you going? Sohan: I am going to see my brother. Mohan: Your younger brother? Sohan: No. My older brother. Mohan: I do not know him. Where does he live? Sohan: He lives in the city. Mohan: What does he do? Sohan: He is a lawyer. Mohan: Are you in trouble? Sohan: No. A rather small matter. Mohan: Everything is all right—isn't it.' Sohan: Yes. Everything is all right My bus is coming. Well, Fm going now. Good-by. Mohan: Good-by.

I hope that we'll meet again soon.

REMARKS: (1) Ram Ram is a rustic form of greeting. ( 2 ) turn is the form of the second person pronoun between equals and to people of lower status—e.g., servants. (The student is advised to use the polite form, ap).

Lesson 2 2.1

mal dekhta hu. mai dekhti hu.

I (msc.) see. I (fm.) see.

vah dekhta hai. vah dekhti hai.

He sees. She sees.

ham dekhte hai. ham dekhti hai.

We (msc.) see. We (fm.) see.

turn dekhte ho. turn dekhti ho.

You (msc.) see. You (fm.) see.

ap dekhte hai. ap dekhti hai.

You (msc.) see. You (fm.) see.

ve dekhte hai. ve dekhti hai.

They (msc.) see. They (fm.) see.

The sentences listed above illustrate the present tense of the Hindi verb in all three persons, singular and plural. This tense indicates an act going on in present time, or a general statement, as is expressed in such English sentences as The children play, The women cook, Men work, Rocks fall. It does not translate the Progressive Present tense of English as in The children are playing, The rocks are falling, The woman is cooking, The men are working. Hindi has another construction to indicate this construction (See 23.1). Each of the Hindi sentences, given above, consists of three words. The first word in each Hindi sentence translates the pronoun in the corresponding English sentence. The remaining two words comprise the Hindi verb. The first of the two words is a present participle and the second the present tense of the verb to be, to exist The participle agrees with the subject of the verb in gender and number—a for masculine singular nouns, -e for masculine plural, and -1 for feminine singular and plural. The present tense of the verb to be is: hu, first person singular; hai, third person singular; ho, second person plural; hai, the remaining plural forms. R E M A R K S : ( 1 ) Both forms given for the second person are plural. They also serve to translate into Hindi the second person singular of English, ap is employed as an

31

32

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

honorific form, applied to persons to whom respect or honor is intended, turn is normally employed towards equals or acquaintances and to servants. (See 1.3.3, Remarks (2).) (2) The stem of the verb is obtained by dropping the final vowel and the preceding -t- of the participle. The stem of the verb to see given in the sentences above is, therefore, dekh. (3) It will be seen in the Conversations, following, that this tense also functions as a weak future. 2.1.1 More examples follow. [ N O T E : For the time being, the student should consider kam kar as the stem of the verb to work.] mal kahtà hu. mai khàtà hu. mal pahucta hu.

I (msc.) say. I (msc.) eat. I (msc.) arrive.

mai puchtì hù. mal calti hu. mai piti hu.

I (fm.) ask. I (fm.) walk. I (fm.) drink.

vah daurta hai. vah khèlta hai. vah kudta hai.

He runs. He plays. He jumps.

vah calti hai. vah bolti hai. vah pakàti hai.

She walks. She speaks. She cooks.

ham late hai. ham sòtè hai. ham pitè hai.

We (msc.) bring. We (msc.) sleep. We (msc.) drink.

ham jati hai. ham tairti hai. ham rahti hai.

We (fm.) go. We (fm.) swim. We (fm.) live.

tum khàtè ho. tum samajhtè ho. tum ite ho.

You (msc.) eat. You (msc.) understand You (msc.) come.

tum kahti ho. tum bolti ho. tum khèltì hó.

You (fm.) say. You (fm.) speak. You (fm.) play.

ap puchte hai. ap parhte hai. ap pite hai.

You (msc.) ask. You (msc.) read. You (msc.) drink.

ap kudti hai. ap daurti hai. ap bhejti hai.

You (fm.) jump. You (fm.) run. You (fm.) send.

LESSON

vë pahuctë haï.

33

2

They (msc) arrive,

vë kàm kartë haï.

They (msc.) work,

vë dëtë haï.

They (msc) give.

vë pakâtï haï.

They ( f m . ) cook,

vë samajhtï haï.

They ( f m . ) understand,

vë rahtï haï.

They ( i m . ) stay.

2.1.2 Exercise 1. List the stems of the verbs in 2.1.1. 2.1.3 Exercise 2. Translate into English: I. âp caltë hat. 2. vah pahuctï hai. 3. turn sôtë hô. 4. vë khëltê haï. 5. mai bôltï hù. 6. ham dëtê haï. 7. tum samajhtï hô 8. vah jâtâ hai. 9. vë kahtë haï. 10. âp lâtë haï. I I . vah âtâ hai. 12. ham kahtï haï. 13. tum parhtï hô. 14. mai kùdtâ hû. 15. vah rahtï hai. 16. tum pùchtë hô. 17. vë tairtï haï . 18. âp daurtë haï. 19. ham khâtë haï. 20. mai kâm kartâ hû. 2.1.4 Exercise 3. Translate into Hindi: 1. They (msc.) go. 2. H e says. 3. You (hon. pl. fem.) speak. 5. He plays. 6. She walks. 7. They (msc.) speak. 8. W e ( f m . ) 10. You ( f m . ) jump. 11. W e (msc.) arrive. 12. I (msc.) work. (msc.) cook. 15. They ( f m . ) ask. 16. W e (msc.) bring. 17. W e read. 19. She sleeps. 20. You (hon. pL msc.) drink.

4. I ( f m . ) understand. run. 9. I (msc.) play. 13. She stays. 14. Y o u ( f m . ) say. 18. I ( f m . )

2.2 larkâ caltâ hai. larkë caltë haï.

T h e boy walks. T h e boys walk.

bëtâ khâtâ hai.

T h e son eats. T h e sons eat.

bëtë khâtë hai. kuttâ pitâ hai. kuttë pitc haï.

T h e dog drinks. T h e dogs drink.

baccà khëltâ hai. baccë khëltë haï.

T h e child plays. T h e children play.

gadhâ daurtà hai.

T h e donkey runs. T h e donkeys run.

gadhc daurtë haï.

This section illustrates masculine nouns ending in -a in the subject form, singular, which replace the -a with -ë in the subject form, plural. R E M A R K S : Hindi does not have an equivalent for the English article the. 2.2.1 Exercise 1. Fashion sentences of the type given in 2.2 with the verbs of 2.1.1 and the following nouns, both in the singular and the plural: bakri goat, ghôrâ horse, t o t ! parrot, bhëriyi wolf, bachrà calf. 2.2.2 Exercise 2. Translate into English: 1. bëtâ khâtâ hai. 2. baccà daurtà hai. 3. kuttâ kudtâ hai. 4. bachra khâtâ hai. 5. gadhâ rahtâ hai. 6. larkâ parhtâ hai. 7. ghôrâ caltâ hai. 8. tôtâ pûchtà hai. 9. bachrë khëltê haï. 10. gadhë âtê haï. 11. kuttë lâtë haï. 12. baccë pïtë haï. 13. bakrë jâtë haï. 14. ghôrë pahûctë haï. 15. bhëriyâ rahtâ hai. 16. larkâ dëkhtà hai. 17. tôtë kahtë haï. 18. bhëriyë daurtë haï. 19. bakrâ khâtâ hai. 20. bëtë caltë haï.

34

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

2.23 Exercise 3. Translate into Hindi: 1. The goat comes. 2. The calves eat. 3. The child drinks. 4. The donkey walks. 5. The dog plays. 6. The parrots sleep. 7. The wolf jumps. 8. The horse runs. 9. The children swim. 10. The goats stay. 11. The boys speak. 12. The son sends. 13. The donkeys go. 14. The dogs swim. 15. The horses bring. 16. The boy asks. 17. The wolves arrive. 18. The parrot understands. 19. The sons say. 20. The calf lives. 2.3 larki samajhti bai. The girl understands, larkiy! samajhtl haï. The girls understand. bëtï pakâtï haL bëtiya pakâtï haï.

The daughter cooks, The daughters cook.

billï sôti hai. billiya sôtï haï.

The cat sleeps, The cats sleep.

patnl lâtï hai. patniyi lâtï haï.

The wife brings, The wives bring.

ghôrï daurtï hai. ghôriyâ daurtï haï.

The mare runs, The mares run.

This section illustrates feminine nouns which end in -i in the subject form, singular. This -I is replaced by -iyâ to form the subject form, plural. 2.3.1 Exercise 1. Fashion sentences of the type given in 2.3 with the verbs of 2.1.1 and the following nouns, both in the singular and the plural: machE fish, lômrï fox, murgî hen, makkhï fly, bakri goat 232 Exercise 2. Translate into English: I. bakri art hai. 2. makkhiyâ jâtï haï. 3. murgï pïtï hai. 4. billï daurtï hai. 5. machlï khâtl hai. 6. larkiyâ parhtî haï. 7. lômrï kudtï hai. 8. patnï pakâtï hai. 9. ghôrï dëkhtï hai. 10. bêtî samjhtï hai. 11. machliyâ khâtï haï. 12. murgiyà kùdtï haï. 13. billiyâ khëltï haï. 14. makkhï caltï hai. 15. bëtiyâ parhtî haï. 16 bakriyâ rahtï haï. 17. patniyà pùchtï haï. 18. larkï bhëjtï hai. 19. ghôriyâ âtï haï. 20. lômriyâ daurtë haï. 23.3 Exercise 3. Translate into Hindi: 1. The goats eat. 2. The cat drinks. 3. The wife arrives. 4. The fish eats. 5. The girls ask. 6. The foxes run. 7. The cats play. 8. The hen runs. 9. The daughters speak. 10. The flies go. 11. The wives cook. 12. The girl works. 13. The fox sees. 14. The hens drink. 15. The daughter reads. 16. The fly stays. 17. The daughter understands. 18. The fish lives. 19. The daughters say. 20. the goat sleeps. 2.4 The numbers 1 to 10: ëk 1, do 2, tin 3, car 4, pac 5, cha (or che) 6, sât 7, âth 8, nau 9, das 10. 2.5 ma* bêtï-kï bàtcït. Conversation Between Mother and Daughter, ma: bed! Mother: Daughter! bëtï: hâ. Daughter: Yes. ma: jaldi yahi âô. Mother: Come here quickly. betï: âp kyâ càhtï haï? Daughter: What do you wish? ma: mujhë ilû aur gôbhï câhiye. Mother: I need potatoes and cauliflower. bëtï: kyâ mai bazar jâû? Daughter: Shall I go to the bazaar?

LESSON

ma: hi. bazar jió. yê paisë lo. bëtï: kôï aur cîz câhiyë? mi: agar matar tâzë ho, tô kuch kharïd lënâ. bëtï: bahut acchâ. mâ: âlu aur gôbhï mat bhulnâ.

2

35

Yes. Go to the bazaar. Take this money. Daughter: Do you want anything else? Mother: If the peas are fresh, buy some. Mother:

Daughter: Very well. Mother: Do not forget the potatoes and cauliflower. bëtï: acchâ, nahï bhulugï. Daughter: All right, ril not forget Come back quickly. mâ: jaldï vâpas ânâ. Mother: dër mat lagânâ. Don't be long. mai kuë-së pânï câhûgï. I will want water from the welL bëtï: bahut acchâ. dër nahï lagâugL Daughter: Very welL I won't be long. REMARKS: (1) In pairs of words, Hindi often leaves unexpressed, the linking conjunction and. Such pairs of words are indicated in this book by a raised dot, thus: (*) See above, ma'beti mother and daughter. (2) The Hindi expression der mat lagana may be used as the equivalent of such English expressions as "Don't be long.", Don't delay.", "Don't waste time. etc. 2.6 môtargârï-ki tûtnâ. Automobile Breakdown. calânêvâlâ: âp-kë pas samay hai? Motorist: Do you have time? kisin: kyô? âp kyâ câhtë haï? Farmer: Why? What do you want? calânêvâlâ: mujhë ip-kï madad câhiyë. Motorist: I need your help. kisân: mai âp-kî kain madad kar Farmer: How can I help you? saktâ hû? calânêvâlâ: kyl âp Angrëzï samajhtë haï? Motorist: Do you understand English? kisân: jï hâ. thon Angrëzï samajhtâ Farmer: Yes. I understand a little English. hû. calânêvâlâ: acchâ, tô ghir mai Hindî-më Motorist: All right, then 111 speak in HindL bat karûgâ. kisân: acchï bat Farmer: OJL. calânêvâlâ: mërï Hindi bahut acchi nahï. Motorist: My Hindi is not very good. kisân: mai âp-kô acchi tarah samajh Farmer: I can understand you welL saktâ hû. calânêvâlâ: mai musïbat-më hû. Motorist: I am in trouble. kisân: kyô? kyâ hua? Farmer: Why? What happened? calânêvâlâ: mërï môtar tut gayï haL Motorist: My car broke down. kisân: mai kaisi ma dad kar saktâ hu? Farmer How can I help? calânêvâlâ: kyâ âp kôï mikenik jintë hai? Motorist: Do you know any mechanic? kisân: jî hâ. dô mil dur-par ëk Farmer: Yes. There is a mechanic two mikenik haL miles away. calânêvâlâ: kis ôr? Motorist: In which direction? kisân: sïdhë âgë-kô. Farmer: Straight ahead. •ah bahut acchâ mikenik haL He is a very good mechanic. calânêvâlâ: bahut bahut dhanyavâd. Motorist: Thank you very much. REMARKS: For acknowledgement of thanks see remark 5 of 13.1.

Lesson 3 larkâ bôlnâ câhtâ hai. larkë khëlni câhtë haï. larkï ç a k â n â câhtî hai. larkiyi d ë k h n i câhtî haï. m a i sônâ càhtâ hû. tum k â m k a r n i cihtê ho. vah daurnâ câhtî hai. h a m lënâ câhtî haï. â p dënâ cihtê haï. vë parhnâ cihti haï.

T h e boy wants to speak. T h e boys want to play. T h e girl wishes to cook. T h e girls wish to see. I want to sleep. You want to work. She wants to run. We wish to take You wish to give. They want to read.

T h i s section illustrates the H i n d i construction which translates the English phrase, wants to, wishes to . . . ( T h e g a p represents the verb to be translated.) T h e H i n d i construction consists of the verb c i h n i to wish, want, immediately preceded by the infinitive of the verb. R E M A R K S : T h e infinitive of the verb is fashioned by attaching the suffix -nâ to the verb stem. (See remark 2 of 2.1.) 3.1.1 Exercise 1. List the infinitives of the verbs of sec. 2.1.1. 3.1.2 Exercise 2. Fashion as many sentences as you can of the type illustrated in sec. 3.1, using the vocabulary (including pronouns) learned up to this point. 3.1.3 Exercise 3. Translate into English: 1. m a i jànà câhtâ hu. 2. baccâ khëlnâ câhtâ hai. 3. ghôrë kùdnâ câhtë haï. 4. ham parhnâ câhtî haï. 5. ghôrî pïnâ câhtî hai. 6. kuttê ânâ câhtë haï. 7. vah khânâ câhtâ hai. 8. larkï pùchnâ câhtî hai. 9. tum bhëjnâ câhtë hô. 10. patnï pakânâ câhtî hai. 11. larkâ k â m karnâ câhtâ hai. 12. tôtâ bôlnâ câhtâ hai. 13. bëtï rahnâ câhtî hai. 14. â p pahucnâ câhtë haï. 15. larkë bhëjnâ cahtë haï. 16. bëtiyâ calnâ câhtî haï. 17. machliyâ tairnâ câhtî haï. 18. bachrë daurnâ câhtë haï. 19. vë dëkhnâ câhtî haï. 20. billiyâ sônâ câhtî haï. 3.1.4 Exercise 4. Translate into H i n d i : 1. I ( m s c . ) want to give. 2. T h e child wants to eat. 3. T h e girls want to walk. 4. You ( m s c . ) want to take. 5. T h e parrot wants to drink. 6. T h e son wants to work. 7. T h e wife wants to ask. 8. She wants to cook. 9. T h e boys want to play. 10. T h e y ( f m . ) want to read. 11. T h e daughter wants to ask. 12. T h e cats want to go. 13. H e wants to send. 14. T h e calf wants to run. 15. T h e sons want to work. 16. You (hon. msc.) want to

36

LESSON

3

37

arrive. 17. The dog wants to sleep. 18. The hen wants to eat. 19. The foxes want to come. 20. We (msc) want to walk. 3.2 larki acchi hai. T h e boy is good, larkc acchë haï. The boys are good, larki acch! hai. T h e girl is good, larkiyi acchl haï. T h e girls are good, juta p u r i n i hai. The shoe is old. jute purine haï. T h e shoes are old. sabzï pakkï hai. The vegetable is ripe, sabziya pakkï haï. T h e vegetables are ripe, maï bhûkhâ hû. I (msc.) am hungry, ham bhùkhï haï. W e ( f m . ) are hungry, vah pyasi hai. H e is thirsty, vë chôti haï. They ( f m . ) are small. This section illustrates the Hindi equivalent of the English predicate-adjective construction. The adjective agrees in gender and number with the subject of the verb. Adjectives modifying masculine nouns end in -a for the singular and -€ for the plural. Adjectives modifying feminine nouns end in -ï for both the singular and the plural. REMARKS: (1) Observe that the normal position of the Hindi verb is at the end of the sentence. See 2.1 for the present tense of the verb to be. (2) The type of adjective given in the sentences above is identified by the subject form, singular, masculine—i.e., ends in -a, which is replaced by -ë in the masculine plural and by -ï in the feminine, singular and plural. (3) Henceforth, nouns, on their initial appearance in this book, when not otherwise identified, will be marked by an a or ï in parentheses to indicate their gender— i.e., jûtâ ( I ) "shoe," sabzï (ï) "vegetable." (4) purânâ translates old, ancient, of long standing, while biirhi translates old, aged, advanced in years. 3.2.1 Exercise 1. Fashion as many sentences as you can of the type illustrated in 3.2 with the following adjectives and the nouns and pronouns learned u p to this point: môtâ fat, jhûthâ false, burha old, b u r l bad, d u b l i lean, bara large. 3.2.2 Exercise 2. Translate into English: 1. vah bhùkhï hai. 2. baccë pyâsë haï. 3. mai bûrhà hû. 4. billï môtï hai. 5. gadhê barë haï. 6. tum dubll hô. 7. bëtiyâ acchï haï. 8. larkë bhûkhë haï. 9. ham chôtë haï. 10. lômrl jhuthï hai. 11. tum barë hô. 12. vë burë haï. 13. jûtâ chôtâ hai. 14. patnï acchï hai. 15. larkiyi bhùkhï haï. 16. âp pyâsë haï. 17. ghôrâ barâ hai. 18. sabziyi acchï haï. 19. ghôrï môtï hai. 20. billï burî hai. 3.2.3 Exercise 3. Translate into Hindi: 1. The horses are old. 2. The wife is hungry. 3. H e is lean. 4. T h e shoes are big. 5. T h e fish is small. 6. T h e donkeys are bad. 7. They ( f m . ) are thirsty. 8. T h e cat is hungry. 9. The daughters are lean. 10. T h e mare is small. 11. The hen is hungry. 12. I (fm.) am thirsty. 13. The flies are small. 14. You (fm.) are false. 15. She is small. 16. We (msc.) are good. 17. The vegetables are big. 18. T h e (female) goat is hungry. 19. You (msc.) are fat. 20. She is thirsty.

38

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

33 idml kam karti hai. Idmï kam karte haï.

T h e man works. T h e men work.

patì pnchti hai.

T h e husband asks.

patì pfichtê haï.

T h e husbands ask.

bhai dêtâ haL

T h e brother gives.

bhü dêtë hai.

T h e brothers give.

jànvar da urta hai.

T h e animal runs.

jânvar da urte hai.

T h e animals run.

bail khictâ haL bail khictê hai.

T h e ox drags. T h e oxen drag.

ma kin naya hai. makân nayê haï.

T h e house is new. T h e houses are new.

phal pakki haL

T h e fruit is ripe.

phal pakkc haï.

T h e fruits are ripe.

This section illustrates masculine nouns which have the same form for the subject, singular and plural. R E M A R K S : With such nouns the verb form indicates whether the subject is singular or plural. 3.3.1 Exercise 1. Fashion as many sentences as you can with the following nouns (See 3.3.) and verbs, as well as with the verbs and adjectives learned up to this point: hithï elephant, sêr lion, bandar monkey, rich bear, iit camel, nahanâ to bathe, baithnâ to sit, thaharnâ to stop. 3 3 . 2 Exercise 2 Translate into English: 1. hâthî khàtë haï. 2. sër pita hai. 3. ut daurtâ hai. 4. rich âtê haï. 5. patï kâm kartâ hai. 6. bandar khêltë haï. 7. âdmï bôltâ hai. 8. hâthî sôtâ hai. 9. bhâî bhëjtê haï. 10. bail jâtë haï. 11. makân barâ hai. 12. sër bhûkhë haï. 13. patï acchâ hai. 14. bandar burâ hai. 15. phal pakkâ hai. 16. bhâî kâm karnâ câhtë haï. 17. bandar khëlnâ câhtâ hai. 18. jânvar khânâ câhtâ hai. 19. âdmï baithnâ câhtë haï. 20. rich baithnâ câhtâ hai. 3.3.3 Exercise 3. Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e husbands bathe. 2. T h e bear walks. 3. T h e man works. 4. T h e brothers ask. 5. T h e animal sits. 6. T h e elephants bathe. 7. T h e monkeys jump. 8. T h e men arrive. 9. T h e oxen eat. 10. T h e camels drag. 11. T h e houses are small. 12. T h e animals are hungry. 13. T h e brothers are good. 14. T h e fruit is ripe. 15. T h e lions are thirsty. 16. T h e husbands want to give. 17. T h e ox wants to stop. 18. T h e bears want to sit. 19. T h e animals want to eat. 20. T h e man wants to bathe.

3.4 ciz £girti hai.

T h e thing falls.

cïzë girti haï.

T h e things fall.

dukin jaltl haL

T h e shop burns.

dukinê jaltl haï.

T h e shops burn.

LESSON 3

fauj daurti hai. fauje daurte hal.

The army runs. The armies run.

chat tutti hai. chate tutti hal.

The roof breaks. The roofs break.

giy khati hai. gaye khati hai.

The cow eats. The cows eat.

aurat bolti hai. aurte bold hai.

The woman speaks. The women speak.

bahan bhejti hai. bahne bhejti hai.

The sister sends. The sisters send.

This section illustrates feminine nouns which form their subject form, plural, by adding -e to the subject form, singular. REMARKS: Nouns of more than one syllable drop the vowel -a- of the final syllable when the -e of the plural is added. Compare aurat: aurte, bahan : bahne. 3.4.1 Exercise 1: Translate into English: 1. dukane'girti hal. 2. aurat pakati hai. 3. gaye daurti hal. 4. bahan pahucti hai. 5. clze tuttl hai. 6. chate jaltl hal. 7. fauje thahartl hai. 8. gay khati hai. 9. bahne nahati hai. 10. fauj sot! hai. 11. clz ban hai. 12. chate nay! hat. 13. bahan bhukhl hai. 14. aurte pyasl hal. 15. dukan chotl hai. 16. fauj jana cahti hai. 17. gaye thaharna cahti ha!. 18. aurat pakana cahtl hai. 19. bahne baithna cahti hai. 20. aurte lena cahti hai. 3.4.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The thing breaks. 2. The sister asks. 3. The army sits. 4. The roof falls. 5. The cows drink. 6. The woman runs. 7. The armies walk. 8. The sisters walk. 9. The cows sleep. 10. The women cook. 11. The things are small. 12. The roofs are new. 13. The shop is big. 14. The sister is hungry. 15. The army is big. 16. The woman wants to bring. 17. The sisters want to read. 18. The army wants to sleep. 19. The cows want to eat. 20. The women want to cook. 3.5 The numbers 11 to 20. gyira (or gyarah) 11, bara (or barah) 12, tera (or terah) 13, cauda (or caudah) 14, pandra (or pandrah) 15, soli (or solah) 16, satra (or satrah) 17, atthara (or attharah) 18, unnls 19, bis 20. 3.6 raste-par. On the Street. calanevala: raste-se hato. Motorist: Get out of the street! sabzlvala: tum-ne kya kaha? Vegetable- What did you say? vendor: calanevala: raste-se hat jao! Motorist: Get out of the street! sabzlvala: kyo? Vegetable- Why? vendor: calanevala: kyo-ki yah khatarnak hai. Motorist: Because it is dangerous. sabzlvala: khatamalc kyo hai? Vegetable- Why is it dangerous? vendor: calanevala: kyo-ki abhi abhi men kar-se Motorist: Because my car almost hit you. tumhe cot lag jiti.

40

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

sabzivàlà:

kyi kahl? maì-ne samjhi nahi. calane vaia: kyà tum Hindi samajhte ho? sabzivàlà: ha. Hindi samajh sakti hu. par tumhiri Hindi nahl. calànèvàlà: accha, mai dhiic bòluga. riste-se hat ja5! accha? sabzivàlà: accha.

Vegetablevendor: Motorist: Vegetablevendor: Motorist:

What did you say? I didn't understand. D o you understand Hindi? Yes. ( I ) can understand Hindi. But not your Hindi. All right, Til speak more slowly. Get out of the street! All right? Vegetable- All right, vendor:

3.7 batrìt Mitra: mere sith aiyè. Mehtà: kya hui? Mitra: koi bat nahi. mere sàth iiye — na? Mehtà: I p kaha jate hai? Mitra: mal bazar jàtà hu. Mehtà: i p bazar kaise jate hai? Mitrà: mai paidal jaugi. is taraf aiyè. Mehtà: kidhar? Mitrà: suniye.

Conversation. Mitra: (Please) come with me. Mehta: What's the matter? Mitra: Nothing's the matter.

dayl taraf jiiye. Mehtà: us taraf? Mitrà: ha. us taraf. sivdhin rahiye. Mehtà: kyo? Mitrà: rista khatarnak hai. Mehtà: kyo khatarnak hai? Mitrà: yah bahut caura rista hai. gariyi aur mótrè bahut tèzi-se jati hai. Mehtà: acchi b a t mai savdhan rahugà. Mitrà: zara jaldi jaldi caliyé. mai der-se nahi pahueni cahti.

(Please) go to the right. Mehta: In that direction? Mitra: Yes. That way. (Please) be carefuL Mehta: Why? Mitra: The street is dangerous. Mehta: Why is it dangerous. Mitra: This is a very wide street. The carts and automobiles go very fast Mehta: O.K. I shall take care Mitra: (Please) walk a little quicker. I don't want to be late.

Mehta: Mitra: Mehta: Mitra: Mehta: Mitra:

(Please) come with me—won't you? Where are you going? I am going to the market How are you going to the market? I will walk. (Please) come this way. Where? (Please) listen.

Lesson 4 4.1 Additional vocabulary. 4.1.1 Feminine nouns of the type described in 3.4. (See the remarks of that section for a note relating to the dropping of the vowel a within a word.): mez table, rlt night, kitab book, tasvir picture, sarak street, road, imarat building, jagah place, davi medicine, hava wind. 4.1.2 Adjectives of the type described in 3.2: thanda cold, caura broad, lamba long, tall, uca high, mail! dirty, sukha dry, mitha sweet, patla thin, sacca true. 4.13 Exercise 1. Fashion as many sentences as possible with the words of the preceding two paragraphs, together with the vocabulary learned up to this point. 4.1.4 Exercise 2. Translate into English: I. imarat jaltl hai. 2. meze girt! hal. 3. tasvir tuttl hai. 4. sarak jatl hai. 5. havae atl hat. 6. kitabe girt! hai. 7. rat atl hai. 8. tasvlre girt! hai. 9. imarte jaltl hai. 10. mez tuttl hai. II. kitabe barl hai. 12. sarke caurl hai. 13. jagah barl hai. 14. davae buri hai. 15. mez nayl hai. 16. jaghe chotl hai. 17. imarte purani hai. 18. rat Iambi hai. 19. mez caurl hai. 20. kitab acchl hai. 4.1.5 Exercise 3. Translate into Hindi: 1. The table breaks. 2. The building falls. 3. The picture burns. 4. The winds go. 5. The night comes. 6. The roads go. 7. The pictures fall. 8. The tables fall. 9. The building burns. 10. The picture breaks. 11. The place is new. 12. The book is old. 13. The medicines are good. 14. The tables are old. 15. The roads are wide. 16. The buildings are small. 17. The place is good. 18. The medicine is new. 19. The books are big. 20. The building is old. 4.2 burhiya sote hai. The (little) old woman sleeps. burhiya sot! hai. The (little) old women sleep. ciriya urti hai. ciriya urti hai.

The sparrow flies. The sparrows fly.

handiya nayi hai. handiya nayi hai.

The cooking-pot is new. The cooking-pots are new.

cuhiya chotl hai.

The mouse is small. The mice are small.

cuhiya choti hai.

41

42

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

This section illustrates feminine nouns whose ending in the subject form, singular, is -iyi. The final -a is nasalized to form the subject form, plural (i.e., -a). R E M A R K S : The greater number of nouns of this class are diminutives or terms of endearment. 4.2.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. ciriyâ jâtl hai. 2. burhiyâ caltl ha!. 3. cuhiyâ daurtï haí. 4. burhiyâ sônâ câhtî hai. 5. cuhiyâ khânâ câhtî hai. 6. burhiyâ pyâsî hai. 7. ciriyâ chôtï haï. 8. hançliyà purânï hai. 9. ciriyâ dublï hai. 10. cuhiyâ bhûkhî haï. 4.2.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: I. The mouse comes. 2. The (little) old woman sleeps. 3. The sparrows fly. 4. The mice want to eat. 5. The sparrow wants to fly. 6. The (little) old women are hungry. 7. The mice are thirsty. 8. The cooking-pots are good. 9. The sparrows are hungry. 10. The cooking-pot is old. 43 acchi larki k i m karti hai. The good boy works, acchc larkë k i m kartë haï. The good boys work, acchï aurat k i m kartï hai. The good woman works, acchi aurtë k i m karti hai. The good women work. pyâsà pyisë pyisï pyisï

ghôri pïti hai. ghôrë pïtë haï. billï pïti hai. billiyi pïti haï.

The The The The

thirsty thirsty thirsty thirsty

dubli dublë dublï dublï

jinvar daurti hai. jinvar daurtê haï. bahan daurti hai. bahnë daurti haï.

The The The The

lean lean lean lean

horse drinks, horses drink, cat drinks, cats drink.

animal runs, animals run. sister runs, sisters run.

This section is concerned with adjectives whose subject form, singular, masculine, ends in -i (See 3.2, Remarks) modifying masculine and feminine nouns in the subject form, singular and plural. The adjective agrees in gender, number and form with the noun. Adjectives modifying masculine nouns in the subject form, singular, end in -a, and end in -ë when modifying nouns in the subject form, plural. Adjectives modifying feminine nouns end in -ï for both the singular and plural, subject form. R E M A R K S : dubli can also be translated into English as "skinny" or "emaciated." 43.1 Exercise 1. With the vocabulary learned up to this point construct as many sentences as possible of the type illustrated in 4.1. 43.2 Exercise 2. Translate into English: 1. bhûkhî billî khâtî hai. 2. burë kuttë daurtê haï. 3. pyâsî larkiyâ pïtî haï. 4. barà âdmî kâm kartâ hai. 5. acchâ larkâ parhtâ hai. 6. môtâ kuttâ sôtâ hai. 7. dublï larkï khêltï hai. 8. purânâ makân jaltâ hai. 9. pakkê phal girtë haï. 10. burhâ gadhâ khîctâ hai. 11. acchê larkë khëlnâ câhté haï. 12. chôtï billï khânâ câhtî hai. 13. dublë bakrë thaharnâ câhtë haï. 14. bhûkhî aurtë pakânâ câhtî haï. 15. pyàsë ghôrë pînâ câhtë haï. 16. chôtâ larkâ bhûkhâ hai. 17. bhûkhî larkï dublï hai. 18. barë âdmî bûrhë haï. 19. purânë jûtê chôtë haî. 20 barï gâyë môtî haï.

LESSON 4

43

4.3.3 Exercise 3. Translate into Hindi: I. T h e fat goats eat. 2. T h e thirsty girls drink. 3. The small women cook. 4. T h e big shop burns. 5. T h e hungry armies stop. 6. T h e bad monkeys play. 7. T h e old roof breaks. 8. The new building falls. 9. The hungry men work. 10. T h e little girls run. I I . T h e good sisters want to cook. 12. The little horse wants to stop. 13. T h e thirsty cows want to drink. 14. T h e hungry camel wants to drag. 15. T h e old man wants to sleep. 16. T h e little child is hungry. 17. T h e big shop is new. 18. The small fruits are ripe. 19. T h e wide road is long. 20. T h e new books are big. 4.4 idmi bähar jäte hai. idml andar ate hai. ham yahi rahtë haï. vë vahl daurtë haï. larkâ âge jâtâ hai. kuttl piche jätä hai. larkï pas jâb hai. ghôrâ pas-se jâtâ hai. bandar nice äti hai. patnï fauran jâti hai. baccâ jaldï-së âtâ hai. larkë dhïrê caltë haï. idmi dhîrë dhïrê boita hai. vc kabhï kabhï kam karte haï, larkë ëk-sâth khâtc haï. vah zyâdi khâti hai. vah bahut zyâdâ khâtâ haL idmï bahut Icâm kartâ haL larkâ bahut acchi hai. larkï bahut acchï haL jânvar bahut burâ hai. jânvar bahut burë haï.

The men go out. T h e men come in. We live here. They run there. The boy goes ahead. T h e dog goes behind. T h e girl goes near. The horse goes by. T h e monkey comes down. T h e wife leaves immediately. T h e child comes quickly. T h e boys walk slowly. T h e man speaks slowly. They work sometimes. T h e boys eat together. He eats (too) much. He eats very much. T h e man works very much. T h e boy is very good. T h e girl is very good. T h e animal is very bad. The animals are very bad.

This section is concerned with the adverbs. T h e student should encounter little difficulty in identifying the adverbs in the sentences above. All he need do is identify the noun (or pronoun) subject of each sentence and then the verb. T h e form or forms which remain are the adverbs. R E M A R K S : ( 1 ) Several of the adverbs consist of two words connected by a hyphen. These are to be considered a single form. ( 2 ) In two sentences the adverb is repeated. T h e repetition of the adverb indicates that the action modified by the adverb progresses at a uniform pace. ( 3 ) bahut modifies both adjectives and adverbs. 4.4.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. jânvar jaldî-së daurtë haï. 2. àdmî andar kâm kartâ hai. 3. ham yahà rahtë haï. 4. aurat dhîrë dhîrë bôltï hai. 5. tum bâhar jâtë hô. 6. bhâî bahut kâm kartë haï. 7. aurte andar pakâtl haï. 8. hâthï bahut zyâdâ khâtë haï. 9.

vë vahâ jâtë haï. 10. larkiyâ kabhï khëltï

haï. 11. pyâsâ ghôrâ jaldï-së pïtâ hai. 12. bhûkhë bandar nïcë jâtë haï. 13. chôtâ baccâ

44

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

piche ata hai. 14. bare hathl vaha rahte hai. 15. acchi larkiya ek-sath kheltT hal. 16. chote bacce bahar jana cahte hai. 17. bhukhi ghori jaldi-se khana cahti hai. 18. bara admi bahut kam karna cahta hai. 19. pyase bail kabhl kabhl thaharna cahte hai. 20. dubli aurte fauran khana cahti hai. 4.4.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The brothers eat together. 2. The girl goes out. 3. The woman comes in. 4. The children go behind. 5. T h e husband goes ahead. 6. The boy speaks slowly. 7. We (fm.) play sometimes. 8. The animals are very hungry. 9. They (fm.) eat too much. 10. I (fm.) walk slowly. 11. The hungry child eats quickly. 12. The thirsty horse drinks too much. 13. T h e bad monkey goes down. 14. T h e little boys play together. 15. The fat man goes by. 16. The big boys play outside. 17. The good girls want to cook inside. 18. The hungry animals want to come here. 19. The big elephant wants to come here. 20. The thirsty horse wants to drink quickly. 4.5 ck ädml sota hai. dö Idmi kam karte haï tin aurtë daurtï haï. car aurtë thahartï hai. pic Idmï khêltê haï. cha admi baithtë haï. sät aurtë nâctï haï. ith aurtë likhtï haï. nau idmï dhôtë haï. fias idmï khôdtë haï. gyiri aurtë lartî haï. biri ghôriyâ lëttï haï.

One man sleeps. Two men work. Three women run. Four women stop. Five men play. Six men sit down. Seven women dance. Eight women write. Nine men wash. Ten men dig. Eleven women fight.

Twelve mares lie down. This section illustrates the numerals functioning as adjectives. Their forms do not change for gender, number, subject, or object. 4.6 The numbers 21 to 30: ikkis 21, bais 22, teis 23, caubls 24, paccls 25, chabbls 26, sattiis 27, atthais 28, untis 29, fis 30.

4.7 ëk dëhitï-së bâtcït sarkârï afsar: namastë. dêhâtî: namastë. sarkârï afsar: kyi maï ip-së kuch sa val pûch saktà hû? dêhâti: pûchiyë. sarkârï afsar: is giv-ki nâm kyi hai? dëhâtl:

is giv-ki nâm Lilpur hai.

sarkârï afsar: k^i yah ip-ki ghar hai? dêhâti: ha. yah mëri ghar hai. sarkârï afsar: i p kyi kam kartë haï?

Conversation

with

a

Villager.

Government officer: Hello. Villager: Hello. Government officer: Can I ask you some questions? Villager: (Please) ask. Government officer: What is the name of this village? Villager: The name of this village is Lilpur. Government officer: Is this your house? Villager: Yes. This is my house. Government officer: What is your occupation?

LESSON 4

dehäti: mai kisän hü. sarkäri afsar: kyä äp köi düsrä käm-bhi karte hai? dehäti: ha. mal düsrä käm-bhi kartä hü. sarkärl afsar: düsrä kaun-sä käm äp karte hai? dehäti: fasal-ke bäd mal sahar-me käm kartä hü. sarkärl afsar: äp sahar-me kahä käm karte hai? dehäti: mal kapre-kl mil-me käm kartä hü. sarkärl afsar: kyä sirf äp kapre-ki mil-me kam karte hai?

45

Villager: I am a farmer. Government officer: Do you do any other work? Villager: Yes. I do other work, too. Government officer: What other work do you do? Villager: After the harvest I work in the city. Government officer: Where do you work in the city? Villager: I work in the cloth mill.

Government officer: Are you the only one who works in the cloth mill? dehäti: nahl. mere do bhal aur caca-Villager: No. My two brother* bhi vahi käm karte hai. and my uncle work there, too. sarkäri afsar: kitne din äp sahar-me rahte Government officer: How long do you stay hai? in the city? dehäti: cär mahine. Villager: Four months. sarkäri afsar: tab äp gäv lautte hai? Government officer: Then you return to the village? dehäti: ji ha. Villager: Yes. 4.8 mä'bete-ki bätcit Conversation between Mother and Son. mä: beta! Mother: Son! beta: ha. Son: Yes. mä: yahä ä5. Mother: Come here. betä: ky5? Son. Why? mä: mal tumhe nahlänä cähti hü. Mother: I want to bathe ycu. betä: mai päc minat-me ätä hü. Son: Fll come in five minutes. ma: jaldl äö. Mother: Come quickly. mal tumhe nahlänä aur khänä I want to wash you and give you khilänä cähti hü. food. betä: tin minat-me. Son: In three minutes. ma: sunö. Mother: Listen. jaldi yahä äö. Come here immediately. betä: thöre der thaharö. Son: Wait a little while. mä: mujhe tang mat karö. Mother: Don't bother me. jaldi äö! Come immediately! betä: bahut acchä. mai ätä hü. Son: Very welL F m coming. mä: apne kapre utärö. Mother: Take off your clothes. betä: kyö? Son: Why? mä: mai tumhe nahlänä cähti hü. Mother: I want to wash you.

46 beta: ma: beta: ma:

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

pani bahut thanda hai. Son: The water is very cold, cup raho! Mother: Keep quiet! mujhe thanda panl accha nahl lagta. Son: I do not like cold water, cup raho! Mother: Keep quiet! mere p i s vakt nahl. I don't have time. R E M A R K S : N o t e the use of the present tense (See 2.1.) in conversation to indicate a weak future. Compare the sentences above: mai pac minat-me ita hu. "I'll come in five minutes." mai ata hu. " I ' m coming."

Lesson 5 5.1 admi mujhe dekhta hai. admi mujhe dekhta hai.

The man sees me (msc.). The man sees me (fm.).

admi us-ko dekhta hai. admi us-ko dekhta hai.

The man sees him. The man sees her.

idmi ham-ko dekhta hai. admi ham-ko dekhta hai.

The man sees us (msc.). The man sees us (fm.).

admi tum-ko dekhta hai. admi tum-ko dekhta hai.

The man sees you (mac.). The man sees you (£m.).

admi ap-ko dekhta hai. admi ap-ko dekhta hai.

The man sees you (msc.). The man sees you (fm.).

admi un-ko dekhta hai. idmi un-ko dekhta hai.

The man sees them (msc.). The man sees them (fm.).

This section introduces the direct object constructions, singular and plural, of the personal pronouns. With the exception of mujhe, the direct object form of the first personal pronoun, which is a single word, the direct object constructions consist of two forms linked by a hyphen. In each of these hyphenated forms the second is the form, -ko, which will henceforth be referred to as a postposition. A function of the postposition -ko is to mark the direct object. Words occurring before the postpositions have a form designated the object form. The object form of vah is us; of ve, un; of the remaining pronouns, the same as the subject. These, therefore, are the forms the pronouns have before all postpositions. 5.1.1. More examples are: ma us-ko bulati hai. admi ham-ko parhata hai. dost mujhe janta hai. naukar ap-ko manta hai. guru un-ko samajhte hai. bahan tum-ko nahlatl hai.

The mother calls him. The man makes us read. The friend knows me. The servant obeys you. The teacher understands them. Sister bathes you. 47

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

48

ghôrë mujhë khïctë haï.

The horses drag me.

bip ham-kô cûmtâ hai.

Father kisses us.

aurte un-kô sunb haï.

The women hear them,

bahne tum-kô pifi haï.

The sisters find you.

REMARKS: ( 1 ) parhlni can be translated into English "to make read" or "to teach;" cûmnâ translates "to kiss" or "to lick;" nahlina translates "to bathe (someone)." ( 2 ) T h e plural form of the verb is used with the word gurii "teacher" to indicate respect or honor. ( 3 ) dôst (msc. and fm.), naukar (a), guru (ë), bap ( a ) . ( 4 ) Another word for father is pita (See 3.3.). As with guru, the verb is placed in the plural to indicate respect. 5.1.2. Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. dôst us-kô suntê hai. 2. âdm! âp-kô pâté haï. 3. ma ham-kô nahlâtî hai. 4. larkâ us-kô màntâ hai. 5. gurù mujhë suntê haï. 6. ghôrï tum-kô jântï hai. 7. bip âp-kô bulâtâ hai. 8. naukar mujhë samajhtë haï. 9. mâé ham-kô bulâtî haï. 10. bahan un-kô cûmti hai. 5.1.3 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e man calls us. 2. T h e servant understands me. 3. Mother bathes them. 4. T h e women know her. 5. Sisters pull you. 6. You (hon.) make him read. 7. Father kisses me. 8. They (msc.) obey you (hon.). 9. T h e friends call them. 10. T h e horse pulls you. 5.2 mal larkë-kô dëkhtâ hû.

I see the boy.

mai larkô-kô dëkhtâ hu.

1 see the boys.

mai bëtë-kô dëkhtâ hû.

I see the son.

mai bëto-kô dëkhtâ hu.

I see the sons.

vah baccë-kô bulâtî hai.

She calls the child,

vah bacco-kô bulâtî hai.

She calls the children.

ham kuttë-kô khilitë haï.

We feed the dog.

ham kuttô-kô khilâtë haï.

We feed the dogs.

bâp tôtë-kô kharïdtâ hai.

Father buys the parrot,

bip tôtô-kô kharïdtâ hai.

Father buys the parrots.

Sections 5.2 to 5.6.2 are concerned with the direct object constructions, singular and plural, of the nouns discussed in sections 2.2, 2.3, 3.3, 3.4, 4.1.1, and 4.2. See 5.1 for remarks on the postposition -k5, and note that the forms preceding it are the object forms of the pronouns when they occur before the other postpositions. This section, 5.2, discusses nouns, the subject form, singular, of which ends in -â, which is replaced by -ë in the subject form, plural. (Compare 2.2.) This -â is replaced by -ë in the object singular and -o in the object plural forms. 5.2.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. larkë gadho-kô khilâtë haï. 2. âdmë bakrë-kô kharïdtâ hai. 3. ham bachro-kô khïctë haï. 4. aurat ghôrë-kô bulâtî hai. 5. âdmï bhëriyo-kô dêkhtë haï. 6. ma larko-kô khilâtï hai. 7. vê tôtë-kô pâtï haï. 8. bâp bëtë-kô cûmtâ hai. 9. gadhâ larkë-kô khïctâ hai. 10. gurù larkô-kô parhâtë haï. 11. maï ghôrô-kô khilânâ câhtâ hû. 12. larkë kuttë-kô khïcnâ

LESSON 5

49

câhtê haï. 13. ma bëtô-kô khilânâ câhtî hai. 14. ham tôtô-kô kharïdnâ câhtë haï. 15. âdmî bhëriyô-kô dëkhnâ câhti hai. 16. chôtï bahan kuttë-kô khilâtï hai. 17. acchâ larkâ bachrë-kô bulâtâ hai. 18. môtë ghôrë larkô-kô khîctê haï. 19. barâ âdmî gadhê-kô pâtâ hai. 20. pyâsâ hithï kuttë-kô khîctâ hai. 21. kuttâ baccë-kô bâhar khîcti hai. 22. bhâî tôtï-kô vahà pâtâ hai. 23. mâ larkô-kô andar bulâtî hai. 24. gày bachrë-kô jaldî-së khilâtï hai. 25. guru bëtô-kô kabhl kabhî parhâtë haï. 5.2.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e mother feeds the children. 2. W e (msc.) pull the dog. 3. The teacher makes the boys read. 4. You ( f m . ) understand the child. 5. They (msc.) know the son. 6. I ( f m . ) hear the parrots. 7. T h e man calls the sons. 8. Mother bathes the child. 9. T h e men buy horses. 10. Mother kisses the boy. 11. Mother wants to feed the goats. 12. T h e horse wants to pull the boy. 13. We (msc.) want to hear the parrots. 14. Sister wants to bathe the child. 15. Brother wants to call the horse. 16. T h e old man makes the boy read. 17. T h e hungry wife calls the boys. 18. T h e little child pulls the dog. 19. T h e fat servant calls the children. 20. T h e good dog licks the child. 21. Mother calls the children in. 22. Sister bathes the child there. 23. T h e boy feeds the horses quickly. 24. Teacher makes us read here. 25. Fathers understand children sometimes. 5.3 mai larkï-kô dëkhtâ hû.

I see the girl,

mai larkiyô-kô dëkhtâ hû.

I see the girls.

mà bëtï-kô sikhiti hai. ma bëtiyô-kô sikhiti hai.

Mother teaches the daughter, Mother teaches the daughters.

âdmî patnï-kô bulâtâ hai.

The man calls (his) wife,

idmï patniyo-kô bulâtë haï.

The men call (their) wives.

baccâ bilE-kô pakartâ hai.

T h e child grabs the cat.

baccâ billiyo-kô pakartâ hai.

T h e child grabs the cats.

ham murgî-kô khilâtë hai.

We feed the hen.

ham murgiyô-kô khilâtë haï.

We feed the hens.

This section takes up the direct object constructions of feminine nouns, the subject form, singular, of which ends in -l (See 2.3.) T h e object singular form is the same as the subject singular. T h e object plural form is made by replacing the -ï of the subject singular (or the -iyâ of the subject plural) with -iyô. 5.3.1. Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. aurat bëtiyô-kô sikhâtï hai. 2. âdmî patnî-kô suntâ hai. 3. larkë murgiyô-kô khilâtë haï. 4. baccâ billï-kô pakartâ hai. 5. bâp bëtï-kô cûmtâ hai. 6. ham machliyo-kô kharïdtï haï. 7. vë makkhiyô-kô pâte haï. 8. mâ larkï-kô bhëjtï hai. 9. larkë machlï-kô pakartë haï. 10. mai billï-kô lâtâ hu. 11. âdmî machliyô-kô pakarnâ câhtà hai. 12. vë murgï-kô lënâ câhtî haï. 13. mâ bëtiyô-kô cûmnâ câhtï hai. 14. bâp larkï-kô dëkhnâ câhtâ hai. 15. vah ghôrî-kô pânâ câhtâ hai. 16. bùrhâ âdmî ghôrï-kô pakartâ hai. 17. chôtï aurat murgiyokô khilâtï hai. 18. barâ larkâ billî-kô khTctâ hai. 19. bhukhï aurat murgï-kô pakartï hai. 20. bùrhâ sër bakriyô-kô dëkhtâ hai. 21. ham bëtiyô-kô yahà bulâtë haï. 22. rïch murgiyôkô vahâ khictë haï. 23. bâp larkï-kô kabhï sikhâtâ hai. 24. billt machlï-kô dhïrë khâtï hai. 25. mà bëtiyô-kô zyâdà khilâtï hai.

50

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

5.3.2. Exercise 2. Translate into H i n d i : 1. T h e child feeds the cat. 2. Mother calls the hens. 3. T h e father calls the daughters. 4. You (hon. msc.) teach the girls. 5. T h e lion seizes the hens. 6. T h e woman catches the flies. 7. W e (msc.) catch the fish (pi.). 8. T h e monkeys see the fox. 9. T h e mother kisses the girl. 10. T h e woman catches the hens. 11. W e (msc.) want to catch the fish (pi.). 12. Mother wants to catch the hen. 13. You ( f m . ) want to teach the girls. 14. T h e lion wants to seize the goats. 15. T h e child wants to feed the mare. 16. T h e hungry man wants to catch the fish ( p L ) . 17. T h e big lion wants to see the goat. 18. T h e little boy feeds the hens. 19. T h e good sister teaches the girl. 20. T h e old woman calls the daughters. 21. T h e hungry lion wants to eat the goat quickly. 22. T h e boy wants to catch the fish ( p L ) here. 23. T h e mother feeds the daughter too much. 24. Father buys chickens there. 25. You ( f m . ) call the girls in. 5.4 mai idmi-ko dekhta hu.

I see the m a n .

mal admiyo-ko dekhta hu.

I see the men.

k u t t i bhil-ko katta hai.

T h e dog bites the brother,

kutta bhaiyo-ko katta hai.

T h e dog bites the brothers.

kisan janvar-ko badhta hai. kisan us-ko badhta hai.

T h e farmer ties the animal, T h e farmer ties it (the animal),

kisan jinvaro-ko badhta hai. kisan un-ko badhta hai.

T h e farmer ties the animals, T h e farmer ties them (the animals).

bandar phal-ko curata hai.

T h e monkey steals the fruit,

bandar us-ko curata hai.

T h e monkey steals it (the fruit),

bandar phalo-ko curata hai.

T h e monkey steals the fruits,

bandar un-ko curata hai.

T h e monkey steals them (the fruits).

i d m i makan-ko kharidta hai.

T h e man buys the house.

I d m i us-ko kharidta hai.

T h e man buys it (the house),

a d m i makano-ko kharidta hai. i d m i un-k5 kharidta hai.

T h e man buys the houses, T h e man buys them (the houses).

T h i s section describes the formation of the direct object construction of the nouns described in section 3.3. T h e object singular form is the same as the subject singular. In the plural nouns, ending in -i, replace this with -iyo to m a k e the object f o r m ; nouns ending in a consonant add -o to the subject form to m a k e the object plural. R E M A R K S : T h e third person pronoun indicates things and animals, as well as human beings. ( C o m p a r e 5.1.) 5.4.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. kutta bail-ko katta hai. 2. bandar phalo-ko khata hai. 3. bap makan-ko kharidta hai. 4. patnl patl-ko bulatl hai. 5. ham makano-ko dekhtl hat. 6. ser janvar-ko pakarta hai. 7. ma bhaiyo-ko bhejtl hai. 8. kisan admiyo-ko khilata hai. 9. bandar bhal-ko katta hai. 10. a d m i hathl-ko nahlata hai. 11. ham phalo-ko khana cahte hai. 12. a d m i makan-ko kharldna cahta hai. 13. kutta bandar-ko katna cahta hai. 14. m l bhaiyo-ko khilana cahti hai. 15. bacca hathl-ko dekhna cahta hai. 16. burha a d m i hathl-ko nahlata hai. 17. chota kisan bailo-ko badhta hai. 18. bara ser janvar-ko pakarna cahta hai. 19. bure bandar

LESSON

51

5

phalô-kô khâtë hai. 20. bhQkhâ kuttâ bail-kô kâttâ hai. 21. bail kisân-kô yahâ khïctâ hai. 22. m a bhâiyô-kô ëk-sâth bhêjnâ câhtî hai. 23. bâp âdmiyô-kô andar bulâtâ hai. 24. ham kisânô-kô kabhl kabhl dëkhtê hai. 25. bandar phal-kô vahâ khâtâ hai. 5.4.2 Exercise 2. Translate into H i n d i : 1. T h e boy takes the fruit. 2. T h e dog bites the men. 3. T h e farmer ties the oxen. 4. T h e man buys the elephant. 5. T h e wives feed the husbands. 6. T h e sister kisses the brother. 7. T h e bear bites the man. 8. T h e oxen drag the farmer. 9. T h e boy sees the elephants. 10. T h e monkey sees the fruits. 11. I (msc.) want to see the lions. 12. T h e dog wants to bite the men. 13. T h e farmer wants to tie the oxen. 14. T h e horses want to drag the men. 15. W e ( f m . ) want to eat the fruits. 16. T h e bad monkeys steal the fruits. 17. T h e old lion wants to grab the goats. 18. T h e hungry oxen pull the farmers. 19. T h e big bear bites the man. 20. T h e false wolf steals the chickens. 21. Father buys a house here. 22. T h e monkeys take the fruits there. 23. T h e horses pull the farmers quickly. 24. W e (msc.) see animals sometimes. 25. T h e hungry oxen pull the man slowly. 5.5 mal aurat-kô dëkhti hu. I see the woman, mal aurtô-kô dëkhti hu.

I see the women.

bhâi bahan-kô bulâtâ hai. bhàï bahnS-k5 bulâtâ hai.

T h e brother calls the sister, T h e brother calls the sisters.

aurat aurat aurat aurat

The The The The

giy-kô badhti hai. us-ko badhti hai. gâyô-kô badhti hai. un-ko badhti hai.

woman woman woman woman

ties ties ties ties

the cow. it (the cow), the cows, them( the cows).

larkâ kitib-k5 parhtâ hai. larkâ us-kô parhtâ hai.

T h e boy reads the book, T h e boy reads it (the book),

larki kitibo-kô parhtâ hai. larkâ un-kô parhtâ hai.

T h e boy reads the books, T h e boy reads them (the books).

This section takes up the formation of the direct object construction of the feminine nouns described in 3.4 and 4.1.1. T h e object singular is the same as the subject form; to form the object plural -o is added to the subject singular form. R E M A R K S : See 3.4, Remarks, for the dropping of the vowel -a- within a word. 5.5.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. m a bahno-kô bulâtï hai. 2. guru kitàbô-kô parhtë haï. 3. kisân gâyô-kô badhtë haï. 4. aurat clz-kô kharïdtï hai. 5. âdmî mëz-kô kharïdtâ hai. 6. baccâ davâ-kô pîtâ hai. 7. ham tasvïro-kô dëkhtê haî. 8. larkï kitâb-kô kharïdtï hai. 9. m a bahnô-kô sikhâtï hai. 10. baccâ tasvîr-kô pakartâ hai. 11. ham rât-kô dëkhnâ câhtë haî. 12. gurû kitâb-kô parhnâ câhtë haï. 13. aurat cïzo-kô kharîdnâ câhtî hai. 14. vah tasvïr-kô dëkhnâ câhtî hai. 15. kisân gâyo-kô bâdhnâ câhtë haï. 16. acchâ baccâ davâ-kô pîtâ hai. 17. bhûkhî aurat cïzo-kô kharïdtï hai. 18. chôtâ larkâ kitâb-kô parhtâ hai. 19. bùrhï aurat gâyo-kô badhnâ câhtî hai. 20. barâ âdmî imàrto-kô kharîdnâ câhtâ hai. 21. burhâ kisân gâyô-kô yahâ badhnâ câhtâ hai. 22. aurt? cïzô-kô vahâ kharîdnâ câhtî haî. 23. ham tasvîrô-kô kabhï kabhî dêkhtë haî. 24. guru kitàbô-kô jaldï-së parhtë haï. 25. acchë baccë davâ-kô kabhî kabhï pïtë haï.

52

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

5.5.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: I. T h e woman buys the table. 2. T h e boys read the books. 3. T h e father brings the picture. 4. T h e farmers tie the cows. 5. Father buys the buildings. 6. Mother brings the medicine. 7. T h e wife calls the women. 8. Sister brings the table. 9. W e (msc.) feed the cows. 10. T h e child drinks the medicine. 11. We (fm.) want to see the night. 12. T h e farmer wants to tie the cows. 13. I (fm.) want to buy the pictures. 14. She wants to read the books. 15. Mother wants to send the women. 16. T h e good boys bring the table. 17. T h e little woman calls the cows. 18. T h e old farmer ties the cows. 19. T h e big man buys the buildings. 20. T h e fat dog bites the sisters. 21. T h e small cat bites the woman there. 22. T h e good child brings the books quickly. 23. T h e farmers bring the oxen slowly. 24. We (msc.) read books sometimes. 25. T h e little boy wants to read the book here. 5.6 larkî ciriyâ-kô khilàtï hai.

T h e girl feeds the sparrow,

larkl ciriyô-kô khilàtï hai.

T h e girl feeds the sparrows.

billl cuhiyâ-kô pakarti hai.

T h e cat catches the mouse,

billï cuhiyô-kô pakarti hai.

T h e cat catches the mice.

This section illustrates the formation

of the direct object constructions of the

feminine nouns given in 4.2. T h e object singular is identical in form with the subject singular; the object plural is formed by replacing the final -a of the subject plural with -5. 5.6.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. billl ciriyâ-kô pakarti hai. 2. aurat burhiyà-kô bulâtl hai. 3. ham cuhiyô-kô dëkhtë haï. 4. aurtê handiyâ-kô kharîdtî haï. 5. vê ciriyô-kô khilâtê haï. 6. larkâ handiyô-kô lâtâ hai. 7. acchî aurat burhiyô-kô khilàtï hai. 8. chôtï cuhiyâ bûriyâ-kô kâttî

hai. 9. ham

handiyo-kô kharïdnâ câhtë haï. 10. tum cuhiyâ-kô dëkhtë hô. 5.6.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e woman catches the mouse. 2. T h e man calls the (little) old woman. 3. T h e girl feeds the sparrows. 4. T h e cat sees the mice. 5. W e (msc.) bring the cooking-pots. 6. I (fm.) want to catch the mouse. 7. T h e boys want to bring the sparrows here. 8. You (fm.) feed the (little) old woman. 9. T h e boys catch the mouse there. 10. T h e little girl brings the cooking-pot quickly. 5.7 T h e numbers 31 to 40: iktis 31, battis 32, tëtïs 33, caûtïs 34, païtïs 35, chattîs 36, saîtis 37, artïs 38, untâlïs 39, câlïs 40. 5.8

mâ'bëtë-kï bâtcît

Conversation between Mother and Son.

bëtâ: mujhê bhûkh lagï hai.

Son:

ma:

Mother: Come into the house.

ghar-më âô.

I'm hungry. I'll give (you something) to eat

mal khinâ dùgï. bëtâ: khânë-kô kyi hai?

Son:

ml:

Mother: Rice,

câval.

What is there to eat?

bëtâ: kyâ khïr hai?

Son:

mâ:

Mother: No. (There is) no khlr.

nahi. khlr nahi.

Is there khlr?

bëtâ: mujhë khïr câhiyë.

Son:

mâ:

Mother: You ate khïr yesterday.

tum-në khïr kal khâyï thï.

I want khïr.

LESSON 5

bèta : mujhë khïr câhiyë. ma: ha m'log amir nahï haï. tum khïr rôz rôz nahT khi saktë. bëtâ: mujhë yah khâni acchi nahï lagti. ma: kôï bit nahî! khiô aur sônë jiô. bëtâ: kitnë bajc haï? ma: cha bajc haï. tumhirë piti khët-së itë hôgë.

53

Son: I want khir. Mother: We are not rich. You cannot eat khir every day. Son: I don't like this food. Mother: No matter. Eat and go to sleep. Son: What time is it? Mother: It is six o'clock. Your father is coming from the field. I must give him (his) dinner. mujhë un-kô khinâ déni hai. Son: I'll eat with father. bëtâ: mai piti-jï-kë sâth khiugi. Mother: You cannot eat with father. mâ: tum piti-jl-kë sith nahï khi saktë. apni khinâ jaldï khiô aur sônë jiô. Eat your food quickly and go to bed. REMARKS: log of ham'lôg functions here as a plural suffix. 5.9 rista pûchnâ. Asking Directions. pathik: ksami kljiyë. Traveller: Excuse me. kyi ip-së ck sa vil pûch saktâ hû? Can I ask you a question? gâvvâlâ: puchiyë. Villager: (Please) ask. pathik: kyi yah sarak Lakhnlû jâtï hai? Traveller: Does this road go to Lucknow? gâvvâlâ: nahï. yah sarak Lakhniû nahï jitï. Villager: No. This road does not go to Lucknow. kyi ip Lakhniû jini câhtë haï? Do you wish to go to Lucknow? pathik: jï ha. mai lakhniû kaisë j i Traveller: Yes. How can I get to Lucknow? saktâ hû. gâvvâlâ: kyi bas-sc j i rahë haï? Villager: Are you going by bus? pathik: nahï. mal apni môtar-mc j i Traveller: No. I am going in my automobile. rahà hû. gâvvâlâ: is sarak-par jiiyë aur ëk mïl-kë Villager: Go on this road and after one mile bid biyï or ghûmiyë. turn to the left. pathik: biyï ôr-kô? Traveller: To the left? gâvvâlâ: jï hi. biyï 6r. Villager: Yes. To the left pathik: aur phir? Traveller: And then? gâvvâlâ: âp-kô ck cauri sarak milëgï. Villager: You will find a wide road. vah Lakhniû-kô jitï hai. It goes to Lucknow. pathik: us sarak-par mai kis or jiû? Traveller: In which direction shall I go on this road? gâvvâlà: pahilë diyï ôr jiiyë, aur phir Villager: First go to the right, and then sïdhë Lakhniû-kô. straight ahead to Lucknow. pathik : dhanyavâd. Traveller: Thank you.

Lesson 6 6.1 h a m b h u k h è pita-kò khilatè hai.

W e feed the h u n g r y father.

h a m b h u k h è pitio-kò khilatè hai.

W e feed the h u n g r y fathers.

m a l d u b l e ghóre-kò calata hu.

I drive the lean horse.

m a i d u b l e gh5ro-ko calata hu.

I drive the lean horses.

t u m l a m b e m a k a n - k ò d i k h i t è ho.

Y o u point out the long house.

t u m l a m b e m a k a n o - k o dikhàte ho.

Y o u point out the long houses.

v a h b u r h e sèr-ko m a r t a hai.

H e kills the old lion.

v a h b u r h e sèro-ko m a r t a hai.

H e kills the old lions.

v a h p a k k e phal-kò tòrti hai.

She plucks the ripe fruit.

vah p a k k è phalo-kò torti hai.

She plucks the ripe fruits.

ve pyasì larki-kó pilati hai.

T h e y cause the thirsty girl to d r i n k .

ve pyasì larkiyo-ko pilati hai.

T h e y cause the thirsty girls to d r i n k .

t u m chòti beti-kò batate ho.

Y o u tell the little d a u g h t e r .

t u m chòti bètiyo-kó batate ho.

Y o u tell the little d a u g h t e r s .

v a h kacci sabzi-kò becti hai.

She sells the raw vegetable.

v a h kacci sabziyo-ko bccti hai.

She sells the raw vegetables.

m a i u d imarat-kó p i t a hu.

I find the high b u i l d i n g .

m a i uci i m i r t ò - k ò p a t i hu.

I find the high b u i l d i n g s .

v a h p u r a n i kitib-ko girata hai.

H e drops the old book.

v a h p u r i n i k i t i b o - k ò girata hai.

H e d r o p s the old books.

T h i s section is concerned with adjectives m o d i f y i n g nouns in the object form—i.e., n o u n s before postpositions. ( S e e also 3.2, R e m a r k s . ) B e f o r e masculine nouns, both singular a n d plural, the adjective replaces -a with -e; before f e m i n i n e nouns it replaces -a with -i, in both n u m b e r s . REMARKS:

( 1 ) pilana m e a n s " t o give to d r i n k " or " t o cause to d r i n k " ;

batani

m e a n s " t o tell, to point o u t " or " t o i n f o r m " ; c a l l n a m e a n s " t o drive, to cause to m o v e . "

54

LESSON 6

55

( 2 ) pita ( a ) "father" remains unchanged in the object singular and has -o added to it in the object plural (thus, pitao). 6.1.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. admi kacci sabziyo-ko khata hai. 2. aurte chote bacco-ko bulatl hai. 3. kisan pyase bailo-ko pilata hai. 4. guru acche larke-ko batate hai. 5. ham uci imarto-ko dekhte hat. 6. larke pakke phalo-ko torte hai. 7. ve Iambi sarak-ko jantl hai. 8. kisan bare bail-ko calata hai. 9. ma kacci sabziyo-ko pakati hai. 10. admi nayl tasviro-ko becta hai. 11. lamba admi pakke phalo-ko torta hai. 12. chote larke purani kitab-ko parhte hai. 13. acchi bahan pyase bhaiy5-ko pilatl hai. 14. choti lark! nayl tasvlr-ko giratl hai. 15. dubla admi sacce dost-ko janta hai. 16. bandar pakke phalo-ko khana cahte hai. 17. aurat kacci sabziyo-ko pakana cahtl hai. 18. ham bare janvaro-ko dekhna cahte hai. 19. larka choti kitab-ko parhna cahta hai. 20. ve nayl tasviro-ko dekhna cahtl hai. 21. bacca pakke phal-ko dhlre khata hai. 22. ma choti larkiyo-ko andar bulatl hai. 23. pita uce makano-ko vaha dikhate hai. 24. ghorl kacci sabziyo-ko jaldl-se khatl hai. 25. ve purani tasvlr-ko yaha kharidtl hai. 6.1.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. W e ( f m . ) feed the hungry men. 2. T h e boy points out the wide street. 3. T h e child grabs the raw vegetable. 4. T h e monkeys steal the ripe fruits. 5. They (msc.) call the tall man. 6. T h e farmer drives the fat oxen. 7. T h e woman buys the new picture. 8. She knows the long street. 9. Mother calls the hungry daughters. 10. T h e girl drops the new book. 11. T h e good woman makes the thirsty cow drink. 12. T h e hungry monkeys eat the small fruits. 13. T h e old farmer drives the big horses. 14. T h e lean fathers eat the ripe vegetables. 15. T h e thirsty dogs find true friends. 16. W e (msc.) want to find the high building. 17. T h e farmer wants to feed the hungry goats. 18. T h e woman wants to make the thirsty cow drink. 19. T h e boy wants to read the little book. 20. T h e farmer wants to sell the raw vegetables. 21. I (msc.) want to drive the big horses. 22. Mother wants to call the hungry children here. 23. T h e good woman feeds the little children too much. 24. T h e very good boy reads the new books sometimes. 25. T h e hungry monkey eats the ripe fruits immediately.

6.2 yah admi mota hai.

This man is fat.

yah m5ta hai.

This (one) is fat.

yah aurat bhukhl hai.

This woman is hungry.

yah bhukhi hai.

This (one) is hungry.

yah kutta bura hai. yah bura hai.

This dog is bad. This (one) is bad.

yah billi gusslli hai.

This cat is angry.

yah gussili hai.

This (one) is angry.

yah per b a n hai.

This tree is big.

yah bara hai.

This (one) is big.

ye admi mote hai.

These men are fat.

ye mote hai.

These are fat.

56

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

yë aurtë bhukhï haï. yë bhukhl haï.

These women are hungry. These are hungry.

yë kuttë burê haï. yë burë haï.

These dogs are bad. These are bad.

ye billiyâ gussïlï hai. yë gussïlï hai.

These cats are angry. These are angry.

yë për barë hai. yë bare haï.

These trees are big. These are big.

Section 6.2 to 6.3.5 are concerned with the demonstrative pronouns and adjectives. T h e first sentence in each of the groups of two, above, illustrates the subject form of the demonstrative adjective; the second, that of the demonstrative pronoun. Sections 6.2 to 6.2.5 take up yah, the demonstrative pronoun and adjective indicating beings and things nearer to the person talking as contrasted with beings and things at a distance from him (Compare vah in 6.3 to 6.3.5, following). yah is the subject singular form and yë the subject plural form. Note that the forms for the pronoun and adjective are the same. R E M A R K S : yah yë can function as personal pronouns, translating "he, she, it," and "they," respectively. 6.2.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. yah khëltâ hai. 2. yah tôtâ bôltà hai. 3. yë sôtï haï. 4. yah bëtï pakâtï hai. 5. yë jânvar daurtë haï. 6. yah sabzl pakkï hai. 7. yah mêz nayî hai. 8. yë pltë haï. 9. yah lambï hai. 10. yah dukân jaltï hai. 11. yë bëtiyâ jânnâ câhtî hai. 12. yah purânâ makân jaltâ hai. 13. yë aurtë dhïrë dhïrë bôltï haï. 14. yah sônâ câhtâ hai. 15. yë kabhî kabhï khëltï haï. 16. yah bhukhï ghôrï jaldï-së khânâ câhtî hai. 17. ye pakkë phal girtë haï. 18. yah kisân bahut kâm kartâ hai. 19. yah pyàsà bail kabhî kabhï thaharnà câhtâ hai. 20. yë chôtë baccë bâhar jânâ câhtë haï. 6.2.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. These (msc.) run. 2. This goat jumps. 3. These girls understand. 4. This wife cooks. 5. These (msc.) drink. 6. This (one [msc.]) works. 7. These dogs run. 8. These cows drink. 9. These fish eat. 10. This (one [fm.]) reads. 11. This boy wants to read. 12. These (msc.) want to drink. 13. This big building burns. 14. This monkey wants to play. 15. These small books fall. 16. These dogs want to play. 17. This little horse wants to drink. 18. These (fm.) want to eat. 19. These big men work. 20. This old woman wants to sleep. 6.2.3 mal is âdmï-kô jinta hii. mal is-kô iàntâ hu. maï is mote idmï-kô jantà hû.

I know this man. I know this (one). I know this fat man.

vah is aurat-kô dëkhtï hai. vah is-kô dëkhtï hai. vah is bhukhï aurat-kô dëkhtï hai.

She sees this woman. She sees this (one). She sees this hungry woman.

LESSON

6

vah is kuttë-kô mârtâ hai.

He beats this dog.

vah is-kô mârtâ haL

He beats this (one).

vah is burë kuttc-kô mârtâ hai.

He beats this bad dog.

vë is billï-kô pakartë haï.

They grab this cat.

vë is-kô pakartc hai.

They grab this (one).

vë is gussîli billl-k5 pakartc haï.

They grab this angry cat.

ham is për-kô kâttë hai.

We cut this tree.

ham is-kô kâttë haï.

W e cut this (one).

ham is bare për-kô kâttë haï.

W e cut this big tree.

. _

—

van in admiyô-kô dikhâtâ haL vah in-kô dikhâtâ hai. vah in môtë âdmiyo-kô dikhâtâ haL

He points out these men. He points out these. He points out these fat men.

ham in aurto-kô suntë haï.

W e hear these women.

ham in-kô suntë hai.

W e hear these.

ham in bhûkhi aurto-kô suntë haï.

W e hear these hungry women.

turn in kuttô-kô khilâtë hô.

You feed these dogs.

tum in-kô khilâtë hô.

You feed these.

•turn in burë kuttô-kô khilâtë hô.

You feed these bad dogs.

vah in billiyô-kô lâtî hai. vah in-kô lâb haL

She brings these cats. She brings these.

vah in gussiE billiyô-kô lit! hai.

She brings these angry cats.

vah in përô-kô kâttâ haL

He cuts these trees. He cuts these. He cuts these big trees.

vah in-kô kâttâ haL vah in bare përô-kô kâttâ hai.

57

This section gives the object forms of yah, pronoun and adjective. As in 6.2, the first sentence in each group of three, above, illustrates the adjective and the second, the pronoun (See 6.2, Remarks.). T h e third sentence illustrates the demonstrative adjective modifying a noun modified by another adjective. 6.2.4 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. mai is larkë-kô dëkhtâ hu. 2. kisân in jânvarô-kô bâdhtâ hai. 3. âdml is-kô bulâtâ hai. 4. ma is bëtî-kô sikhâtl hai. 5. ham in kuttô-kô khilâtë haï. 6. kuttâ is bhâl-kô kâttâ hai. 7. baccë in-kô pakartë haï. 8. vë in-kô khilâti haï. 9. aurat is-kô pakâtl hai. 10. bâp in tôtô-kô kharîdtë haï. 11. larkî in chôtï kitâbo-kô parhtî hai. 12. kuttâ is baccë-kô bâhar khïctâ hai. 13. mâ in-kô andar bulâtl hai. 14. bâp is bëtë-kô cûmnâ câhtâ hai. 15. aurat is bhûkhi gây-kô bàdhnà câhtï hai. 16. kisân in bakrô-kô kharîdtâ hai. 17. gurii in-kô kabhî kabhï parhtë haï. 18. bhâï is chôtë tôtë-kô yahâ pâtâ hai. 19. gây in bhûkhë bachrô-kô jaldï-së khilâti hai. 20. aurat is-kô khilâti hai. 6.2.5 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The mother feeds these children. 2. W e (msc.) pull this (one). 3. I (msc.) hear these parrots. 4. Sister bathes this child. 5. W e (fm.) buy this (one). 6. T h e man buys these horses. 7. The boy brings these quickly. 8. T h e woman cooks these vegetables. 9. They

58

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

(fm.) want to hear these. 10. We (msc.) buy this picture. 11. T h e good woman feeds these hungry children too much. 12. T h e monkeys eat these fruits quickly. 13. The woman feeds these fat cows. 14. T h e child wants to eat this raw vegetable. 15. The very good girl reads the new books sometimes. 16. W e (fm.) know this long street. 17. The woman buys this new picture. 18. T h e hungry boys eat these ripe fruits. 19. She drops this raw vegetable. 20. T h e boy wants to read this little book.

63 vah âdmï mota hai. vah mota hai.

That man is fat. That (one) is fat.

vah aurat bhùkhi hai. vah bhùkhi hai.

That woman is hungry. That (one) is hungry.

vah kuttà buri hai. vah buri hai.

That dog is bad. That (one) is bad.

vah bilC glissili hai. vah glissili hai.

That cat is angry. That (one) is angry.

vah per bara hai. vah bara hai.

That tree is big. That (one) is big.

vê âdmï mòte hai. ve mote hai.

Those men are fat. Those are fat.

vë a urte bhùkhi hai. ve bhùkhi hai.

Those women are hungry. Those are hungry.

vë kuttè bure hai. vë burë hai.

Those dogs are bad. Those are bad.

vë billiya glissili hai. vë glissili hai.

Those cats are angry. Those are angry.

vë për barë hai. vë barë hai.

Those trees are big. Those are big.

Sections 6.3 to 6.3.5 are concerned with the demonstrative pronouns and adjectives which indicate beings and things at a distance from the speaker (Compare 6.2, above). This section illustrates the subject forms of the pronouns and adjectives. REMARKS: Note that the demonstrative pronouns function also as the third person pronoun. (See 2.1 and 5.1.) 6.3.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. vah parhtâ hai. 2. vë tôtë bôltë haï. 3. vah gây pltï hai. 4. vê dukâne jaltl haï. 5. vê khëltî haï. 6. vah phal pakkâ hai. 7. vë khâtë haï. 8. vah aurat pakâtl hai. 9. vë âdmï kàm kartë haï. 10. vah lambl hai. 11. vë bëtiya khëlnâ câhtî haï. 12. vah pyâsï larkï parhtï hai. 13. vah larkï jânâ câhtï hai. 14. vah pakkâ phal girtâ hai. 15. vë purânë makân jaltë haï. 16. vë pyâsë bakrë yahâ pïtë haï. 17. vë bhûkhë ghôrë jaldï-së khânâ câhtë hai. 18. vah imârat ucï hai. 19. vah burhâ kisân bahut kàm kartâ hai. 20. vë tasvïrë caurï haï. 6.3.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi:

LESSON

6

59

1. She ccxiks. 2. That boy walks. 3. Those cows eat. 4. Those (msc.) go there. 5. That fanner buys. 6. That (one [fm. |) runs. 7. Those vegetables are new. 8. That (one [msc. |) teaches. 9. Those buildings are high. 10. They (msc.) work there. 11. That boy feeds the horse quickly. 12. That little girl pulls the cat. 13. Those farmers buy the oxen. 14. Those women want to bathe the children. 15. That teacher lives here. 16. Those parrots want to speak. 17. That big horse wants to pull the man. 18. Those little children are hungry. 19. Those hens want to eat. 20. That hungry man wants to catch fish. 6.3.3 mal us adml-ko janta hu. mai us-k5 janta hu. mai us mote idmi-ko janta hu.

I know that man. I know that (one). I know that fat man.

ve us aurat-ko samajhte ha!, ve us-ko samajhte hai. ve us bhukhl aurat-ko samajhte 'hai.

They understand that woman. They understand that (one). They understand that hungry woman.

vah lis kutte-ko khilati hai. vah us-ko khilati hai. vah us bure kutte-ko khilati haL

She feeds that dog. She feeds that (one). She feeds that bad dog.

vah us bilfi-ko bulata hai. vah us-ko bulata haL vah us gussili bilG-ko bulata haL

H e calls that cat. He calls that (one). He calls that angry cat.

ve us per-ko katte hai. ve us-ko katte hai. ve us bare per-ko katte hai.

They cut that tree. They cut that one (one). They cut that big tree.

M

van un admiyo-ko lata haL vah un-ko lita hai.-j vah un mote admiyo-ko lata hai.

He brings those men. He brings those. H e brings those fat men.

ap un aurto-ko bacate hai. ap un-ko bacate hai. ap un bhfikhi aurto-ko bacate hai.

You save those women. You save those. You save those hungry women.

vah un kutto-ko khicta hai. vah un-ko khicta haL vah un bure kutt^ko khicta hai.

He drags those dogs. He drags those. He drags those bad dogs.

vah un billiyo-ko pilati hai. vah un-ko pilati hai. vah un gussili billiyo-ko pilati haL

She makes those cats drink. She makes those drink. She makes those angry cats drink.

turn un pero-ko pate ho. turn un-ko pate ho. turn un bare pero-ko pate ho.

You find those trees. You find those. You find those big trees.

This section illustrates the object forms of vah, demonstrative pronoun and adjective.

60

HINDI

GRAMMAR

AND READER

6.3.4 Exercise I. Translate into English: 1. vë us-kô jântê haï. 2. aurat un gàyô-kô khilâtï hai. 3. kuttâ us âdmï-kô kàttâ hai. 4. m l us-kô nahlâtl hai. 5. ham us sarak-kô jântê hai. 6. kisân un phalô-kô tortë haï. 7. bâp un-kô bulâtë haï. 8. tum un sabziyô-kô kharïd'ï hô 9. bëtï us billï-kô pâtï hai. 10. larkâ us-kô pakartâ hai. 11. tum un bailo-kô calâlé hô. 12. ham un barë jânvarô-kô dëkhnâ câhtë haï. 13. aurtë un kaccë phalô-kô pakânâ câhtï haï. 14. vë un kaccï sabziyôk ô bëctë haï. 15. âdmï un nayï tasvirô-kô bëctà hai. 16. bahan un bhûkhë larkô-kô andar bulânâ câhtï hai. 17. larkâ us lambï sarak-kô dikhâtâ hai. 18. pitâ un ûcï imârtô-kô dik-hânâ câhtë haï. 19. ham un pakkë phalô-kô khânâ câhtë haï. 20. vah us purânï kitâb kô girâtï hai. 6.3.5 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. I ( m s c . ) point out that high building. 2. T h e little boy pulls that cat. 3. T h e horse eats those. 4. T h e y ( m s c . ) call those tall men. 5. W e ( f m . ) feed them. 6. Father buys that big house. 7. You know those friends. 8. T h a t fox seizes those fat hens. 9. She sees her. 10. T h e good woman makes those thirsty cows drink. 11. W e ( m s c . ) want to find that big house. 12. T h e boy brings those little books. 13. T h e hungry monkeys want to steal those fruits. 14. Father feeds those little boys too much. 15. T h e woman buys that new cooking-pot. 16. T h e cat catches that little mouse. 17. T h e farmer kills that old fox. 18. I ( m s c . ) drive that big horse sometimes. 19. T h e hungry dog bites that bad boy. 20. T h e farmer wants to find that (one). 6.4 T h e numbers 41 to 60: iktâlïs 41, bayilis 42, tëtilïs 43, cauvllïs 44, païtâlïs 45, chiyàlis 46, saïtilïs 47, artilïs 48, uncls 49, pacâs 50, ikyâvan 51, bivan 52, trépan 53, cauvan 54, pacpan 55, chappan 56, sattâvan 57, atthivan 58, unsath 59, sith 60. 6.5

ëk Hindustani aur pardësï-kï

Conversation between an Indian

bitcït. Ravi:

namastë.

S m i t h : namastë. Ravï:

and a Foreigner. Ravï:

Hello.

Smith: Hello.

k y i mai ïp-kï madad kar saktâ hu.

S m i t h : jï hâ. I p mërï madad kar saktë

Ravi:

Can I help you?

Smith: Yes. Y o u can help me.

hal. mal pardësi hû, aur yahà-ki

I am a foreigner, and cannot speak

b h i s i acchï tarah nahï bol saktâ. Ravï:

âp kahâ-së âtë haï?

S m i t h : mal Amëriki-së âtà hû.

the local language well. Ravi:

k y i âp Hindï bôltë haï? Ravï:

jï hâ. mai Hindi bôltâ hû.

S m i t h : kyâ i p mërî Hindi samajh saktë

Where do you come from?

Smith: I come from America. D o you speak Hindi? Ravi:

Yes. I speak Hindi.

Smith: Can you understand my Hindi?

haï?_ Ravï:

jï h i . mai acchï tarah samajh sakti

Ravi:

hû.

S m i t h : dhanyavid. z a r i dhïrë dhïrë

Smith: Thank you. (Please) speak more slowly.

bôliyë. mai àp-kô nahï samajh sakti. Ravï:

mai aur dhïrë bôlti hû.

Yes. I can understand ( y o u ) very well.

I cannot understand you. Ravi:

I'll speak more slowly.

LESSON

61

6

C a n you understand me n o w ?

kya i p ab m u j h e s a m a j h sakte hai? S m i t h : ji ha. m a i ap-k5 ab s a m a j h sakta

S m i t h : Yes. I can understand you now.

hu. Ravi:

àiye, ab ham" log apne

apne

Ravi:

L e t us talk about our countries.

desò-ke bire-mé b i t kare. m a i i p - k o H i n d u s t a n - k e bire-me

I shall tell you about India.

batiùgi. S m i t h : khusi-se.

Smith: With

pleasure.

I shall tell you about America.

m a l A m e r i k i - k e birc-me batauga.

R E M A R K S : T h e official n a m e for India is B h a r a t do dosto-ki

6.6 Prasad:

Conversation between two

batcit

Prasad:

i p k a h i thahare hai?

Friends.

W h e r e are you staying?

Motilal: mal G r e n d Hotal-me thahara hu.

Motilal: I a m staying at the G r a n d H o t e L

Prasad:

Prasad:

kya yah bahut m a h a g i hai?

Motilal: ji h i . yah bahut m a h a g a haL

Is it very expensive?

Motilal: Yes. It is very expensive.

m a l sasd j a g a h dhurhta hu.

I a m looking for a cheaper place.

k y i i p m e n m a d a d k a r sakte

C a n you help m e ?

hai? Prasad:

ji ha. z a r u r .

Motilal: bahut bahut

Prasad: dhanyavid.

ab m u j h e j a n a cahiye. Prasad:

Yes. Certainly.

Motilal: T h a n k you very much. I m u s t g o now. Prasad:

i p kaha jate h a i ?

W h e r e are you g o i n g ?

Motilal: m a l hotal vapas jata hu.

Motilal: F m g o i n g back to ( m y )

Prasad:

Prasad:

vah to pas-hi hai.

hoteL

It is quite near. C a n I come with you?

k y i mal-bhl i p - k e sath a sakta hu?_ Motilal: ji ha. zarur.

Motilal: Yes. Certainly.

Prasad:

Prasad:

ab h a m hotal p a h u c gaye.

N o w we've c o m e to ( y o u r ) hotel.

Motilal: k y i ap-bhi a n d a r i e g e ?

Motilal: Will you come in, too?

Prasad:

Prasad:

m u j h e afsos hai ki m a i ap-ke sath andar nahi i

sakta.

with you.

m u j h e ek dusri j a g a h j a n i hai. Motilal: m u j h e bahut afsos hai. kyi

ap

mujh-se

kal

I have to g o somewhere else. Motilal:

mil

I ' m sorry that I cannot c o m e in

sakte

I a m very sorry. C a n you meet m e t o m o r r o w ?

hai? Prasad:

ji h i . m a i ap-se kal mil sakta hu.

Prasad:

Motilal: k y i das baje thik r a h e g a ?

Motilal:

Prasad:

Prasad:

ji h i . das baje thik hai.

Yes. I can meet you tomorrow. Will ten o'clock be all Yes. T e n o'clock is all

right? right

Motilal: tab kal das baje m i l u g i .

Motilal: T h e n Fll meet ( y o u ) at ten o'clock.

Prasad:

Prasad:

accha. phir milege.

G o o d . We'll meet again.

R E M A R K S : phir milege approximates more in meaning the English See you a g a i n .

Lesson 7 7.1 baithiye. (Please) sit down, dhire caliye. (Please) walk slowly. Hindi boliye. (Please) speak Hindi, andar aiye. (Please) come in. ye phal khaiye. (Please) eat these fruits. Sections 7.1 and 7.1.1 illustrate the imperative forms of the verb. 7.1 illustrates the "polite" imperative, or the form employed to address a person to whom respect or honor is intended. (Compart ap and 2.1, Remarks.) It is formed by attaching -iye to the stem of the verb. 7.1.1 baitho! Sit d o w n ! dhire calo! W a l k slowly! Hindi bolo! Speak H i n d i ! andar ao! Come in! ye phal kha5! Eat these fruits! This section illustrates the imperative form employed towards persons who are equals or close friends of the speaker and to servants. (Compare turn and 2.1, Remarks.) R E M A R K S : Nouns indicating things, when occurring as objects of transistive verbs, need not be placed in the object form before the postposition -ko. T h e nominative form suffices. (See in the last sentence ye phal.) More examples of this construction will be given later. 7.2 Telling time: ek baja hai. It is one o'clock, do baje hai. It is two o'clock, fin baje hai. It is three o'clock, car baje hai. It is four o'clock, pac baje hai. It is five o'clock. 7.3 T h e numbers from 61 on: iksath 61, basath 62, tresath 63, causath 64, palsath 65, chiyasath 66, sarsath 67, arsath 68, unhattar 69, sattar 70, ik'hattar 71, bahattar 72, tihattar 73, cauhattar 74, pac'hattar 75, chihattar 76, satattar 77, ath'hattar 78, unasi 79, assi 80, ikkasi 81, bayasl 82,

62

LESSON 7

63

tirisi 83, caurisi 84, pacasi 85, chiyasi 86, sattasi 87, atthasi 88, navisi 89, nawe 90, ikkinvè 91, binvè 92, tiranve 93, caurinve 94, paccinvè 95, chiyanve 96, sattinve 97, atthanve 98, ninnanve 99, sau 100, ek sau ek 101, ek sau das 110, do sau 200, tin sau 300, car sau 400, pic sau 500, hazir 1,000, lakh 100,000, das lakh 1,000,000, karor 10,000,000. REMARKS: The raised dot in the words for 71, 75, and 78 is employed to distinguish what otherwise might be considered aspirate stops. 73.1 Reading numbers: ek hazir nau sau iksath one thousand, nine hundred and sixty-one (1.961) èk hazir nau sau bisath one thousand, nine hundred and sixty-two (1.962) ek hazir nau sau trcsath one thousand, nine hundred and sixty-three (1.963) èk hazir nau sau causath one thousand, nine hundred and sixty-four (1.964) ek hazir nau sau paisath one thousand, nine hundred and sixty-five (1.965) 732 Reading dates: unnis sau iksath nineteen hundred and sixty-one (1961) unnis sau bisath nineteen hundred and sixty-two (1962) unnis sau trcsath nineteen hundred and sixty-three (1963) unnis sau causath nineteen hundred and sixty-four (1964) unnis sau paisath nineteen hundred and sixty-five (1965) Conversation of Two Women. 7.4 do aurto-ki bitcit DamayantI: Hello. DamayantI: ñamaste. Rajnl: Hello. Raj ni: ñamaste. DamayantI: Am I late? DamayantI: kya mujhe der ho gayl? Rajnl: No. You are not late. Raj ni: nahl. ap-ko der nahl huí. andar aiyè. Please come in. DamayantI: ij bahut gannì hai. DamayantI: It is very warm today. Rajnl: ji hi. bahut garml hai. Rajnl: Yes. It is very warm. idhar khirkl-kè pis baithiye. Please sit here by the window. kya ip kuch piyegi? Will you take something to drink? DamayantI: hi. èk glis thandi pini. DamayantI: Yes. A glass of cold water. Rajnl: kam-se kam ek glis sarbat Rajnl: At least have a glass of lljiye. sherbet DamayantI: acchl bit. DamayantI: Very welL Rajnl: Rimdas! Rajnl: Ramdas! Ramdas: Yes, madam. Ramdás: ji hi. bahan-ji. Rajnl: Bring in sherbet for the lady. Rajnl: bahan-ji-kè liye sarbat lio. Ramdas: Very good. Ràmdàs: bahut acchi. abhi laya, I'm bringing it right away. Where should I place it? ka ha rakhfi?

64

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

Rajnl:

is mcz-par rakho.

Rajnl:

Place it on this table.

Ramdas:

ji, accha. kya kuch aur lau?

Ramdas:

Yes, all right. Should I bring

Rajnl:

nahi, abhl nahl.

Rajnl:

No. Not now.

Ramdas:

bahut accha.

Ramdas:

Very good,

anything else? turn bahar baitho.

Please wait outside.

R E M A R K S : Note the use of bahan-jl as a polite term of address to a woman. 7.5 do gawalo-ki batciL Conversation of T w o Villagers. Mohan: Ram Ram. Mohan: Hello. Sohan:

Ram Ram.

Sohan:

Hello.

Mohan: ap-ka nam kya hai?

Mohan: What is your name?

Sohan:

Sohan:

mera nam Sohan hai. ap-ka nam kya hai?

My name is Sohan. What is your name?

Mohan: mera nim Mohan hai.

Mohan: My name is M5han.

Sohan:

Sohan:

ap kaha-ke rahnevale hai?

Where do you come from?

Mohan: mat Bharatpux-ka rahnevili hu.

Mohan: I live in Bharatpur.

Sohan:

Sohan:

mal nahi jantq vah kaha hai. kya vah kisi bare sahar-ke pas hai?

Mohan: ha, vah bare sahar-ke pas hai. Sohan: sahar-ka nam kya hai? Mohan: us-ki nim Minikpur hai. Sohan: mal us sahar-ko acchi tarah janti hu. mera ki or Mohan: mera ki or Sohan:

gav vaha-se bar! mil uttarhai. gav vaha-se nau mil purabhai.

ap-se milkar mujhe bahut khusi hui.

I do not know where it is. Is it near any large town?

Mohan: Sohan: Mohan: Sohan:

Yes. It is near a large town. What is the name of the town? Its name is Manikpur. I know that town very well.

My village is twelve miles to the north of it. Mohan: My village is nine miles east of it. Sohan:

I am very glad to have met you.

Mohan: ap-se milkar mujhe-bhl bahut khusi hui. men bas ati hai. mujhe ab jana cahiye.

Mohan: I, too, am very glad to have met you.

Sohan: phir milege. Mohan: phir milege. Ram R i m .

Sohan:

My bus is coming. I must go now. We'll meet again.

Mohan: We'll meet again. Good-by.

Lesson 8 8. REVIEW. The numbers in brackets refer to the exercises in the preceding lessons. 8.1 [2.1.3] Translate into Hindi: 1. You (hon. msc.) walk. 2. She arrives. 3. You (msc.) sleep. 4. They (msc.) play. 5. I (£m.) speak. 6. We (msc.) give. 7. You (£m.) understand. 8. He goes. 9. They (msc.) say. 10. You (hon msc.) bring. 11. He comes. 12. We (fm.) say. 13. You (£m.) read. 14. I (msc.) jump. 15. She lives. 16. You (msc.) ask. 17. They (£m.) swim. 18. You (hon. msc.) run. 19. We (msc.) eat. 20. I (msc.) work. 8.2 [2.1.4] Translate into English: I. vë jàtë haï. 2. vah kahtâ hai. 3. âp bôltï haï. 4. mal samajhtî hu. 5. vah khëltâ hai. 6. vah caltl hai. 7. vë bôltë haï. 8. ham daurtî haï. 9. mai khëltâ hù. 10. tum kûdtï hô. II. ham pahûctë haï. 12. mai kâm kartâ hu. 13. vah rahtî hai. 14. tum pakâtë hô. 15. vë puchtl haï 16. ham lâtë haï. 17. ham kahtï haï. 18. mal parhtï hu. 19. vah sôtî hai. 20. âp pîtë haï. 8.3 [2.2.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. The son eats. 2. The child runs. 3. The dog jumps. 4. The calf eats. 5. The donkey lives. 6. The boy reads. 7. The horse walks. 8. The parrot asks. 9. The calves play. 10. The donkeys come. 11. The dogs bring. 12. The children drink. 13. The goats go. 14. The horses arrive. 15. The wolf stays. 16. The boy sees. 17. The parrots say. 18. The wolves run. 19. The goat eats. 20. The sons walk. 8.4 [2.2.3] Translate into English: 1. bakrâ âtâ hai. 2. bachrë khâtë haï. 3. baccâ pîtâ hai. 4. gadhâ caltâ hai. 5. kuttà khëltâ hai. 6. tôtë sôtë haï. 7. bhëriyâ kudtâ hai. 8. ghôrâ daurtâ hai. 9. baccë tairtë hai. 10. bakrë rahtë haï. 11. larkë bôltë haï. 12. bëtâ bhêjtâ hai. 13. gadhë jâtë haï. 14. kuttë tairtë haï. 15. ghôrë lâtë haï. 16. larkâ puchtâ hai. 17. bhëriyë pahûctë haï. 18. tôtâ samajhtâ hai. 19. bëtë kahtë haï. 20. bachrâ rahtâ hai. 8.5 [2.3.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. The (female) goat comes. 2. The flies go. 3. The hen drinks. 4. The cat runs. 5. The fish eats. 6. The girls read. 7. The fox jumps. 8. The wife cooks. 9. The mare sees. 10. The daughter understands. 11. The fish eat. 12. The hens jump. 13. The cats play. 14. The fly walks. 15. The daughters read. 16. The (female) goats live. 17. The wives ask. 18. The girl sends. 19. The mares come. 20. The foxes run. 8.6 [23.3] Translate into English: 1. bakriyà khâtî haï. 2. billï pîtï hai. 3. patnï pahuctï hai. 4. machlî khâtî hai. 5. larkiyâ

65

66

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

pùchtî hai. 6. lômriyâ daurtï hai. 7. billiyâ khêltï hai. 8. murgï daurtï hai. 9. bëtiya bôltî haï. 10. makkhiyâ jâtî haï. 11. patniya pakâtl haï. 12. larkï kâm kartï hai. 13. lômrï dëkhtï hai. 14. murgiyâ pïtï haï. 15. bëtï parhtï hai. 16. makkhî rahtî hai. 17. bëtï samajhtï hai. 18. machlï rahtï hai. 19. bëtiya kahtï haï. 20. bakrï sôtï hai. 8.7 [3.13] Translate into Hindi: I. I (msc.) want to go. 2. T h e child wants to play. 3. T h e horses want to jump. 4. W e (fm.) want to read. 5. The mare wants to drink. 6. T h e dogs want to come. 7. He wants to eat. 8. The girl wants to ask. 9. You (msc.) want to send. 10. T h e wife wants to cook. I I . T h e boy wants to work. 12. T h e parrot wants to speak. 13. T h e daughter wants to stay. 14. You (hon. msc.) want to arrive. 15. The boys want to send. 16. The daughters want to walk. 17. T h e fish want to swim. 18. T h e calves want to run. 19. They (fm.) want to see. 20. T h e cats want to hear. 8.8 [3.1.4] Translate into English: 1. maï dënâ câhtâ hu. 2. baccâ khânâ câhtâ hai. 3. larkiyâ calnà câhtï haï. 4. turn lënâ câhtê hô. 5. tôtâ pïnâ câhtâ hai. 6. bëtâ kâm karnâ câhtâ hai. 7. patnï puchnâ câhtï hai. 8. vah pakânâ câhtï hai. 9. larkë khëlnâ câhtë haï. 10. vë parhnâ câhtï haï. 11. bëtï puchnâ câhtï hai. 12. billiyâ jânâ câhtï haï. 13. vah bhëjnâ câhtâ hai. 14. bachrâ daurnâ câhtâ hai. 15. bëtë kâm karnâ câhtë haï. 16. âp pahucnâ câhtë haï. 17. kuttâ sônâ câhtâ hai. 18. murgï khânâ câhtï hai. 19. lômriyâ ânâ câhtï haï. 20. ham calnâ câhtë haï. 8.9~~[3.2.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. She is hungry. 2. T h e children are thirsty. 3. I (msc.) am old. 4. T h e cat is fat. 5. T h e donkeys are big. 6. You (fm.) are lean. 7. T h e daughters are good. 8. T h e boys are hungry. 9. We (msc.) are small. 10. T h e fox is false. 11. You (msc.) are big. 12. They (msc.) are bad. 13. T h e shoe is small. 14. T h e wife is good. 15. T h e girls are hungry. 16. You (hon. msc.) are thirsty. 17. T h e horse is big. 18. T h e vegetables are good. 19. T h e mare is fat. 20. T h e cat is bad. 8.10 [3.2.3] Translate into English: 1. ghôrë burhë haï. 2. patnï bhûkhï hai. 3. vah dublâ hai. 4. juté barë haï. 5. machlï chôtï hai. 6. gadhë burë haï. 7. vë pyâsï haï. 8. billï bhûkhï hai. 9. bëtiya dublï haï. 10. ghôrï chôtï hai. 11. murgï bhûkhï hai. 12. maï pyâsï hù. 13. makkhiyâ chôtï haï. 14. tum jhuthï hô. 15. vah chôtï hai. 16. ham acchë haï. 17. sabziyâ barï haï. 18. bakrï bhûkhï hai. 19. tum môtë hô. 20. vah pyâsï hai. 8.11 [3.3.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e elephants eat. 2. T h e lion drinks. 3. T h e camel runs. 4. T h e bears come. 5. T h e husband works. 6. T h e monkeys play. 7. T h e man speaks. 8. T h e elephant sleeps. 9. T h e brothers send. 10. The oxen go. 11. T h e house is big. 12. T h e lions are hungry. 13. T h e husband is good. 14. T h e monkey is bad. 15. T h e fruit is ripe. 16. T h e brothers want to work. 17. T h e monkey wants to play. 18. T h e animal wants to eat. 19. T h e men want to sit. 20. T h e bear wants to sit. 8.12 [3.3.3] Translate into English: 1. patï nahâtë haï. 2. rich caltâ hai. 3. âdmï kâm kartâ hai. 4. bhâï pùchtë haï. 5. jânvar baithtâ hai. 6. hàthï nahâtë haï. 7. bandar kûdtë haï. 8. âdmï pahuctê haï. 9. bail khâtë haï. 10. ut khïctë haï. 11. makân chôtë haï. 12. jânvar bhûkhë haï. 13. bhâï acchë haï. 14. phal pakkâ hai. 15. sër pyâsë haï. 16. patï dënâ câhtê haï. 17. bail thaharnâ câhtâ hai. 18. rïch baithnâ câhtë haï. 19. jânvar khânâ câhtê haï. 20. âdmï nahânâ câhtâ hai.

LESSON 8

67

8.13 [3.4.11 Translate into Hindi: 1. The shops fall. 2. The woman cooks. 3. The cows run. 4. The sister arrives. 5. The things break. 6. The roofs burn. 7. The armies stop. 8. The cow eats. 9. The sisters bathe. 10. The army sleeps. 11. The thing is big. 12. The roofs are new. 13. The sister is hungry. 14. The women are thirsty. 15. The shop is small. 16. The army wants to go. 17. The cows want to stop. 18. The woman wants to cook. 19. The sisters want to sit. 20. The women want to take. 8.14 [3.4.2] Translate into English: 1. cïz tutti hai. 2. bahan pùchtï hai. 3. fauj baithtî hai. 4. chat girti hai. 5. gâyë piti hai. 6. aurat daurtl hai. 7. faujë calti hai. 8. bahnë calti hai. 9. gâyë sôtï haï. 10. aurtë pakàtï haï. 11. cîzë chôtî haï. 12. chat? nayï haï. 13. dukân bari hai. 14. bahan bhûkhî hai. 15. fauj bari hai. 16. aurat lânâ câhtî hai. 17. bahnë parhnâ càhtï haï. 18. fauj soni càhtï hai. 19. gâyë khânâ câhtî haï. 20. aurtë pakânâ câhtï haï. 8.15 [4.1.4] Translate into Hindi: 1. The building burns. 2. The tables fall. 3. The picture breaks. 4. The street goes. 5. The winds come. 6. The books fall. 7-. The night comes. 8. The pictures fall. 9. The buildings burn. 10. The table breaks. 11. The books are big. 12. The roads are broad. 13. The place is big. 14. The medicines are bad. 15. The table is new. 16. The places are small. 17. The buildings are old. 18. The night is long. 19. The table is broad. 20. The book is good. 8.16 [4.1.5] Translate into English: 1. mëz tutti hai. 2. imârat girti hai. 3. tasvlr jaltî hai. 4. havâë jâtï hai. 5. rat âtî hai. 6. sarkë jâtî hai. 7. tasvlrè girti hai. 8. mëzë girti hai. 9. imârat jaltl hai. 10. tasvlr tutti hai. 11. jagah nayl hai. 12. kitàb puràni hai. 13. davâë acchl hai. 14. mëzë purânï haï. 15. sarkë cauri haï. 16. imârtë chôtî haï. 17. jagah acchï hai. 18. davâ nayï hai. 19. kitâbë bari haï. 20. imârat purâni hai. 8.17 [4.2.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. The sparrow goes. 2. The (little) old women walk. 3. The mice run. 4. The (little) old woman wants to sleep. 5. The mouse wants to eat. 6. The (little) old woman is thirsty. 7. The sparrows are small. 8. The cooking-pot is old. 9. The sparrow is thin. 10. The mice are hungry. 8.18 [4.2.2] Translate into English: 1. cuhiyâ âtî hai. 2. burhiyâ sôtï hai. 3. ciriyâ urti haï. 4. cuhiyâ khânâ câhtî haï. 5. ciriyâ urnâ câhtî hai. 6. burhiyâ bhûkhî haï. 7. cuhiyâ pyâsï haï. 8. handiyâ acchï haï. 9. ciriyâ bhûkhî haï. 10. handiyâ purâni hai. 8.19 [4.3.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. The hungry cat eats. 2. The bad dogs run. 3. The thirsty girls drink. 4. The big man works. 5. The good boy reads. 6. The fat dog sleeps. 7. The lean girl plays. 8. The old house burns. 9. The ripe fruits fall. 10. The old donkey pulls. 11. The good boys want to play. 12. The little cat wants to eat. 13. The lean goats want to stop. 14. The hungry women want to cook. 15. The thirsty horses want to drink. 16. The litde boy is hungry. 17. The hungry girl is lean. 18. The big men are old. 19. The old shoes are small. 20. The big cows are fat. 8.20 [43.3] Translate into English: 1. môtê bakré khâtë haï. 2. pyâsî larkiyâ piti haï. 3. chôtî aurtë pakâtï haï. 4. bari dukân !jaltï hai. 5. bhûkhî faujë thahartï haï. 6. burë bandar khëltë haï. 7. purâni chat tutti hai.

68

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

8. nay! imarat girt! hai. 9. bukhe admi kam karte hai. 10. chotl larkiya daurtl hat. 11. acchl bahne pakana cahtl hai. 12. chota ghora thaharna cahta hai. 13. pyasl gave plna cahtl hai. 14. bhukha ut khlcna cahta hai. 15. burha admi sona cahta hai. 16. chota bacca bhukha hai. 17. bar! dukan nayl hai. 18. chote phal pakke hai. 19. caurl sarak lamb! hai. 20. nay! kitabe bar! hai. 8.21 [4.4.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. The animals run quickly. 2. The man works inside. 3. We (msc.) live here. 4. The woman speaks slowly. 5. You (msc.) go out. 6. The brothers work a lot. 7. The women cook inside. 8. Elephants eat a lot. 9. They (msc.) go there. 10. The girls play sometimes. 11. The thirsty horse drinks quickly. 12. The hungry monkeys go down. 13. The little child comes behind. 14. The big elephants live there. 15. The good girls play together. 16. The little children want to go out. 17. The hungry mare wants to eat quickly. 18. The big man wants to work a lot. 19. The thirsty oxen want to stop sometimes. 20. The thin women want to eat immediately. 8.22 [4.4.2] Translate into English: 1. bhai ek-sath khate hat. 2. lark! bahar jatl hai. 3. aurat andar atl hai. 4. bacce plche jate hai. 5. pat! age jata hai. 6. larka dhlre dhlre bolta hai. 7. ham kabhl kabhl kheltl hai. 8. janvar bahut bhukhe hai. 9. ve zyada khatl hai. 10. mal dhlre caltl hu. 11. bhukha bacca jaldl-se khata hai. 12. pyasa ghora zyada pita hai. 13. bura bandar nice jata hai. 14. chote larke ek-sath khelte hai. 15. mota admi pas-se jata hai. 16. bare larke bahar khelte hai. 17. acchl larkiya andar pakana cahtl hai. 18. bhukhe janvar yaha ana cahte hai. 19. bara hathl yaha ana cahta hai. 20. pyasa ghora jaldl-se plna cahta hai. 8.23 [5.1.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. The friends hear him. 2. The men find you (hon.). 3. Mother bathes us. 4. The boy obeys him. 5. The teacher hears me. 6. The mare knows you. 7. Father calls you (hon.). 8. The servants understand me. 9. The mothers call us. 10. Sister kisses them. 8.24 [5.1.3] Translate into English: 1. admi ham-ko bulata hai. 2. naukar mujhe samajhta hai. 3. ma un-ko nahlatl hai. 4. aurte us-ko jantl hai. 5. bahne tum-ko khlctl hai. 6. ap us-ko parhate hai. 7. pita mujhe cumte hai. 8. ve ap-ko mante hai. 9. dost un-ko bulate hai. 10. ghora tum-ko khicta hai. 8.25 [5.2.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. The boys feed the donkeys. 2. The man buys the goat. 3. We (msc.) pull the calves. 4. The woman calls the horse. 5. The men see the wolves. 6. Mother feeds the boys. 7. They ( f m . ) find the parrot. 8. The father kisses the boy. 9. The donkey pulls the boy. 10. The teacher makes the boys read. 11. I want to feed the horses. 12. The boys want to pull the dog. 13. The mother wants to feed the sons. 14. We (msc.) want to buy the parrots. 15. The man wants to see the wolves. 16. The small sister feeds the dog. 17. The good boy calls the calf. 18. The fat horses pull the boys. 19. The big man finds the donkey. 20. The thirsty elephant pulls the dog. 21. The dog pulls the child out. 22. The brother finds the parrot there. 23. The mother calls the boys in. 24. The cow feeds the calf quickly. 25. The teacher makes the boys read sometimes. 8.26 [5.2.2] Translate into English: 1. ma bacco-ko khilatl hai. 2. ham kutte-ko khlcte hai. 3. guru larko-ko parhate hai. 4. turn bacce-ko samajhtl ho. 5. ve bete-ko jante hai. '6. mal toto-ko suntl hu. 7. admi

LESSON 8

69

beto-ko bulata hai. 8. ma bacce-ko nahlatl hai. 9. admi ghoro-ko kharidte hai. 10. ma larke-k.6. cumti hai. 11. ma bakro-ko khilana cahtl hai. 12. ghora larkc-ko khlcna cahta hai. 13. ham toto-ko sunna cahte hai. 14. bahan bacce-ko nahlana cahti hai. 15. bhal ghore-ko bulana cahta hai. 16. burha admi larke-ko parhata hai. 17. bhukhi patnl larko-ko bulatl hai. 18. chota bacca kutte-ko khicta hai. 19. mota naukar bacco-ko bulata hai. 20. accha kutta bacce-ko cumta hai. 21. ma bacco-ko andar bulatl hai. 22. bahan bacce-ko vaha nahlatl hai. 23. larka ghoro-ko jaldi-se khilata hai. 24. guru ham-ko yaha parhate hai. 25. pita bacco-ko kabhl kabhi samajhte hai. 8.27 [5.3.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. The woman teaches the daughters. 2. The man hears (his) wife. 3. The boys feed the hens. 4. The child seizes the cat. 5. The father kisses the daughter. 6. W e (fm.) buy the fish (pi.)- 7. They (msc.) find the flies. 8. The mother sends the girl. 9. The boys grab the fish (sg.). 10. I bring the cat. 11. The man wants to catch the fish (pL). 12. They (fm.) want to take the hen. 13. The mother wants to kiss the daughters. 14. The father wants to see the girl. 15. He wants to find the mare. 16. The old man seizes the mare. 17. The little woman feeds the hens. 18. The big boy drags the cat. 19. The hungry woman seizes the hen. 20. The old lion sees the (female) goats. 21. W e (msc.) call the daughters here. 22. The bears drag the hens there. 23. The father teaches the girl sometimes. 24. The cat eats the fish (sg.) slowly. 25. The mother feeds the daughters too much. 8.28 [53.2] Translate into English: 1. bacca billi-ko khilata hai. 2. ma murgiyo-ko bulatl hai. 3. bap betiyo-ko bulata hai. 4. ap larkiyo-ko sikhate hai. 5. ser murgiyo-ko pakarta hai. 6. aurat makkhiyo-ko pakartl hai. 7. ham machliyo-ko pakarte hai. 8. bandar lomrl-ko dekhte hai. 9. ma larki-ko cumti hai. 10. aurat murgiyo-ko pakarti hai. 11. ham machliyo-ko pakarna cahte hai. 12. ma murgi-ko pakarna cahti hai. 13. turn larkiyo-ko sikhana cahtl ho. 14. Ser bakriyo-ko pakarna cahta hai. 15. bacca ghori-kd khilana cahta hai. 16. bhukha admi machliyo-ko pakarna cahta hai. 17. bara ser bakrl-ko dekhna cahta hai. 18. chota larka murgiyo-ko khilata hai. 19. acchi bahan larki-ko sikhati hai. 20. burhi aurat betiyo-ko bulatl hai. 21. bhukha ser bakrl-ko jaldi-se khana cahta hai. 22. larka machliyo-ko yaha" pakarna cahta hai. 23. ma beti-ko zyada khilatl hai. 24. bap murgiyo-k5 vaha kharidta hai. 25. turn larkiyo-ko andar bulati ho. 8.29 [5.4.1 ] Translate into Hindi: 1. The dog bites the ox. 2. The monkey eats the fruits. 3. The father buys the house. 4. The wife calls the husband. 5. W e see the house. 6. The lion seizes the animal. 7. The mother sends the brothers. 8. The farmer feeds the men. 9. The monkey bites the brother. 10. The man bathes the elephant. 11. W e (msc.) want to eat fruits. 12. The man wants to buy the house. 13. The dog wants to bite the monkey. 14. Mother wants to feed the brothers. 15. The child wants to see the elephant. 16. The old man bathes the elephant. 17. The little farmer ties the oxen. 18. The big lion wants to seize the animal. 19. The bad monkeys eat the fruits. 20. The hungry dog bites the ox. 21. The ox drags the farmer here. 22. Mother wants to send the brothers together. 23. Father calls the men in. 24. W e see the farmers sometimes. 25. The monkey eats the fruit there. 8 3 0 [5.4.2] Translate into English: I. larka phal-ko leta hai. 2. kutta admiyo-ko katta hai. 3. kisan b a i l i k o badhta hai.

70

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

4. àdmï hâthï-kô kharïdtâ hai. 5. patniya patiyô-kô khilâtï haï. 6. bahan bhàï-kô cùmtî hai.- 7. rich âdmî-kô kâttâ hai. 8. bail kisân-kô khïctë haï. 9. larkà hâthiyo-kô dëkhtà hai. 10. bandar phalô-kô dëkhtl hai. 11. mai sërô-kô dëkhnâ câhtâ hû. 12. kuttà âdmiyô-kô kâtnâ câhtâ hai. 13. kisàn bailô-kô bâdhnâ câhtâ hai. 14. ghôrë âdmiyô-kô khîcnâ càhtë haï. 15. ham phalô-kô khânâ câhtï haï. 16. burë bandar phalô-kô curânâ càhtë haï. 17. bûrhâ sër bakrô-kô pakarnâ câhtâ hai. 18. bhukhë bail kisânô-kô khîctê haï. 19. barâ rich âdmï-kô kâttâ hai. 20. jhùthâ bhëriyâ murgiyô-kô curàtâ hai. 21. bâp makân-kô yahâ kharïdtâ hai. 22. bandar phalô-kô vaha lëtë haï. 23. ghôrë kisânô-kô jaldï-së khïctë haï. 24. ham jânvarô-kô kabhï kabhï dëkhtë haï. 25. bhukhë bail âdmï-kô dhïrë khïctë haï. 8 3 1 [5.5.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. The mother calls the sisters. 2. The teacher reads the books. 3. The farmers tie the cows. 4. The woman buys the thing. 5. The man buys the table. 6. The child drinks the medicine. 7. We see the pictures. 8. The girl buys the book. 9. Mother teaches the sisters. 10. The child grabs the picture. 11. We want to see the night. 12. The teacher wants to read the book. 13. The woman wants to buy the things. 14. She wants to see the picture. 15. The farmers want to tie the cows. 16. The good child drinks the medicine. 17. The hungry woman buys the things. 18. The little boy reads the book. 19. The old woman wants to tie the cows. 20. The big man wants to buy the buildings. 21. The old farmer wants to tie the cows here. 22. The women want to buy things there. 23. We (msc.) see the pictures sometimes. 24. The teacher reads the books quickly. 25. The good children drink the medicine sometimes. 832 [5.5.2] Translate into English: 1. aurat mëz-kô kharidtï hai. 2. larkë kitàbô-kô parhtë haï. 3. bâp tasvïr-kô lâtâ hai. 4. kisàn gâyô-kô bâdhtë haï. 5. pitâ imàrtô-kô kharïdtë haï. 6. ma davâ-kô làtï hai. 7. patnï aurtô-kô bulàtï hai. 8. bahan mëz-kô lâtî hai. 9. ham gâyô-kô khilâtë haï. 10. baccâ davâ-kô pïtà hai. 11. ham rât-kô dëkhnâ câhtï haï. 12. kisàn gàyo-kô bâdhnâ câhtâ hai. 13. mai tasvïrô-kô kharïdnâ câhtï hû. 14. vah kitàbô-kô parhnà câhtï hai. 15. mâ aurtô-kô bhëjnâ câhtï hai. 16. acchë larkë mëz-kô lâtë haï 17. chôtï aurat gâyô-kô bulâtï hai. 18. burhâ kisàn gàyô-kô bâdhtâ hai. 19. barâ àdmï imàrtô-kô kharïdtâ hai. 20. môtâ kuttà bahnô-kô kâttâ hai. 21. chôtï billï aurat-kô vahâ kâttï hai. 22. acchâ baccâ kitâbô-kô jaldï-së lâtâ hai. 23. kisân bailo-kô dhïrë lâtë haï. 24. ham kitâbo-kô kabhï kabhï parhtë haï. 25. chôtâ larkà kitâb-kô yahâ parhnà câhtâ hai. 833 [5.6.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. The cat grabs the sparrow. 2. The woman calls the (little) old woman. 3. We (msc.) see the mice. 4. The women buy the cooking-pot. 5. They (msc.) feed the sparrows. 6. The boy brings the cooking-pots. 7. The good woman feeds the (little) old women. 8. The little mouse bites the (little) old woman. 9. We (msc.) want to buy cooking-pots. 10. You (msc.) see the mouse. 834 [5.6.2] Translate into English: 1. aurat cuhiyâ-kô pakartï hai. 2. àdmï burhiyâ-kô bulàtà hai. 3. larkï ciriyô-kô khilâtï hai. 4. billï cuhiyô-kô dëkhtl hai. 5. ham handiyô-kô lâtë haï. 6. mai cuhiyâ-kô pakarnâ câhtï hû. 7. larkë ciriyô-kô yahâ lânâ càhtë haï. 8. tum burhiyâ-kô khilâtï hô. 9. larkë cuhiyâ-kô vahâ pakartë haï. 10. chôtï larkï handiyâ-kô jaldï-së lâtï hai. 8.35 [6.1.1] Translate into Hindi:

LESSON 8

71

1. The man eats raw vegetables. 2. The women call the little children. 3. The farmer makes the thirsty oxen drink. 4. The teacher tells the good boy. 5. We (msc.) see the high buildings. 6. The boys pluck the ripe fruits. 7. They (fm.) know the long street. 8. The farmer drives the big ox. 9. Mother cooks the raw vegetables. 10. The man sells the new pictures. 11. The tall man plucks the ripe fruits. 12. The little boys read the old book. 13. The good sister makes the thirsty brothers drink. 14. The little girl drops the new picture. 15. The thin man knows the true friend. 16. The monkeys want to eat the ripe fruits. 17. The woman wants to cook the raw vegetables. 18. We (msc.) want to sec the big animals. 19. The boy wants to read the little book. 20. They (fan.) want to see the new pictures. 21. The child eats the ripe fruit slowly. 22. The mother calls the little girls inside. 23. Father points out the high houses there. 24. The mare eats the raw vegetables quickly. 25. They (fm.) buy the old picture here. 8.36 [6.1.2] Translate into English: I. ham bhukhë âdmiyô-kô khilâtï haï. 2. larkâ caurl sarak-kô dikhâtà hai. 3. baccâ kaccï sabzï-kô pakartâ hai. 4. bandar pakkë phalô-kô curâtë haï. 5. vê lambë âdmi-kô bulâtë hat. 6. kisân môtë bailô-kô calâtâ hai. 7. aurat nay! tasvïr-kô kharïdtï hai. 8. vah lambî sarak-kô jântl hai. 9. ma bhûkhl bëtiyô-kô bulâtï hai. 10. larkï nayï kitâb-kô girâtl hai. I I . acchï aurat pyâsî gây-kô pilât! hai. 12. bhukhë bandar chôtë phalô-kô khàtë hai. 13. bûrhâ kisân barë ghôro-kô calâtâ hai. 14. dublë bâp pakkî sabziyô-kô khàtë haï. 15. pyâsë kuttë saccë dôstô-kô pâte haï. 16. ham ucï imârat-kô pânâ câhtë haï. 17. kisân bhukhë bakrô-kô khilânâ câhtâ hai. 18. aurat pyâs! gây-kô pilânâ câhtî hai. 19. larkâ chôtï kitâb-kô parhnâ câhtâ hai. 20. kisân kacc! sabziyô-kô bëcnâ câhtâ hai. 21. mal barë ghôrô-kô calânâ câhtâ hû. 22. mâ bhukhë baccô-kô yahâ bulânâ câhtî hai. 23. acchï aurat chôtë baccô-kô zyâdâ khilâtï hai. 24. bahut acchâ larkâ nayï kitâbô-kô kabhl kabhî parhtâ hai. 25. bhûkhâ bandar pakkë phalô-kô fauran khâtâ hai. 8.37 [6.2.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. This (one [msc.]) plays. 2. This parrot speaks. 3. These (fm.) sleep. 4. This daughter cooks. 5. These animals run. 6. This vegetable is ripe. 7. This table is new. 8. These (msc.) drink. 9. This (fan.) is long. 10. This shop burns. 11. These daughters want to know. 12. This old house burns. 13. These women speak slowly. 14. This (one [msc.]) wants to sleep. 15. These (fan.) play sometimes. 16. This hungry mare wants to eat quickly. 17. These ripe fruits fall. 18. This farmer works a lot. 19. This thirsty ox wants to stop sometimes. 20. These small children want to go out. 8 3 8 [6.2.2] Translate into English: 1. yë daurtë haï. 2. yah bakrâ kùdtâ hai. 3. yë larkiya samajhtl haï. 4. yah patnï pakàtï hai. 5. yë pitë haï. 6. yah kâm kartâ hai. 7. yë kuttë daurtë haï. 8. yë gâyë pîtî haï. 9. yë machliyâ khâtî haï. 10 yah parhtï hai. 11. yah larkâ parhnâ câhtâ hai. 12. yë pïnâ câhtë haï. 13. yah barï imârat jalti hai. 14. yah bandar khëlnâ câhtâ hai. 15. yë chôtï kitâbë girtï haï. 16. yë kuttë khëlnâ câhtë haï. 17. yah chôtà ghôrà pïnâ câhtâ hai. 18. yë khânâ câhtî haï. 19. yë barë âdmï kâm kartë haï. 20. yah bûrhï aurat sônâ câhtî hai. 8.39 [6.2.4] Translate into Hindi: 1. I see this boy. 2. The farmer ties these animals. 3. The man calls this (one). 4. The mother teaches this daughter. 5. We feed these dogs. 6. The dog bites this brother. 7. The children seize these. 8. They (fm.) feed these. 9. The woman cooks this. 10. The

72

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

fathers buy these parrots. 11. The girl reads these small books. 12. The dog pulls this child out. 13. The mother calls these in. 14. The father wants to kiss this son. 15. The woman wants to tie this hungry cow. 16. The farmer buys these goats. 17. The teacher reads these sometimes. 18. The brother finds this small parrot here. 19. The cow feeds these hungry calves quickly. 20. The woman feeds this (one.) 8.40 [6.2.5] Translate into English: 1. ma in baccô-kô khilàtï hai. 2. ham is-kô khïctë haï. 3. mai in tôtô-kô suntà hû. 4. bahan is baccë-kô nahlàtï hai. 5. ham is-kô kharîdtl haï. 6. âdmî in ghôrô-kô kharïdtâ hai. 7. larkà in-kô jaldî-së lâtâ hai. 8. aurat in sabziyô-kô pakâtî hai. 9. vë in-kô sunnà càhtï haï. 10. ham is tasvîr-kô kharîdtë haï. 11. acchï aurat in bhûkhê baccô-kô zyâdâ khilâtî hai. 12. bandar in phalô-kô jaldî-së khâtë haï. 13. aurat in môtï gâyô-kô khilâtî hai. 14. baccâ is kaccl sabzï-kô khânâ câhtâ hai. 15. bahut acchï larkî nayï kitâbô-kô kabhï kabhï parhtï hai. 16. ham is lambï sarak-kô jântï haï. 17. aurat is nayï tasvïr-kô kharïdtî hai. 18. bhûkhë larkë in pakkë phalô-kô khâtë haï. 19. vah is kaccï sabzï-kô girâtï hai. 20. larkà is chôtï kitâb-kô parhnâ câhtâ hai. 8.41 [6.3.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. That (one [msc.]) reads. 2. Those parrots speak. 3. That cow drinks. 4. Those shops burn. 5. They (fm.) play. 6. That fruit is ripe. 7. They (msc.) eat. 8. That woman cooks. 9. Those men work. 10. That (one [fm.]) is tall. 11. Those daughters want to play. 12. That thirsty girl reads. 13. That girl wants to go. 14. That ripe fruit falls. 15. Those old houses burn. 16. Those thirsty goats drink here. 17. Those hungry horses want to eat quickly. 18. That building is high. 19. That old farmer works a lot. 20. Those pictures are wide. 8.42 [6.3.2] Translate into English: 1. vah pakâtî hai. 2. vah larkà caltâ hai. 3. vë gâyë khâtï haï. 4. vë vahâ jâtë haï. 5. vah kisân kharïdtâ hai. 6. vah daurtî hai. 7. vë sabziyà nayï haï. 8. vah sikhâtâ hai. 9. vë imârtë ùcï haï. 10. vë vahâ kâm kartë haï. 11. vah larkà ghôre-kô jaldî-së khilàtâ hai. 12. vah chôtï larkî billî-kô khïctï hai. 13. vë kisân bailô-kô kharîdtë haï. 14. vë aurtë baccô-kô nahlânâ càhtï haï. 15. vah guru yahâ rahtë haï. 16. vë tôtë bôlnà câhtë haï. 17. vah barà ghôrà âdmï-kô khïcnà câhtâ hai. 18. vë chôtë baccë bhûkhë haï. 19. vë murgiya khânâ càhtï haï. 20. vah bhùkhà âdmï machliyô-kô pakarnà câhtâ hai. 8.43 [6.3.4] Translate into Hindi: 1. They know that (one). 2. The woman feeds those cows. 3. The dog bites that man. 4. Mother bathes that (one). 5. We know that road. 6. The farmer plucks those fruits. 7. The father calls them. 8. You (fm.) buy those vegetables. 9. The daughter finds that cat. 10. The boy seizes that (one). 11. You (msc.) drive those oxen. 12. We want to see those big animals. 13. The women want to cook those raw fruits. 14. They (msc.) sell those raw vegetables. 15. The man sells those new pictures. 16. The sister wants to call in those hungry boys. 17. The boy points out that long road. 18. Father wants to point out those high buildings. 19. We want to eat those ripe fruits. 20. She drops that old book. 8.44 [6.3.5] Translate into English: 1. maï us ùcï imârat-kô dikhàtà hu. 2. chôtâ larkà us billï-kô khïctâ hai. 3. ghôrà un-kô khâtâ hai. 4. vë un lambë àdmiyô-kô bulâtë haï. 5. ham un-kô khilâtî haï. 6. pitâ us barë makàn-kô kharîdtë haï. 7. turn un dôstô-kô jântë hô. 8. vah lômrï un môtï

LESSON 8

73

murgiyo-ko pakartl hai. 9. vah us-ko dekhti hai. 10. acchi aurat un pyasi gayo-ko pilatl hai. 11. ham us bare makan-ko pana cahte hai. 12. larka un choti kitabo-ko lata hai. 13. bhukhe bandar un phalo-ko curana cahte hai. 14. bap un chote larko-ko zyada khilata hai. 15. aurat us nayl handiya-ko kharldtl hai. 16. bill! us choti cuhiya-ko pakartl hai. 17. kisan us burhl lomri-ko marta hai. 18. mal us bare ghore-ko kabhl kabhi calata hu. 19. bhuka kutta us bure larke-ko katta hai. 20. kisan us-ko pana cahta hai.

Lesson 9 9.1 àdml kamrë-më hai. The man is in the room, ûcï imirtc sahar-mê haï. The high buildings are in the city, is divâr-me ëk khirkï hai. There is one window in this wall, us divâr-me do khirkiya hai. There are two windows in that wall. Sections 9.1 to 9.4.4 are concerned with postposition constructions. The Hindi postpositions correspond in function to the English prepositions. The postpositions of Hindi, however, are placed after the words they govern and the prepositions of English are placed before the words they govern. Words governed by postpositions have the object form (See remarks in 5.1 and 5.2). In the system of transliteration employed in these lessons the postposition is linked to the word it governs by a hyphen. This section illustrates the postposition -me in. R E M A R K S :See the two English sentences above beginning with the phrases There is . . . »There are. . . . Hindi expresses this English construction by taking the postpositional phrase out of its normal order in the sentence and placing it first. Compare âdmï kamrë-më hai. A man is in the room, and kamrë-më âdmï hai. There is a man in the room.; ucl imlrte sahar-m* haï. The high buildings are in the city, and saharmê S a imârte haï. There are high buildings in the city. 9.1.1 More examples are: zamïn-më kôclâ hai. There is coal in the ground, vah ag-me kâth dâltï hai. She throws wood in the fire, sikârî ûcë përô-më paksl dëkhtâ hai. The hunter sees birds in the tall trees, ma handiyo-me sabziyâ dâltï hai. Mother puts vegetables in the cooking-pots, târë âkâs-me haï. Stars are in the sky. chôtë thilô-me khânâ rakhiyë. (Please) place the food on the small dishes, ghanë jangalô-më jinvar haï. There are animals in the thick jungles, baccë bâg-me ëk-sâth khëltë haï. The children play together in the garden, kisân abhï khët-më kâm kartâ hai. The farmer works now in the field gahrë samudra-më machliya haï. There are fish in the deep sea. R E M A R K S : ( 1 ) Nouns denoting non-human beings and things need not, when placed in the direct object form, take the postposition -ko. (See the second and third sentences, above.) When the direct object form does not occur before the posposition -ko, it has the same form as that of the subject. In the majority of occurrences nouns

74

LESSON

9

denoting things will not take -ko in the direct object form. Nouns beings tend to take the -ko, especially when the reference is to a being. Compare sikiri ûcê përô-më paksï dêkhtâ hai. The hunter trees, and sikârï ucë përô-me paksiyo-kô dêkhtâ hai. The hunter tall trees.

75 denoting non-human specific or individual sees birds in the tall sees the birds in the

( 2 ) Remember that adjectives modifying nouns in the object form are placed in the corresponding object form (See 6.1). ( 3 ) When more than one adverb occurs in an utterance, the adverb of time will normally precede that of manner and the adverb of manner will precede that of place. (See the eighth and ninth sentences, above.) When emphasis is placed on an adverb in such a sequence, the adverb is taken out of its position in the normal order and placed first. Postpositional phrases, with the exception of those of the direct and indirect object, can be considered to function as adverbs. ( 4 ) samudra ( 3 ) ocean, sea (See the tenth sentence, above.) belongs to a class of nouns not considered hitherto. These nouns have the same form for the subject, singular and plural, and the object, singular. T h e object form, plural is formed by dropping the final -a and replacing it with -©, e.g., samudio-. 9.1.2 Vocabulary Notes: âkâs ( â ) sky, âg ( I ) fire, kôëli ( a ) coal, kaprâ ( â ) cloth [in pL clothes], kith ( â ) wood, timber, khSdnâ to dig, jangal ( ! ) jungle, zamin ( I ) ground, soil, tara ( â ) star, thâlâ ( â ) dish, plate, dïvir (T) wall, nadï ( I ) river, big ( â ) garden, sikârï ( â ) hunter. 9 . 1 3 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. Sikârï jafigalS-me jânvar màrtë hai. 2. bandar ûcê pêrô-me jaldî-sê daurtê haï. 3. barï machliya gahrë samudra-me tairtï haï. 4. ham iahar-me kâm kartï hai. 5. chôtê larkë gahrï nadî-mê tairnâ câhtë haï. 6. bhûkhî aurat nayl handiyo-më khânâ pakâti hai. 7. âdmï ghar-më dhïrë jàtâ hai. 8. ham bare bâg-më vë phal tôrnà câhtë hai. 9. kisân chôtî nadî-ml hâthî nahlâtë haï. 10. âdmï abhl chôtë khët-m? khôdnâ câhtë haï. 9.1.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The farmer digs in the ground. 2. T h e little boy wants to see the stars in the sky. 3. There are two tables in the large room. 4. The old man cuts wood in the thick jungle. 5. The women want to buy cloth in the shop. 6. There are many fish in the deep ocean. 7. The little boys want to play together in the garden. 8. There is a hungry cow in the field. 9. T h e woman wants to cook the vegetables in the new .cooking-pot. 10. There are small shops in the bazaar. 9.2 guru larkë-kô kitib dëtë haï. T h e teacher gives the book to the boy. guru us-ko kitib dëtë haï. T h e teacher gives the book to him. pita baccë-kô phal dëtë haï. T h e father gives the fruit to the child, larka aurtô-kô lakrï dëtâ hai. T h e boy gives the wood to the women. This section illustrates the Hindi equivalent of the English indirect object construction. In the Hindi construction the noun indicating the indirect object is placed in the object form before the postposition -ko. The normal order of sequence will be indirect object phrase before direct object phrase, therefore there will not arise occasion for confusion between this construction and that of the direct object when the two constructions occur in the same sentence. (Compare 5.1 and 5.2 to 5.6.)

76

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

9.2.1 More examples are: ma baccô-kô k a h i n i y i su nati h a i lark! bahan-kô nayl san dikhâtï hai. aurat bhûkhî gây-kô ghâs dêtî hai. acchâ l a r k i pyâsc âdmi-kô pani dëtâ hai. ham pathik-kô nadl batate hai. naukar mâlik-kô thandâ pani lata hai. ma naukar-kô nayë thâlë dêtî hai. âdmi patni-kô citthi parhti hai. dhôbê idmï-kô kaprë bhëjtâ hai. aurat dôst-kô nayî cûriyâ dikhâtï hai.

T h e mother tells the children stories. T h e girl shows (her) sister the new sari. T h e woman gives grass to the hungry cow. T h e good boy gives water to the thirsty man. W e point out the river to the traveller. T h e servant brings cold water to the master. Mother gives the new dishes to the servant. T h e man reads the letter to (his) wife. T h e washerman sends the clothes to the man. T h e woman shows (her) new bangles to (her) friend.

9.2.2 Vocabulary Notes: kahani ( I ) story, tale, ghâs ( ï ) grass, fodder, citthi ( ï ) letter, d i n ( ï ) bangle, dhôbï ( â ) washerman, naukar ( â ) servant, sari ( I ) sari, phïil ( à ) flower. 9 . 2 3 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. acchâ larkâ mâ-kô kâth lâtâ hai. 2. pitâ chôtë baccô-kô kitâb parhtë haï. 3. ham àdmî-kô lambî sarak dikhâtë haï. 4. patnî bhukhë kisân-kô khânâ bhëjtï hai. 5. m i pitâ-kô burë larkë-kô dikhâtï hai. 6. larkiyâ mâ-kô pânî lâtï haï. 7. chôtï larkî pitâ-kô phûl dëtî hai. 8. pat! patnî-kô tare dikhâtà hai. 9. aurat baccô-kô pakkë phal bâhar lâtï hai. 10. kisân chôtë khët-kô gâyë calânâ câhtâ hai. 9.2.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e little girl wants to bring water to (her) mother. 2. T h e boys point out the high building to the old man. 3. We (msc.) want to give food to the hungry man. 4. T h e men point out the city to the farmers. 5. T h e father gives the small parrot to (his) daughter. 6. T h e hungry farmer brings vegetables to (his) wife. 7. T h e mother sends the bad son to (his) father. 8. T h e boy brings flowers to (his) teacher. 9. T h e men point out the lion to the hunter. 10. T h e sister brings the little brother to (their) mother. 9.3 kursi-par topi hai. There is a hat on the chair, is divir-par tin tasvlrë haï. There are three pictures on this wall, kitibë mëzo-par haï. T h e books are on the tables, kalam kitâbo-par hai. T h e pen is on the books. This section illustrates constructions with the postposition -par on, upon. 9 3 . 1 More examples are: bacce chat-par khèltè hai. T h e children play on the roof. naukar zamln-par pani daltà hai, T h e servant pours water on the ground. larka mèz-par thàla rakhta hai. T h e boy places the dish on the table. vah palaiig-par kapre rakhti hai. She places clothes on the bed. aurat divaró-par tasvire latkàtl hai. T h e woman hangs pictures on the walls. chòte paksi chat-par baithtè hai. T h e little birds sit on the roof. maG paudhe-par pani dalta hai. T h e gardener pours water on the plant. aurat sir-par bhar rakhti hai. T h e woman places the burden on (her) head.

LESSON 9

77

bandar sàkhàó-par baithte hai. The monkeys sit on the branches, àdmi kursi-par tòpi rakhta hai. The man places (his) hat on the chair. 9.3.2 Vocabulary Notes: kalam (a and I) pen, kursi (I) chair, chat (!) roof, topi (i) hat, tasvir (I) picture, palang (à) bed, bedstead, paudhi (a) plant, sapling, bhàr (a) weight, load, mill (a) gardener, s i k h i (i) branch, sir (a) head. 9.3.3 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. larkà kitàbò-par kalam rakhta hai. 2. naukar zamin-par bhàr rakhta hai. 3. buri larkà bahan-par pani dàltà hai. 4. chóté baccé chat-par khélnà càhté hai. 5. naukar méz-par thàlé rakhtà hai. 6. larka sàkhà-par baithnà càhtà hai. 7. àdmi sarak-par bhàr girata hai. 8. dhóbl zamin-par kapre rakhnà càhtà hai. 9. aurat paudho-par pànl dàlti hai. 10. àdmi palafig-par sonà càhtà hai. 9.3.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. We (msc.) want to play on the roof. 2. The birds want to sit on the branch. 3. The man places the bed on the roof. 4. The servant hangs the picture on the wall. 5. The woman places the ripe fruits on the table. 6. There are two houses on the road. 7. The boy places the grass on the ground. 8. The dog sleeps on the ground. 9. There is a monkey on the roof. 10. The woman places the dishes on the table. 9.4 machui sahar-se i t i hai. The fisherman comes from the city, larki larke-se pani leti hai. The girl takes water from the boy. guru larkiyo-sc saval puchte hai. The teacher asks the girls questions, guru un-se savàl puchte hai. The teacher asks them questions, larka chari-se ghórè-kò marta hai. The boy strikes the horse with the stick, larkà us-se ghóre-ko marta hai. The boy strikes the horse with it. This section illustrates the postposition -se which translates English from and with, by means of which. 9.4.1 More examples are: aurat mujh-se lakrì leti hai. The woman takes the wood from me. machua nadl-se machliya pakarti hai. The fisherman catches fish from the river, larkà kitib-se ek panni p h i r t i hai. The boy tears a leaf from the book, larki per-se phul tòrti h a i The girl plucks flowers from the tree, admi kalam-se ek citthi likhta hai. The man writes a letter with the pen. aurat rasse-sè gay-ko badhti hai. The woman ties the cow with a rope, pyisa àdmi mu}h-sé pini leti hai. The thirsty man takes water from me. lark! kue-se pini liti hai. The girl brings water from the well, bandar baccè-se k h i n i curiti hai. The monkey steals the food from the child, kisin hal-sè khet jótti hai. The farmer tills the field with the plow. REMARKS: (1) The object form of the first person singular pronoun, when occurring before the simple postpositions, is mujh (See remarks of 5.1.). (2) Observe the use of the postposition -se with the verb puchni to ask. 9.4.2 Vocabulary Notes: k u i (a) well, chan (I) stick, panni (à) leaf, page, bandar (a) monkey, machua (à) fisherman, rassi (a) rope, savil (a) question, hai (à) plow.

78

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

9.4.3 Exericse 1. Translate into English: 1. ham un-se saval puchte hai. 2. vc bacce-se phal lena cahte hai. 3. dhobl nadi-se kapre lata hai. 4. gay paudho-se phal khatl hai. 5. kisan charl-sc bandaro-ko mama cahta hai. 6. pyasa admi acche larke-se panl leta hai. 7. pathik sahar-se ata hai. 8. aurat khet-se sabziya latl hai. 9. admi rasse-se ghas badhta hai. 10. guru mujh-se saval puchna cahte hai. 9.4.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e teacher asks the boy questions. 2. T h e small farmer strikes the big ox with a stick. 3. The man ties the wood with a rope. 4. T h e thirsty traveller takes water from me. 5. T h e woman calls the cow from the garden. 6. W e (fm.) bring water from the well. 7. T h e hungry farmer comes from the field. 8. They (msc.) want to tie the bad goat with a rope. 9. Mother asks me questions. 10. The hungry dog steals food from the child. 9.5 Jan:

ek Hindustani aur Amerikan-ki batrit. ñamaste.

ASók: ñamaste. Jan:

kya ap men ma dad kar sakte hai?

Asók: mujhe malum nahi. ap kya cahte hai? Jan:

mai yaha ajnabl hu.

Asók: kya i p Hindi bol sakte hai? Jan: ji ha, mai Hindi bol sakta hü; lekin acchi tarah nahl. Asók: mai ap-ki kya madad kar sakta hü? Jan:

mujhe ek Hindi mastar cahiye.

Asók: ap-ko kyo Hindi mastar cahiye? Jan: mai Hindi acchi tarah boina sikhna cahta hü.

Conversation between an Indian and an American. John: Hello. Asok: Hello. John: Can you help me? Asok: I do not know. What do you wish? John: I am a stranger here. Asok: Can you speak Hindi? John: Yes, I can speak Hindi; Asok: John: Asok: John:

but not very welL How can I help you? I need a Hindi tutor. Why do you need a Hindi teacher? I wish to learn to speak Hindi well.

Asók: ap to Hindi acchi tarah bolte hai. ap-ko mastar-ki zarurat nahi.

Asok: You speak Hindi well.

Jan:

John: But when people speak too fast, I

lekin jab log jaldi jaldi bolte hai, to mai nahi samajh sakta.

Asók: kya ap meri bat samajh sakte hai? Jan: zara dhire dhire boliye, tab mai ap-ki bat samajh sakta hu.

You do not need a teacher. cannot understand them. Asok: Can you understand me? John: Please speak more slowly, then I can understand you.

Asók: mera bhai ap-ki madad kar sakta hai.

Asok: My brother can help you.

Jan:

John: What does your brother do?

ap-ka bhai kya karta hai?

Asók: mera bhii yünivarsiti-me parhta hai.

Asok: My brother studies in the university.

Jan: vah kya parhta hai? Asók: vah kai visay parhta haL

John: What does he study? Asok: He studies several subjects. John: What is his chief subject?

Jan:

us-ka mukhya visay kyi hai?

LESSON 9

Asôk: us-kâ mukhya visay vigyân hai. va h vaigyinik banni câhtâ haL Jân: yah tô bahut acchâ haL Asôk: mërï-bhï aisï riy hai. Jân: kyi âp apnë bhiî-kô mërë pas bhëj saktë haï? Asôk: mal use kab bhcju? Jân: kal sâm car bajë. Asôk: mai usé bhêjûgâ. âp kahâ thaharë hai? Jan: mal Impïrïyal Hôtal-me thaharl hu. Asôk: bahut acchâ. vah vaha âegà. Jân: bahut bahut dhanyavâd. nampift?

Asôk: namastë.

79

Asok: His chief subject is science. He wants to be a scientist. John: That is very nice. Asok: That is my understanding too. John: Can you send your brother to me? Asok: When should I send him? John: Tomorrow afternoon at four o'clock. Asok: I shall send him. Where are you staying? John: I am staying at the Imperial Hotel. Asok: Very well, he will come there. John: Thank you very much. Good-by. Asok: Good-by.

Lesson 10 10.1 per makan-ké piche hai. The tree is behind the house. us-ké piche per hai. There is a tree behind it. Idmi giri-ke piché calta hai. The man walks behind the cart. adml us-ke piché calta hai. The man walks behind it. baccé ghóré-ké piché daurté hai. The children run behind the horse. baccé us-ké piché daurté hai The children run behind it. Sections 10.1 to 10.4.3 are concerned with compound postpositions. These consist of two forms, the first of which is -ke and the second a form which in many instances can be recognized as an adverb. Compare these adverbs: piche behind of -ke piche in section 10.1; nice down of -ke nice in 10.2; pas near of -ke pas in 11.1 (See 4.4 for remarks on the adverbs.) Other such compound postpositions will be introduced in the lessons following. This section introduces the compound postposition -ke piche behind, after. REMARKS: Of the pronominal forms only the following occur before the compound postpositions: us, un, ap. Constructions involving the other pronouns will be introduced shortly. (See 14.3.) 10.1.1 More Examples are: sahar-ke piche jaiigal hai. There is a jungle behind the city. kitab mez-ke piche girti hai. The book falls behind the table. bacce bhaiyo-ke piche calte hai. The children walk behind (their) brothers. kisan bailo-ke piche daurta hai. The farmer runs after the oxen. darvaze-ke piche bag hai. There is a garden behind the door. dhobi gadhe-ke piche calta hai. The washerman walks behind the donkey. 10.1.2 Vocabulary Notes: gari ( ! ) cart, wagon, darvaza ( a ) door, bhai ( a ) brother. 10.13 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. bacca darvaze-ke piche hai. 2. aurte kue-ke piche ek-sath bolt! hai. 3. ma chote bacceke piche daurtl hai. 4. billl larkl-ke piche jatl hai. 5. patnl patl-ke piche caltl hai. 6. ham un-ke piche jate hai. 7. pathik us per-ke piche baithta hai. 8. ldmri kue-ke piche murgl pakartl hai. 9. kisan hal-ke piche jata hai. 10. bhukha kutta chote bacce-ke piche calta hai.

80

LESSON

10

81

10.1.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. There is a cow behind the tree. 2. The woman bathes behind the well. 3. The river is behind the city. 4. The little boy walks behind (his) father. 5. We (fm.) sit behind the house. 6. The gardener works behind the house. 7. The woman puts the picture behind the door. 8. The son walks behind (his) father. 9. The servant digs the ground behind the garden. 10. There is a garden behind the house.

10.2 gay per-ke nice hai. The cow is under the tree, kutte mezò-kè nice hai. The dogs are under the tables, kutte un-ke nice hai. The dogs are under them, sap makan-kè nice hai. The snake is under the house, us-ke nice sap hai. There is a snake under it. This section deals with the compound postposition -ke nice under. 10.2.1 More examples are: sap ghar-ke nice jata hai. The snake goes under the house. jute palang-kè nice hai. The shoes are under the bed. sadhu per-ke nice baithtc hai. The holy man sits under the tree. machua pul-kè nice machliya pakarta hai. The fisherman catches fish under the bridge. bap per-ke nice àram karta hai. The father rests under the tree. kàrigar motargaii-kè nice kim karta hai. The mechanic works under the car. REMARKS: aram karna corresponds to the English verb to rest, to repose; sadhu translates holy man (the verb is usually placed in the plural to indicate honor or respect.). 10.2.2 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. aurat gay-ko pér-ké nice badhti hai. 2. bill! makan-ke nice daurtl hai. 3. Sér chòté gadhè-kó pul-ké nice khicta hai. 4. naukar jùté palaflg-ké nice rakhtà hai. 5. ghar-ké nice bara sap rahtà hai. 6. kisàn bhukhé bailó-kò pero-ké nicé badhtà hai. 7. bacca mèz-ké nice khelta hai. 8. kisàn pèr-kè nice sona càhtà hai. 9. lamba sap makan-kè nice jatà hai. 10. pul-ke nicé mòti gay hai. 10.2.3 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The oxen stop under the tree. 2. The boy drops the book under the table. 3. W e (msc.) see the big animals under the bridge. 4. The oxen drag the farmer under the tree. 5. The dog wants to sleep under the tall tree. 6. The hungry cat eats the food under the table. 7. The lean cow rests under the tree. 8. There are many ripe fruits under the tree. 9. The fisherman wants to catch fish under the bridge. 10. The litde girl want to play under the tree. 103 ma bacce-kè sith sahar-kó jatx hai. The mother goes to the city with the child, ma us-ke sith sahar-ko jati hai. The mother goes to the city with it. larka chotì larki-kè sath kheltl hai. The boy plays with the little girl, bachri bari gày-kè sath daurti hai. The calf runs with the large cow. This section illustrates constructions with the compound postposition -ke sath with, in the company of, together with. REMARKS: The postposition -ko is used to indicate the place towards which an action is directed. (Compare 9.2.) When the general direction of an action is indicated,

82

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

rather than the specific, the -ko is dropped. Compare: aurat sahar-ko jati haL The woman goes to the city, and aurat sahar jati hai. The woman goes to town. 103.1 More examples are: kisan larko-ke sath khet-ko jata haL admi beti-ke sath bag-me ata haL

The farmer goes to the field with the boys, The man comes into the garden with (his) daughter. larki bhai-ke sath ma-ko pani lata hai. The boy brings water to (his) mother with (his) brother. bacce betiyo-ke sath chat-par kheltc hai. The children play on the roof with the daughters. larki aurto-ke sath bo ha haL The boy speaks with the women, ma piti-ke sath bazar-ko jana cahti hai. Mother wants to go to the bazaar with father. 10J J . Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. bap bacco-ke sath khelta hai. 2. ma betiyo-ke sath bolt! hai. 3. larka burhl ma ke sath chdte makan-me rahta hai. 4. betl bhaiyd-ke sath ghar daurtl hai. 5. aurat naukar-ke sath bazar jati hai. 6. larka dosto-ke sath chat-par baithta hai. 7. admi naukar-ke sath iahar-ko jata hai. 8. larka pita-ke sath khet-ko jata hai. 9. bara larka dosto-ke sath nadime tairta hai. 10. ma aurto-ke sath bazar-se ati hai. 10.33 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The boy goes with (his) brother to the field. 2. The farmer goes to the city with (his) sons. 3. The children play on the roof with (their) friends. 4. The woman cooks in the house with (her) daughter. 5. The gardener goes into the garden with the children. 6. The mother plays with the child. 7. The daughter works with (her) mother in the house. 8. The servant goes to the bazaar with the woman. 9. The little girl plays in the garden with (her) sister. 10. The girl goes to the bazaar with (her) friends. 10.4 admi makan-ke samne hai. The man is in front of the house, us-ke samne admi hai. There is a man in front of it. makin pero-ke samne haL The house is in front of the trees, nadi mandir-ke samne hai. The river is in front of the temple. This section illustrates the compound postposition -ke samne in front of. R E M A R K S : ( 1 ) The being or thing represented by the subject of the verb is in a position facing the being or thing represented by the noun placed before -ke samne. ( 2 ) Vocabulary notes: mandir ( a ) temple. 10.4.1 More examples are: imarat-ke samne ek dukan haL gaii makan-ke samne rukti haL sadhu mandir-ke samne baithte hai. maG ghar-ke samne khodta haL makan-ke samne b i g haL patni pati-ke samne khana rakhti hai.

There is a shop in front of the building, The cart stops in front of the house, The holy man sits in front of the temple. The gardener digs in front of the house, There is a garden in front of the house, The wife puts food in front of (her)

husband. 10.4.2 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. admi dukan-ke samne bahut cize" becta hai. 2. nadl-ke samne khet hai. 3. aurat

LESSON

10

83

sadhu-ke samne phul rakhti hai. 4. motargari imarat-ke samne ruktl hai. 5. chota larka pita-ke samne daurta hai. 6. mall makan-ke samne kam karta hai. 7. sikari jaftgal-ke samne bheriye-ko marta hai. 8. bhukhl aurat bag-ke samne murgi-ko pakartl hai. 9. makan-ke samne ek uca per hai. 10. lark! ghar-ke samne khelna cahti hai. 10.4.3 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The holy man sits in front of the river. 2. The woman is in front of the well. 3. The mother places fruit in front of the child. 4. The little girl plays in front of the house. 5. We (msc.) want to play in front of the temple. 6. There is a small shop in front of the high building. 7. The servants sit in front of the house. 8. The boy sits in front of the teacher. 9. There is a thick jungle in front of the city. 10. The gardener wants to rest in front of the house. 10.5 hotal-ke daftar-mc. In the Hotel Office. Ràmés: riamaste. RameS: Hello. klark: namaste. Clerk: HcUo. Ràmés: mai Sri Jònz-sè milnà càhta hu. Ramei: I wish to see Mr. Jones. klark: kya Sri Jonz ap-kò jlnté hai? Clerk: Does Mr. Jones know you? Ràméi: ji ha. Sri Jonz mujhc jantè hai. Rames: Yes. Mr. Jones knows me. unhò-ne mujhc bulaya hai. He has called me. klark: bahut acchà. un-ke kamrè-ka Clerk: Very well. His room number is 710. nambar sat san das hai. Ràmes: mal vaha kaise jiu? RameS: How do I go there? klark: lift-se jàiyè. Clerk: Please go by the elevator. Ràmei: lift kaha hai? Ramei: Where is the elevator? klark: àp-kl dayf tarai Clerk: (It is) to your right Ràmés: meri day? taraf? Ramei: To my right? klark: ha, ap-ki dayi taraf. Clerk: Yes, to your right captasi ap-kò bataega. Ràmés: bahut bahut dhanyavad. 10.6 Sri Jònz-kè kamrc-mc. Ràmés: kya Sri Jonz andar hai? sekretari: ji ha. Sri Jonz andar hai. Ràmés: mujhc Sri Jònz-ne bulaya hai sekretari: ap-ki nim kya hai? Ràmés: meri nàm Rames haL

The attendant will direct yon. RameS: Thank you very much. In Mr. Jones' Room. Ramei: Is Mr. Jones in ? Secretary: Yes. Mr. Jones is in. Ramei: Mr. Jones has called me. Secretary: What is your name? Rames: My name is Rames.

sekretari: baithiye. mai Sri Jonz-ko bataugaSecretary: Please sit down. ki ap yaha hai. I shall tell Mr. Jones that you are here. Ràmés: dhanyavad. Ramei: Thank you. sekretari: Sri Jonz telefon-par bat kar Secretary: Mr. Jones is speaking on the rahe hai. telephone. kya aj> kuch piyége? Will you take something to drink? vah pac minat-me aege. He will come in five minutes. Ràmés: sirf ek glas pani, Rames: Only a glass of water. sekretari: aur kuch nalii? Secretary: Nothing else? Ràmés: nahi. sirf pani. Ramei: No. Just water.

84

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

àj bahut garmi hai.

It is very warm today.

mai kuch thapda pina cahta hu.

I wish to drink something cool.

sekretari: pani lijiye.

Secretary: Please take the water.

Sri Jònz jaldi-hì icge. Ramés:

dhanyavad.

Mr. Jones will be in shortly. Rames:

Thank you.

Lesson 11 11.1 bara janvar bag-ke pas hai. The large animal is near the garden, us-ke pas bara janvar hai. There is a large animal near it. bandar khane-ke pas hai. The monkey is near the food, kua khet-ke pas hai. The well is near the fields. This section illustrates the compound postposition -ke pis near, near-by. 11.1.1 More examples are: dukandar dukan-ke pas hai. The shopkeeper is near the shop, tram mandir-ke pas rukti hai. The trolly stops near the temple, ghar-ke pas kua hai. There is a well near the house, aurat dosto-kc sath kue-ke pas bolt! hai. The woman talks with (her) friends near the well. caprasi daftar-ke pas hai. The orderly is near the office, sarak-ke pas chotl makan hai. There is a small house near the road. Vocabulary Notes: dukandar ( a ) shopkeeper, tram (I) trolley, caprasi ( a ) orderly, attendant. 11.1.2 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. aurat dukandar-ke sath dukan-ke pas bolt! hai. 2. naukar daftar-ke pas thaharta hai. 3. pyasa bail kue-ke pas rukta hai. 4. larka pul-ke pas tairta hai. 5. adml nadi-ke pas bare hathi-ko nahlata hai. 6. chotl larkiya ek-sath ghar-ke pas kheltl hai. 7. sarak-ke pas gahra kua hai. 8. ham ek-sath mandir-ke pas khelna cahte hai. 9. tram pul-ke pas rukti hai. 10. pyasl gay nadi-ke pas thahartl hai. 11.13 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The gardener works near the well. 2. The woman stops near the shop. 3. The little boys play near the temple. 4. The thirsty dog is near the well. 5. There is a holy man near the temple. 6. We (msc.) want to play with (our) friends near the bridge. 7. The little girls want to sleep near (their) mother. 8. The big camel wants to sleep near the tall tree. 9. Mother speaks with (her) friends near the river. 10. The hungry horse wants to stop near the grass. 11.2

larke-ke pas kutta hai. us-ke pas kutta hai. chotl larkiyo-ke p5s naye rumal hai.

The boy has a dog. He has a dog. The little girls have new handkerchiefs.

85

86

H I N D I GRAMMAR AND READER

un-kë pas nayë rûmil haï. They have new handkerchiefs, bùrhë ïdmî-kë pis kitibë haï. The old man has books, us-kë pas kitâbc haï. He has books. This section illustrates the construction with the compound postposition -kë pas, indicating one way of expressing possession in Hindi. (Note that this construction refers to physical possession of non-human beings or things, the ownership of which can be transferred from one person to another.) The noun indicating the English "possessor" is placed in the object form before -kë pis and the being or thing possessed is made the subject of the verb honi is, exist. The -kë pis postpositional phrase occurs in initial position in the sentence. 11.2.1 More examples are: kuttë-kë pas haddl haL The dog has a bone, us-kë pis ch5ti kabutar haL He has a little pigeon, vidyirthï-kë pis nayi kagaz hai. The student has new paper, un-kë pas tizë i m haï. They have fresh mangoes, machuë-kc pis bari jil hai. The fisherman has a big net. strî-kë pis nayï sirï haL The woman has a new sari, chôtë larkë-kë pis bari gëd hai. The little boy has a big ball, sikiri-kë pas choti phandi hai. The hunter has a small snare, mahili-kë pis ban gïrï hai. The lady has a large carriage, adhyipak-kë pis akhbir hai. The teacher has a newspaper. REMARKS: adhyipak means teacher as contrasted with guru (spiritual) teacher. 11.2.2 Vocabulary Notes: adhyipak (a) teacher, i m (5) mango, kabutar (a) pigeon, ged ( â ) ball, jil (à) net, phandi ( â ) snare, mahili (I) lady, rumil (I) handkerchief, vidyirthï (â and I) student, haddï ( ï ) bone, akhbir (â) newspaper. 11.2.3 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. aurat-kë pas rumâl hai. 2. vidyârthî-kë pas dô kitâbë haï. 3. dukândâr-kë pas bahut tâzë âm haï. 4. bëtiyô-kë pas nayï sâriyâ haï. 5. adhyâpak-kë pas chôtâ ghar hai. 6. kisânô-kë pas hal haï. 7. bâbâ-kë pas akhbâr hai. 8. aurat-kë pas nayï handiyà haï. 9. âdmî-kë pas môtargàrî hai. 10. kisân-kë pas dô bail haï. 11.2.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The woman has ten chickens. 2. The child has a new ball. 3. The man has a new automobile. 4. They have a large house. 5. The woman has a cow. 6. The washerman has a donkey. 7. He has a new plow. 8. The girls have many bangles. 9. The shopkeeper has many things. 10. The lady has many saris. 113 admi barë kutumb-kë liyë kàm kartâ hai. The man works for the large family, larki aurtô-kë liyë pânï lâtâ hai. The boy brings water for the women, larki ëk kitâb parhnë-kë liyë kharïdti hai. The boy buys a book to read, baccâ khëlnë-kë liyë bihar jiti hai. The child goes out to play, ïdmï pînë-kë liyë pânï mâgtâ hai. The man asks for water to drink. This section illustrates the compound postposition -kë liyë for, for the benefit of, in order to. REMARKS: The infinitive, when occurring before a postposition, is placed in the object form, i.e., the final -a is replaced by -ë.

LESSON

11.3.1 More examples are: pathik nahinë-kë liyë pini migti hai. aurat pakànë-kë liyë sabziyi kharidtï hai. mâli zamïn khôdnë-kë liyc nayi phauri lati hai.

11

87

The traveller asks for water to bathe. The woman buys vegetables to cook. The gardener brings a new spade to dig the ground. The boy brings water to drink from the big tank. The woman brings out food for the dog. The father buys new toys for the child.

larki barë tâlib-se pinë-kë liyë pani lati hai. aurat kuttc-kë liyë khâni bâhar lati hai. piti baccë-kë liyë nayë khilaunë kharidti haL 11 32 Vocabulary Notes: kutumb (â) family, khilaiini (â) toy, tilib (â) tank, pool, phaurâ ( â ) spade, magni to request, to ask for. 1 1 3 3 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. naukar pathik-kô nahânê-kë liyë pani lâtâ hai. 2. adhyâpâk vidyârthî-kô parhnë-kë liyë kitâb dêtê haï. 3. larkâ mà-kë liyë lakrï kâttâ hai. 4. kisân pyâsë bailô-kë liyë pânï khîctâ hai. 5. m i bëtiyô-kë liyë cùriyâ kharidtï hai. 6. àdmî bêto-kê sâth nahânê-kê liyë tàlâb-kô jâtâ hai. 7. aurat kutumb-kë liyë khânâ pakâtî hai. 8. mahilà bëtiyô-kë sâth sâriyâ kharîdnë-kë liyë bâzâr-kô jâtï hai. 9. bëtï pânï lânë-kë liyë kuë-kô daurtï hai. 10. ham khânê-kë liyë khânâ mâgnâ câhtë haï. 113.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The boys go out to play with (their) friends. 2. The hungry children want to come in to eat. 3. The monkeys want to go into the garden to pluck fruit from the trees. 4. We (fm.) ask for a new book to read. 5. Mother buys a toy for the little boy. 6. The farmer gives the two oxen grass to eat. 7. The washerman throws the clothes in the tank to wash (them). 8. The orderly buys the master a book to read. 9. The man works in the city for (his) family. 10 The woman brings vegetables to cook from the field. 11.4 gill sarak khatarnak hai. bhayanak bagh jangal-me rahte haL ma beti-ke liye lal jute kharidti haL

The wet road is dangerous. The dreadful tiger lives in the jungle. The mother buys red shoes for (her) daughter. aurat patx-ko saf kamiz detl haL The woman gives (her) husband a clean shirt. safed gay per-ke nice sotl haL The white cow sleeps under the tree. gol mez kone-me rakhiye. (Please) place the round table in the corner. nahane-ke liye garm pan! laiye. (Please) bring warm water for bathing. mazbut ghora sukhl ghas-ko khata haL The strong horse eats the dry grass. sundar larki kapre kharidne-ke liye The beautiful girl goes to the bazaar to buy bazar-ko jati haL clothes. amir admi-ke pas motargaii haL The rich man has an automobile. This section is concerned with adjectives ending in consonants. All adjectives ending in consonants and some ending in vowels (See 1.4.1 following) do not change their form for gender, number, subject, or object. REMARKS: ( 1 ) gila wet, agrees in gender, number, and form with the noun it modifies. (See 3.2.)

88

HINDI G R A M M A R AND READER

( 2 ) Vocabulary Notes: kamiz (I) shirt, kona ( a ) corner, bagh ( a ) tiger. 11.4.1 handiya khali haL The cooking-pot is empty, dusta cor gay-ko curata haL The wicked thief steals the cow. baccc anya bacco-ke sath khelte hai. The children play with the other children, mi nidrilu bacce-ko palang-par rakhti haL The mother places the sleepy child on the bed. larka bhari kath lata hai. The boy carries the heavy wood, dayalu pita sukhi bacce-ko ck khilauna The kind father gives the happy child a toy. dete hai. ma rogi larke-ko khana pakati hai. The mother cooks food for the sick boy. dukhl larka nadi-ke pas rota hai. The sad boy weeps beside the river, dhani dukandar mithe phal becta haL The rich shopkeeper sells sweet fruits, parisrami vidyarthi pratidin parhta haL The industrious student studies daily. This section illustrates adjectives ending in vowels which do not change for gender and number. (See 11.4, above.) Note in the seventh sentence, above, the use of -ko approximating the function of -ke liye for, for the benefit of. REMARKS: mitha sweet is an adjective of the type described in 3.2. 11.4.2 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. kua mitha hai. 2. mazbut kisan chote gadhe-ko khlcta hai. 3. sukhi aurat patl- ke samne khana rakhti hai. 4. sikarl bhayanak janvar-ko marta hai. 5. pita sundar betl-ke liye lal sari kharldte hai. 6. bahan rogi bacce-ko palafig-par rakhti hai. 7. nidralu naukar kone-me sota hai. 8. larka aurto-ke liye bhari kath lata hai. 9. dhani admi dukhl larke-ko khana deta hai. 10. mal garm pan! magta hu. 11. sundar lark! saf kamiz latl hai. 12. aurat safed gay-ko per-ke nice badhtl hai. 13. kone-me gol mez hai. 14. dayalu aurat bhukhe bail-ko ghas khilatl hai. 15. amir adml-ke pas bahut makan hai. 11.4.3 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: I. The farmer wants to kill the dreadful tiger. 2. The happy girl buys a red sari. 3. The mother wants to feed the red chicken. 4. The white cow is in the garden. 5. (Please) bring out that round table. 6. There is warm water in the cooking-pot. 7. The friend ( f m . ) brings food to the sick woman. 8. The sad girl weeps beside the deep well. 9. The boys point out the wicked thief. 10. The washerman brings clean clothes. II. The woman puts the heavy wood on (her) head. 12. The little man walks behind the strong donkey. 13. There is a white horse near the river. 14. The kind woman gives the hungry man food. 15. The rich man has many friends. kya kya kya kya kya

11.5 larka calta hai? billiya khatl hai? admi larke-ko dekhta hai? aurte sabziyo-ko dekhtl hai? ap burhe admi-ko dekhte hai?

Does the boy walk? Do the cats eat? Does the man see the boy? Do the women see the vegetables? Do you see the old man?

Sections 11.5 to 11.5.4 illustrate the formation of questions. Any one of the sentences given in the lessons preceding can be made into a question by placing the particle kya at the beginning of it.

LESSON

11

89

11..5.1 âdmï môtâ hai? Is the man fat? âdmï môtê haï? Are the men fat? aurat bhùkhï hai? Is the woman hungry? Are the women hungry? aurte bhûkhl haï? yah pêr barâ hai? Is this tree big? Are these trees big? yë për bare haï? vah kuttâ buri hai? Is that dog bad? vë kuttë burë haï? Are those dogs bad? 11.5.2. kyâ larkâ bôlni câhtâ hai? Does the boy want to speak? kyâ larkë bôlnâ câhtë haï? Do the boys want to speak ? kyâ aurat pakânâ câhtï haï? Does the woman want to cook? kyi aurtë pakânâ câhtï haï? Do the women want to cook? kyâ vah parhnâ câhtï hai? Does she want to read? kyà vë parhnâ câhtï haï? Do they want to read? 11.5.3. Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. kyà bilil us chôtï cuhiyâ-kô pakartï hai? 2. kyâ bhûkhë bandar un phalô-kô curânâ câhtë haï? 3. kyâ vë chôtë baccë bhûkhë haï? 4. kyâ vë aurte baccô-kô nahlânâ câhtï haï? 5. kyâ aurat in sabziyô-kô pakâtî hai? 6. kyâ yah chôtâ ghôrâ pïnâ câhtâ hai? 7. kyâ aurat pyâsï gây-kô pilânâ câhtï hai? 8. kyâ acchï aurat chôtë baccô-kô zyâdâ khilâtî hai? 9. kyâ gussïlï billï aurat-kô vaha kàttï hai? 10. kyâ kisân bailô-kô bâdhtâ hai? 11. kyâ tum larkiyô-kô andar bulâtï hô? 12. kyâ pitâ baccô-kô kabhï kabhï samajhtë haï? 13. kyâ naukar mujhë samajhtâ haï? 14. kyâ handiyâ acchï haï? 15. kyâ ghôrâ barâ hai? 16. kyâ zamïn-më kôëlâ hai? 17. kyâ jaflgalô-më jânvar haï? 18. kyâ chôtë larkë gahrï nadï-më tairnâ câhtë haï? 19. kyâ dhôbï âdmï-kô kaprë bhcjtâ hai? 20. kyâ mâlï paudhë-par pânï dâltâ hai? 21. kyâ kisân hal-së khët jôttâ hai? 22. kyà ghar-kë pïchë bag hai? 23. kyâ kisân për-kë nïcë àrâm kartâ hai? 24. kyâ larkâ aurtô-kë sâth bôltâ hai? 25. kyâ Sikârï bhayânak jânvar-kô mârtâ hai? kyâ kyâ kyâ kyâ kyâ kyâ kyâ kyâ

11.5.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. Are the girls happy? 2. Are the vegetables good? 3. Are the places small? 4. Do the thirsty horses want to drink? 5. Does the man work inside? 6. Do the little children want to go out? 7. Does the boy obey him? 8. Does the teacher make the boy read? 9. Does the fisherman want to catch fish? 10. Does the mother feed the daughters too much 11. Does the man want to bathe the elephant? 12. Does the monkey eat the fruit there? 13. Does the woman want to buy things in the shop? 14. Does the mare eat the raw vegetables quickly? 15. Does this thirsty ox want to stop sometimes? 16. Does the dog pull this child out? 17. Is this building high? 18. Is this the high building? 19. Are there stars in the sky? 20. Are there fish in the deep sea? 21. Does the mother tell the children stories? 22. Does the gardener pour water on the plants? 23. Does the fisherman catch fish near the bridge? 24. Is there a jungle behind the city? 25. Do the hungry children want to come in to eat? 11.6 Sri Jônz aur Râmês-kï bâtrït Râmës: namastë. Sri Jônz: namastë. Sri Jônz: kyâ âp Ravï-kâ bhai haï?

Conversation between Mr. Jones and Râmës. Râmës: Hello. Mr. Jones: Hello. Mr. Jones: Are you RavTs brother?

90

Rames:

Sri Jonz:

Rames:

Sri Jonz:

RameS: Sri Jonz:

Rames: Sri Jonz: Rames: Sri Jonz: Rames: Sri Jonz: Rames: Sri Jonz: Rame£: Sri Jonz: RameS: Sri Jonz: RameS: Sri Jonz: Rames: Sri Jonz:

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

}I ha. mal Ravi-ka bhal hu? unho-ne mujhe ap-ke pas bheja hai mai Hindi slkhna cahta hu. kya ap men madad kar sakte hai? ji ha. mere bhai-ne ap-ke bareme batrit ki. ap kya cahte hai? mai Hindi-me bat karna slkhna cahta hu. mai-ne thori Hindi Amerikame parhi haL lekin men Hindi acchi nahi. ap-ki Hindi to bahut acchi hai. jab 15g jaldi jaldi bat karte hai, tab mai acchi tarah nahi samajh sakta. kya mai bahut jaldi jaldi bol rahi hu? ji ha. thora dhire dhire boliye. kya ap ab mujhe acchi tarah sakte hai? ji ha. mai ab ap-ko samajh sakta hu. ab ham'log kya bat kare? pahile, mai kuch sabd slkhna cahta hu. puchiye. ap Hindi-me "house"-ko kya kahte hai? ham Hindi-me "house"-ko "ghar" kahte hai. ap Hindi-me "room"-ko kya kahte hai? ham Hindi-me "room"-ko "kamra" kahte hai. ap Hindi-me "water"-ko kya kahte hai? ham Hindi-me "water"-ko "pani" kahte hai. ap Hindi-me "to the left"-k5 kya kahte hai? ham "bayT taraf" kahte hai. "straight ahead"-ko kya kahte hai?

Rames:

Yes. I am Ravi's brother, He sent me to you.

Mr. Jones: I wish to learn Hindi, Can you help me? Rames:

Yes. My brother told me about you. What do you wish? Mr. Jones: I wish to learn to speak in Hindi. I have studied some Hindi in America. But my Hindi is not good. Rames: Your Hindi is very good. Mr. Jones: I cannot understand too well when people talk too fast Rames:

Am I talking too fast?

Mr. Jones: Yes. Please speak more slowly. Rames: Can you understand me better now? Mr. Jones: Yes. I can understand you now. Rames: What shall we talk about now? Mr. Jones: First, I wish to learn some words, Ramei: Please ask. Mr. Jones: How do you say "house" in in Hindi? RameS: We say "ghar" for "house" in Hindi. Mr. Jones: How do you say "room" in Hindi? Ramel: We say "kamra" for "room" in Hindi. Mr. Jones: How do you say "water" in Hindi? Rames: We say "panl" for "water" in Hindi. Mr. Jones: How do you say "to the left" in Hindi? Rames: We say "bayT taraf." Mr. Jones: How do you say "straight ahead"?

LESSON 1 1

Rames: Sri Jonz: Rames: Sri Jonz: Rames: Sri Jonz:

Rames: Sri Jonz: Rames: Sri Jonz: Ramei: Sri Jonz: Ramei:

"straight ahead"-ko "sidhe age ko" kahte hal. "what time is it"-ko kaise kahiege? "what time is it"-ke liye ham "kitne baje hal" kahege. ab ham'log koi aur bat karege. ham 'log kya bat kare? mujhe Bharat-me bahut dilcaspi hai. us-ke bare-me kuch bat kare. khusi-se. mal ap-se bat karna pasand karta hu. bahut bahut dhanyavad. mal ap-se roz thori der-ke liye milna cahta hu. agar mujhe kafi paise mile, to mal khufi-se aoga. kya Ip roz ek ghante-ke liye a sakte hai? subah ya dopahar-ke bad?

Sri Jonz: ap-ke liye kaun vakt thlk rahega? Ramei: dopahar-ke bad accha hoga. Sri Jonz: ip-ko dopahar kyo pasand hai? Ramei:

kyo-ki mal subah kalej jita hu.

Sri Jonz: tab to dopahar thik hogL kya ek ghante-ke liye tin rupaye kafi hoge? Ramei: fin rupaye thik hoge. Sri Jonz: kya ap kal a sakege? Rames:

jl ha, mal kal i sakuga.

Sri Jonz: car baje? Ramei: thik car baje. bahut accha. mal kal auga. Sri Jonz: namaste. Rames: namaste.

91

Rames:

For "straight ahead" we say "sidhe age-ko." Mr. Jones: How will you say "what time is it"? Rames: For "what time is it" we'll say "kitne baje hai." Mr. Jones: Now we will talk about something else. Rames: What should we talk about? Mr. Jones: I am very interested in India, Let us chat about it. Ramei: With pleasure. Mr. Jones: I like to talk with you. Ramei: Thank you very much. Mr. Jones: I wish to meet you (or a little while every day. Ramel: If I get enough money, Fll come gladly. Mr. Jones: Can you come every day for one hour? Rame$: In the morning or in the afternoon? Mr. Jones: Which time will be better for you? Ramei: The afternoon will be better. Mr. Jones: Why do you prefer the afternoon? Ramei: Because I go to college in the morning. Mr. Jones: Then the afternoon will be all right Will three rupees for each hour's work be enough? Ramei: Three rupees will be fine. Mr. Jcnes: Will you be able to come tomorrow? Ramei: Yes. I will be able to come tomorrow. Mr. Jones: At four o'clock? Ramei: Precisely at four, Very good, Fll come tomorrow. Mr. Jones: Good-by. Ramei: Good-by.

Lesson 12 12.1 ^ Where does the man live? Sdmi kaha rahtà hai? Where does the child play? bacca kaha khclta hai? Where is the big river? bari nadl kaha hai? Where does the man come from? i d m i kaha-sc Ita hai? Where does the dog run from? kutta kaha^se daurta hai? Where do the children walk from? bacce kaha-sc calti hai? This section and the following, 12.1 to 12.1.4. are concerned with interrogative adverbs. (See 4.4 and notes.) 12.1.1 larka Hindi kyo bolta hai? kutta bhukha kyo hai? i d m l sahar-ko kyo jata hai? adhyapak kahani kyo parhta hai? nadi cauri kyo hai? ghoia pyasa kyo hai?

12.12

Why Why Why Why Why Why

does the boy speak Hindi? is the dog hungry? does the man go to the city? does the teacher read the story? is the river broad? is the horse thirsty?

When does the lion always stay in the jungle? gari kab jati hai? When does the train leave? When does the train return? gaii kab vapas atl hai? When does the bus return from the city? motarbas sahar-se kab vlpas ati hai? 12.13 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. ve kaha-se ate hat? 2. bacce anya bacco-ke sath kab khelte hai? 3. ma betl-ke liye lal jute kyo kharidtl hai? 4. bura larka bahan-par panl kyo dalta hai? 5. sikari bhayanak janvar-ko kab marta hai? 6. kisan chari-se bandaro-ko kyo marna cahta hai? 7. adhyapak vidyarthl-ko parhne-ke liye kitab kyo dete hai? 8. bandar pakke phalo-ko kaha-se curate hai? 9. aurat paudho-par pan! kab daltt hai? 10. pathik sahar-se kab ata hai? 11. koela kaha hai? 12. pathik kyo panl magta hai? 13. dhobi adml-ko kapre kab bhejta hai? 14. akhbar kaha hai? 15. bail kue-ke pas kyo rukta hai? 16. naukar kaha thale rakhta hai? 17. dhobi kaha-se kapre lata hai? 18. mazbut kisan chote gadhe-ko kyo khfcta hai? 19. naukar malik-ko thanda panl kab lata hai? 20. bhayanak bagh kaha rahta hai? scr hamesa jangal-me kab rahta hai?

92

LESSON 12

93

12.1.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. When does the man work? 2. Why is the boy hungry? 3. When do animals come from the jungle? 4. From where do the boys bring wood for (their) mother? 5. Where does the woman want to cook? 6. Why does the man bring water for the automobile? 7. When does the fisherman catch fish? 8. Why do you (msc.) want to study? 9. Where does the trolley stop? 10. Why does the ox stop under the tree? 11. When does mother cook? 12. Why does the woman weep near the river? 13. Where does the washerman wash the clothes? 14. Why does the train stop? 15. When does the holy man sit under the tree 16. When does the cow want to eat grass? 17. From where does the animal come? 18. Why does father come back from the city? 19. When does the kind woman give holy men food? 20. From where does the servant bring water for the traveller? 12 2 larki Hindi bol sakti hai. larke Hindi bol sakte hai. larki Angrezi samajh saktl hai. larkiya Angrezi samajh saktl hai. aurat paki saktl hai. bete dekh sakte hai. ve parh sakte hai. larki si sakti hai. bacce g i sakte hai. choti larkiyi ek-sith ghar-ke p i s khel takti hai. larka bhari kith la sakti hai. kyi dhobi idmi-ko kapre bhej sakti hai?

The boy can speak Hindi, The boys can speak Hindi, The girl can understand English, The girls can understand English, The woman can cook, The sons can see. They can read, The girl can sew. The boys can sing. The litde girls can play together near the house, The boy can carry the heavy wood, Can the washerman send the clothes to the man? When can the hunter kill the dreadful tiger?

sikiri bhayanak bigh-ko kab mar sakti hai? naukar kaha thale rakh sakta hai? Where can the servant place the plates? This section introduces the Hindi construction which corresponds to the English construction comprising the verb can or to be able to followed by another verb. T h e Hindi construction consists of the verb sakni can, to be able to, immediately preceded by the stem of the verb translating the second verb of the English phrase. This sequence consisting of verbal stem + sakni can be considered to function as a single verb (See 2.1, Remarks). N o other forms can intrude between the verbal stem and the form of sakni. 12.2.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. kya adml bare kutumb-ke liye kam kar sakta hai? 2. aurat pakane-ke liye sabziya kharid sakti hai. 3. larka ma-ke liye lakrl kat sakta hai. 4. kya pathik adml-ke sath Hindi bol sakta hai? 5. ham admi-ko nadl bata sakte hai. 6. mail paudho-par pan! dal sakta hai. 7. machua nadi-se machliya pakar sakta hai. 8. kisan hal-se khet jot sakta hai. 9. larki handiya-ko jaldi-se la saktl hai. 10. kangar motargarl-ke nice kam kar sakta hai. 12.2.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. Where can the washerman wash clothes? 2. When can the boy bring wood for the woman? 3. Can the fisherman catch fish to sell in the bazaar? 4. The boys can point

94

HINDI G R A M M A R AND READER

out the wicked thief. 5. The kind woman can give the hungry man food. 6. The happy girl can buy a new red sari. 7. We (msc.) are able to read Hindi. 8. The girls can go out to play with (their) friends. 9. The woman can buy vegetables to cook from the man. 10. The boy can swim under the bridge. 123 larka nahi calta. The boy does not walk, larke nahT calte. The boys do not walk, bete nalu khate. The son does not eat. bete nahi khate. The sons do not eat. larki nahi samajhti. The girl does not understand. Iarkiya nalu samajhti. The girls do not understand, beti nahi pakati. The daughter does not cook, betiya nahi pakati. The daughters do not cook. This section and the following illustrate the negative of the verbal constructions given in the preceding lessons. Section 123 illustrates the formation of the negative of the present tense of the Hindi verb. The particle nahi is placed directly before the present particle, the verb bona to be, to exist not being expressed. The participle agrees in gender and number with the subject of the sentence. (Compare 2.1 and remarks.) Note that the final vowel of the feminine of the participle is nasalized in the plural. (See the sixth and eighth sentences, above.) 12.3.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. mai nahi khata. 2. ve nah7 kudtl. 3. turn nahT samajhtT. 4. ham nahi pite. 5. ap nahi parhte. 6. mat nahT kahta. 7. ham nahi tairtT. 8. vah nahi khelti. 9. turn nahi bolte. 10. ap nahT daurti. 11. kutta nahT pita. 12. bachre nahT khate. 13. bacca nahT daurta. 14. patniya nahT latT. 15. murgi nahi khati. 16. bhal nahi deta. 17. hath! nahT nahate. 18. fauj nahT daurti. 19. gay nahi khatl. 20. ciriya nahT urtl. 123.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. We (msc.) do not eat. 2. You (msc.) do not play. 3. He does not run. 4. You (hon. msc.) do not understand. 5. I (fm.) do not go. 6. You (hon. msc.) do not cook. 7. She does not dig. 8. They (msc.) do not speak. 9. They (fm.) do not see. 10. I (msc.) do not read. 11. The man does not walk. 12. The boys do not play. 13. The cat does not drink. 14. The girls do not talk. 15. The (little) old women do not sleep. 16. The women do not speak. 17. The men do not see. 18. The wife does not understand. 19. The daughters do not sleep. 20. The child does not eat. 12.4 larka bolna nahi cahta. The boy does not want to speak, larki calna nahi cahti. The girl does not want to walk, adm! dena nahi cahte. The men do not want to give, ham lena nahT cahte. We do not want to take, aurte kharidna nahi cahti. The women do not want to buy. This section illustrates the negative of the cahna construction. The particle nalu is normally placed between the infinitive and the present participle. (See 3.1 and remarks.) 12.4.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. vah khana nahi cahta. 2. larke bhejna nahi cahte. 3. ghori pina nahi cahti. 4. mai

LESSON 1 2

95

jana nahT cahtl. 5. tote bolna nahl cahte. 6. ve khana nahi cahti. 7. patnl pakana nahl cahtl. 8. ham parhna nahT cahte. 9. machliya khana nahl cahtl. 10. turn bhejna nahl cahte.

12.4.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The children do not want to play. 2. We (msc.) do not want to read. 3. The girls do not want to speak. 4. The dog does not want to eat. 5. The woman does not want to cook. 6. I (fm.) do not want to play. 7. The man does not want to dig. 8. The father does not want to hear. 9. She does not want to speak. 10. You (msc.) do not want to give. 12.5 larka acchl nabi (hai). The boy is not good, larke acche nalu (hai). The boys are not good, larki bhukhi nahi (hai). The girl is not hungry, larkiya bhukhi nahT (hai). The girls are not hungry, ghora pyasa nahl. The horse is not thirsty, pan! garm nahi. The water is not warm, saman halka nahi. The baggage is not light, gafi tang nahi. The street is not narrow, javab folic nahi. The answer is not exact, saval muskil nalu. The question is not difficult. This section illustrates the negative of the predicate-adjective construction taken up in section 3.2 (See remarks). Note that here the verb hona to be, to exist may be expressed with nalu placed directly before it; otherwise nahi is final in the utterance. Vocabulary Notes: gali (i) street, lane, javSb (a) answer, taman (a) baggage. 12.5.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. vah bhukhi nahT. 2. betiyi acchl nahT. 3. juta chota nahT. 4. mal burha nahT. 5. ghora bara nahT. 6. bill! burl nahi. 7. turn bare nahT. 8. lomrl jhuthi nalu. 9. bacce pyase nalu! 10. ap pyasl nahT.

12.52 Exercise 2. Trasnlate into Hindi: 1. The horses are not old. 2. I (msc.) am not lean. 3. The fish are not small. 4. They (fm.) are not thirsty. 5. The donkeys arc not bad. 6. She is not thirsty. 7. The girl is not happy. 8. The flies are not small. 9. The daughters are not hungry. 10. I (msc) am not sleepy. 12.6 idmi bahar nahi jate. The men do not go out. patni fauran nahi jati. The wife does not leave immediately, larka bahut kam nalu karta. The boy does not work very much, ghora pas-se nahi jata. The horse does not go by. ve vaha nahi daurte. They do not run there. This section illustrates the negative of the construction taken up in section 4.4 Note that the negative particle nahi is placed directly before the present participle— no other word should intervene between nam and the participle. 12.6.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. ham yaha nahl rahte. 2. aurat dhlre dhlre nahT boltl. 3. turn bahar naKT jate. 4. aurte

96

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

andar nahl pakatl. 5. hathl bahut zyada nahl khata. 6. chota bacca piche nahl ata. 7. bhukhl ghorl thaharna nahl cahti. 8. dubll aurte fauran khana nahl cahtl. 9. bara adml jaldl-se khana nahf cahta. 10. chote bacce bahar jana nahl cahte. 12.6.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The brothers do not eat together. 2. The woman does not come in. 3. T h e boys do not speak slowly. 4. The cows are not very happy. 5. The good girls do not go outside. 6. The hungry women do not eat slowly. 7. They (£m.) do not want to come here. 8. The big boys do not want to play inside. 9. 1 (fm.) do not want to play sometimes. 10. The thirsty mare does not want to drink slowly. At the Bazaar. 12.7 bâzâr-mc. Shopkeeper: What do you wish, madam? dukândâr: bahan-jï, âp kyâ cihtï haï? bahan-jl: mal sirï kharïdnâ câhtï hû. Lady: I wish to buy a sari. dukândâr: bahut acchâ, bahan-jï. Shopkeeper: Very good, madam.

bahan-jî :

hamàrë pis sab tarah-kï siriya haï. kyâ tumhirë pis banârsî siriyi haï?

W e have all kinds of saris. Lady:

Do you have saris from Banarast

dukândâr: ji hâ. hamârê pis bahut khubsûrat banârsî sâriyi haï. bahan-jï: mujhë dikhiiyë. dukândâr: bahut acchâ, bahan-ji. bahan-jî: mujhë yë tin sâriyi pasand haï.

Shopkeeper: Yes. W e have many beautiful saris from Banaras. Please show (them) to me. Lady: Shopkeeper: Very well, madam. Lady: I like these three saris.

in-kë dam kyi haï? dukândâr: lâl sirï cha sau rupayê-ki hai. mil pic sau-kï hai, aur harî car sau-kl. bahan-jl: yë tô bahut mahâgî haï. kyi ip-kë pis kôï sasti-bhi hai?

What is their price? Shopkeeper: The red sari is 600 rupees. The blue is 500, and the green 400.

dukândâr: bahan-ji. banârsî siriyi tô mahagï hôti haï. sâyad ip marithï sâri pasand karë. un-kë dam itnë zyâdâ nahl hôte. bahan-jî: ji nahl. mërï sab dôstô-kë pâs marithï sâriya haï. mal kôi nayï tarah-kï câhtî hû. dukândâr: kyâ mal kôi aur cïz dikhlâu? bahan-jï:

nahï. âj nahl. namastë. dukândâr: namastë.

Lady:

They are very expensive. Do you have something cheaper? Shopkeeper: Madam. Banaras saris are expensive. Perhaps you may like a Maharashtrian sari. They do not cost so much. Lady:

No. All my friends have Maharashtrian saris. I wish to have something new. Shopkeeper: Can I show you something else? Lady:

No. Not today. Good by. Shopkeeper: Good-by.

LESSON

12.8 Usa aur Lïlâvatï bâtcït Usa : ñamaste. Lïlâvatï: ñamaste. Usa: mai tum-së bahut dinô-së nahl milï. turn âj'kal kaha rahtî hô? Lîlâvati: mal âj'kal Dillï-mè rahtï hû. Usa: Nayï Dillï-më yâ Purânï Dillï-më? Lîlâvati: Nayï Dillî-më. Usa: Nayï Dilli to bahut acchà sahar hôgâ. Lîlâvati: ha. Nayï Dilli bahut acchâ sahar hai. Usa: kyl vaha bahut nayï nayï imarte haï? Lîlâvati: hi. vahâ bahut-së sarkârï daftar haï aur kaï nayï hôtal—bhï haï. Usa: Lîlâvati:

Usa: Lîlâvati: Usa: Lîlâvati: Uiâ: Lîlâvati: Lîlâvati: Lîlâvati: Usa:

tab tô êk jagah-së dûsrï jagah jânë-më bahut taklïf hôti hôgï. nahï. bahut taklïf nahl hôfi. vaha-par tarah tarah-kï savâriyà haï. 15g ëk jagah-së dûsrï jagah kaisë jitë haï? kuch log taiksî-së jitë haï. taiksïya to bahut mahâgï hôgï. kuch log paidal jitë haï. kyi kôï sâikilo-së -bhï jitë haï? zyiditar sarkârï daftaro-kë log aur vidyirthi saikilo-së jâtë haï. tumhârë patì daftar kaisë jatë haï? vë apnï môtar-së jitë haï. un-kï naukarï tô bahut acchï hôgï.

Lïlâvatï: jï hi. ham'lôg mazê-mê haï. Usa: jab-bhï hô sakê, mërë ghar iô. Lîlâvati: acchï b i t kabhï âûgï. Usa: ñamaste. Lïlâvatï: namastë.

97

12

Conversation between Usa and Lilàvati Usa: Hello. Lilàvati: Hello. Usa: I have not seen you for a long time. Where do you live now? Lilàvati: I live in Delhi now. Usa: In New Delhi or in Old Delhi? Lilàvati: In New Delhi. USa:

New Delhi must be a modern city.

Lilàvati: Yes, New Delhi is a modern city. Ulà:

Does it have many new buildings?

Lilàvati: Yes. It has very many new government offices and several new hotels. USa: It must be difficult to go from one place to another. Lilàvati: No, it is not very difficult There are different kinds of transportation. Ulà: How do people go from one place to another? Lilàvati: Some people ride in taxis. Usa: Taxis must be expensive. Lilàvati: Some people go on foot U£a: Do any ride bicycles? Lilàvati: Mostly government office people and students ride bicycles. Usà: How does your husband go to (his) office? Lilàvati: He drives in his car. Usà: His business must be very good, then. Lilàvati: Yes. We are comfortable. Usà: Please come to see me when you can. Lilàvati: Very welL Til come sometime. Usà: Good-by. Lilàvati: Good-by.

Lesson 13 13.1 admi mujhe nahi dekhta. mal larke-ko n a i l dekhta. vah lambc admi-kS nalu dekhta.

T h e man does not see me. I do not sec the boy. H e does not see the tall man.

m a l is bure kutte-ko nalu marta. admi kamrc-me nahi ( h a i ) . sahar-me koi u a imartie nahi. larka aurto-ko lakri nahi deta. kitabe mezo-par n a h i gurii-ji un-se saval nahi puchte.

I do not beat this bad dog. T h e man is not in the room, There are no high buildings in the city, T h e boy does not give wood to the women, T h e books are not on the tables, T h e (spiritual) teacher does not ask them questions. T h i s section is concerned with the negative of sentences illustrating the object forms of nouns and pronouns. (See 5.1 to 5.6, 6.1 to 6.3, 9.1 to 9.4, and 10.1 to 10.4.) 13.1.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. admi un-ko nahi dekhta. 2. aurte us-ko nahi suntl. 3. mae ham-ko nahi bulatl. 4. gadha larki-ko nahi khicta. 5. ma; ghoro-ko khilana nahi cahta. 6. gay bachro-ko jaldl-se nahi khilati. 7. bacca billi-ko nahT pakarta. 8. ham machliya nahi kharidtT. 9. mal khana nahi latl. 10. chotl aurat murgiya nahi khilatT. 11. bill! machli-ko dhlre nahi khatl. 12. bhukha kutta bail-kd nahT katta. 13. burha kisan gayo-ko yaha badhna naH? cahta. 14. bandar pakke phal khana nahT cahte. 15. ve puranl tasvlr yaha nahi kharidtl. 16. bahan in bhukhe larko-ko andar bulana nahT cahti. 17. vah ag-me kath nahT dalta. 18. ham $ahar-me kam nahi karte 19. naukar pathik-ko sarak nahi batata. 20. aurat divaro-par tasvire nahi latkatl. 13.1.2 Exercise 2. Translate into H i n d i : 1. We (msc.) do not feed the hungry dog. 2. T h e monkey does not eat the ripe fruits. 3. T h e old farmer does not drive the big horses. 4. Mother does not want to call the hungry children here. 5. T h e good woman does not feed the little boys too much. 6. T h e happy man does not want to catch fish. 7. T h e farmer does not dig in the ground. 8. T h e woman does not want to cook vegetables in the new cooking-pot. 9. T h e men do not point out the tiger to the hunter. 10. T h e servant does not hang the pictures on the wall. 11. T h e hungry dog does not steal food from the big child. 12. T h e gardener does not work behind the house. 13. T h e fisherman does not want to catch fish under

98

LESSON 13

99

the bridge. 14. The servant does not go to the bazaar with the woman. 15. The holy man does not sit in front of the house. 16. There isn't a well near the house. 17. T h e washerman does not have a donkey. 18. The man does not work in the city for (his) family. 19. The farmer does not have a plow. 10. The children are not in front of the house. 13.2 kya larka nahl calta? Doesn't the boy walk? kya aurte sabziyo-ko nahi pakati? Don't the women cook the vegetables? kya pani thanda nalu? Isn't the water cold? kya nadi gahri nahi? Isn't the river deep? kya aurat pakana nahi cahti? Doesn't the woman want to cook? This section illustrates the negative of the interrogative sentences taken up in 115. 13.2.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. kya yah chota ghdra plna nahi cahta? 2. kya billi us cuhiya-ko nahi pakarti? 3. kya kisan bailo-ko naKT badhta? 4. kya pita bacco-ko kabhl nahT samajhte? 5. kya likari bhayanak janvar-ko nahT marta? 6. kya ghar-ke piche bag natif? 7. kya kisan hal-se khet nah? jotta? 8. kya dhobi admi-kd kapre nahi bhejta? 9. kya jaftgal-me janvar nahi? 10. kya aurat ye sabziya nahi pakati? 13.2.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. Aren't the vegetables good? 2. Doesn't the man work inside? 3. Aren't there fish in the river? 4. Doesn't the horse want to drink? 5. Aren't there stars in the sky? 6. Doesn't the mother tell the children stories? 7. Doesn't the woman want to buy things in the bazaar? 8. Doesn't the fisherman bring fish from the river? 9. Isn't there a book on the table? 10. Isn't the child hungry? 133 larka Hindi kyo nahi bolta? Why doesn't the boy speak Hindi? g i n vapas kyo nahi ati? Why doesn't the train return? kutta bhukha kyo nahi? Why isn't the dog hungry? This section illustrates the negative of sentences containing interrogative adverbs. (See 12.1 to 12.1.2.) 133.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. bacca anya bacco-ke sath kab nahT khelta? 2. pathik pani kyo nahi magta? 3. pita bacco-ko kab nalu cumte? 4. mall paudho-par pani kyo naKT dalta? 5. sikari bhayanak janvar-ko ky5 nahi marta? 6. bandar pakke phal kaha-se nahT curata? 7. kisan khet-se kyo nahi ata? 8. kutta kab nahT sota? 9. dhobl adml-ke liye kapre kyo naKf dhota? 10. adhyapak vidyarthi-ko parhne-ke liye kitab kab naKT dete? 13.3J Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. Why doesn't the man bring water for the automobile? 2. When isn't a child hungry? 3. Where doesn't a bullock sleep? 4. When doesn't a kind woman give a holy man food? 5. Why doesn't the washerman bring the clothes? 6. When doesn't the camel stop to eat grass? 7. Why doesn't the train stop? 8. Why doesn't the boy come back from the well? 9. Why aren't the children in the house? 10. Why isn't the cow near the tree? 13.4 adml Hindi nahi bol sakte. The men cannot speak Hindi, larki Angrezi nahi samajh sakti. The girl cannot understand English.

100

ham nahi sun saktë.

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

W e cannot hear,

bacca nahi sikh saktâ. T h e child cannot learn. This section illustrates the negative of sentences containing the construction with the verb sakni (See 12.2.) R E M A R K S : T h e phrase comprising the stem of the verb + sakni functions as a unit. T h e particle nahi is placed directly before it (i.e., before the verb-stem). It does not intrude between the stem and sakni. 13.4.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. larkä bhäri kâth natif là saktâ. 2. kyâ dhôbi âdmi-kô kaprë nahi bhëj saktâ? 3. sikârï bhayânak jânvar-kô kyo nahT mär saktâ? 4. naukar aurat-kê liyê lakrï nahî kât saktâ. 5. mâlï paudho-par pânl nahî dâl saktâ? 6. kârïgar môtargârî-kë nice kâm nahî kar saktâ? 7. machuâ nadî-së machliya nahî pakar saktâ. 8. kyâ aurat Hindi nahi bol saktl? 9. bandar pakkê phal nahî pakar saktâ. 10. aurat divârô-par tasvirê nahî latkâ saktï. 13.4.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e woman can't cook food for the family. 2. T h e fisherman can't bring fish to the city. 3. The man can't bring water for the automobile. 4. Why can't you (msc.) point out the road to the traveller? 5. The farmer can't till the field with the little plow. 6. I (£m.) cannot go to the bazaar with you (hon.). 7. T h e mother cannot tell the children stories. 8. T h e woman cannot take the clothes to the tank to wash (them). 9. T h e thief cannot steal the calf. 10. Why can't the washerman wash the clothes for the man? 13.5 mërâ makin tâlâb-kë päs haL My house is near the tank, mërë kaprë nayë haï. My clothes are new. mëri tôpi mëz-par haL My hat is on the table, men imirte sahar-me hal. My buildings are in the city. Sections 13.5 to 13.5.3 present the possessive adjectives of the first and second person pronouns, mëri is the possessive adjective of mai; hamirä that of ham; and tumhari that of tum. These adjectives function in the same way as the adjectives described in 3.2, 4 3 , and 6.1, agreeing with the nouns they modify in gender, number and form. The possessive constructions involving vah and i p follow. (See 14.1.) 13.5.1 hamiri bail nadi-kë pis carta hai. Our ox grazes by the river, hamire bail nadî-së pini pîtë hai. Our oxen drink water from the river, hamari bahan acchi nahi. Our sister is not good, hamiri bahnë ghar-me nahT Our sisters are not at home. 13.5.2 tumhirî bailgirï pul-kë nïcë hai. Your oxcart is under the bridge, tumhirë b h £ Hindi acchi nahi böl saktë. Your brothers cannot speak Hindi well. 13.53 More examples are: mërë bat lambë hai. My hair is long, tum h ara git bahut mithi hai. Your song is very sweet, yë mërë bail hai. These are my oxen, vah aurat hamiri ma hai. That woman is our mother, vah topi tumhari haL That hat is yours.

LESSON

môtargiri hamiri hai. yah chiti mëri hai. ghôri tumhiri nahî. ml mcri bahnô-ko bulitï haL acchï aurat tumhiri pyâsï gây-kô pilâtî hai.

13

101

The automobile is ours. This umbrella is mine. The horse is not yours. Mother calls my sisters. The good woman makes your thirsty cow drink. The hungry monkeys eat our fruit. The woman wants to buy my vegetables. Your baggage is not light. They point out our narrow street. The teacher doesn't hear my answer. The servant wants to feed your thirsty child milk. The farmer seizes our oxen. Your questions are difficult. My servant can speak English. I want to speak Hindi with your friends.

bhûkhë bandar hamirë phal khitë haï. aurat mcri sabziya kharidni câhti haL tumhiri siman halka nahu. vë hamiri tang galï dikhitë haï. adhyipak mëri javib nahï suntc. naukar turn hire pyisë baccë-kô dudh pilàni cihti haL kisin hamirë bailo-kô pakartâ haL tumhirë savâl muskil haï. mëri naukar Angrêzï bol sakti haL maï tumhirë dôstô-kë sith Hindï bôlni câhti hu. Vocabulary Notes: bal (â) "hair," gît (I) "song, chiti (à) "umbrella." 13.5.4 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. tumhiri môtargârï kaha hai? 2. hamârâ bâp kisân hai. 3. baccë tumhàrî bailgârï-më khëltë haï. 4. mëri bahne tâlâb-kë pas khëlnà câhti haï. 5. kyâ yah ghar tumhârâ hai? 6. tumhârë javâb thïk nahï. 7. naukar mërë dôst-kô nahï jântâ. 8. mërë bhâï galï-më khëltë haï. 9. tumhârë adhyâpak muikil savâl kyô pûchtë haï? 10. hamârï billï garm dudh pïnâ câhti hai. 11. kârïgar mëri môtargârï-kë nïcë Jcâm nahï kartâ 12. kuttâ tumhârë bhâï-kô kâtnâ câhtâ hai. 13. yah mërâ ghar nahï. 14. kyâ tumhârë pitâ ghar-më haï? 15. mai tumhârî ma-kë sâth Hindî-me' nahf bôl saktâ. 16. tumhârâ bail mërë bâg-më carta hai. 17. kyâ vah larkâ tumhârâ bhâï hai? 18. mërî tôpï lâiyë. 19. âp mërë pitâ-kë sâth kyô bôlnâ câhtë haï? 20. acchâ larkâ hamârë bhâiyô-kô phal dëtâ hai. 13.5.5 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. Our house is in that street. 2. Please bring water for my car. 3. Why does your cow graze in our field? 4. Your sisters want to talk with my sister. 5. This is my house. 6. This house is mine. 7. Does your father know our father? 8. Please bring my hat. 9. Is my automobile in front of the house? 10. Your servant does not know me. 11.1 (msc.) cannot speak with your friends. 12. Our oxen graze under the new bridge. 13. The kind woman gives your hungry cow grass. 14. That is not your field. 15. Sister brings back water from our well. 16. That shop is mine. 17. The mechanic does not want to work under your car. 18. When does your father come to the city? 19. My brother does not want to go out to play. 20. Is your father the shopkeeper? 13.6 tûtï ghari. The Broken Watch Àzàd: kitnc bajë haï? Azad: What time is it? Gôpâl: mujhë milum nahT! Gopal: I do not know. Âzâd: tumhë kyô nahï malum? Azad: Why don't you know? ^ ' M Gopal: Because I do not have a watch. Gôpâl: kyô-kî mërë pis ghaiï nahï. Azad: What happened to your watch? Azâd: tumhiri gharï-kô kyi hui?

102 Gópal: Ázád: Gópal: Ázád: Gópál:

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

vah tüt gayi. kaise tñti? mujh-se gir gayi thL tum-ne gira di? ha. mai-nc tebül-par bahut kinarcpar rakhí thí. vaha-se gir gayL

Ázád: kya tum marammat kara sakte ho? Gópál: ha. mai us-ki marammat kara sakta hü. Ázád: mai acche ghanslz-ka nam bataüga. Gópál: us-ka nam bataiye. Ázád: us-ka nam Ahmad haL Gópál: Ahmad. Ázád: ha. Gópál: kya mai use janta hü? Ázád: ha. tum jante ho. Gópál: vah kaun hai? Ázád: vah meri bivi-ki bhai haL Gópál: bhai j5 do sal pahile Dilli gayi tha? Ázád: ha. vah cha mahine hue vapas a gay5. Gópál: vah kyo vapas a gaya? Ázád: use bari sahar accha nahi laga. Gópál: vah kaha rahta hai? mai us-kc pas jaüga. Ázád: us-ki dukan Jamuna-ke pul-ke pas hai. tum asani-se vaha ja sakte ho. Gópál: accha. ñamaste. Ázád: ñamaste.

Gopal: Azad: Gopal: Azad: Gopal:

It is broken. How did it break? I dropped it You dropped it? Yes. I placed it too near the edge of the table. It fell off from there. Azad: Can you have it repaired?

Gopal: Yes. I can have it repaired. Azad: I will give (you) the name of a good watch-repairman. Gopal: Please give me his name. Azad: His name is Ahmad. Gopal: Ahmad? Azad: Yes. Gopal: Azad: Gopal: Azad: Gopal:

Do I know him? Yes. You know (him). Who is he? He is my wife's brother. The brother who went to Delhi two years ago? Azad: He came back six months ago. Gopal: Why did he come back? Azad: He did not like the big city. Gopal: Where does he live? I'll go to him. Azad: His shop is near the Jamuna bridge. You can get there easily. Gopal: Good. Good-by. Azad: Good-by.

Lesson 14 14.1 us-ka bhai karkhane-me kam karta haL His brother works in the factory. un-ke bhai karkhanc-me kam kaxte hal. Their brothers work in the factory, us-ka bhai karkhanc-me kam karta haL Her brother works in the factory. un-ke bhai karkhanc-me kam karte hal. Their (fm.) brothers work in the factory Sections 14.1 to 1423 are concerned with the Hindi equivalent to the English genitive construction—i.e., English "the man's hat," "the woman's house," "the son of the man," "the brother of the girL" The Hindi construction under consideration is underlined in each of the example sentences given in 14.1, 14.1.1 and 14.2 Each of the underlined sequences consists of a pronoun (See 10.1, Remarks) or noun in the object form before the forms, -ka, -ke or -Id, followed by a noun. The noun or pronoun (in the object form) and the postposition, constitute the Hindi equivalent to the English genitive construction. (Compare the underlined portions of the English example phrases, above.) The postposition -k2 functions simultaneously both as a postposition, taking the noun or pronoun governed by it in the object form (compare 5.1 and 9.1 to 9.4), and as an adjective ending in -5 (see 3.2, 43 and 6.1), agreeing with the noun it modifies in gender, number and form. Compare: us-ka bhai us-ke bhai larkc-ki bahan larke-ki bahne Wore examples are: mal larke-ke bhai-ko dekhta hu. mai bacce-ki bahan-ke sath bolta hu. ve larko-ke ma-ke liye panl late hal. ham bacco-ke bhai-ko lakri late hal.

his brother his brothers the boy's sister or the sister of the boy the boy's sisters or the sisters of the boy. I see the boy's brother, I speak with the child's sister, They bring water for the boys' mother, We bring the wood to the brother of the children. The teacher asks the boy's brother questions,

adhyapak larke-ke bhai-se savSl puchte hal. Note that the phrase consisting of the noun or pronoun and -ka can be considered to function as a unit equal to an adjective, the masculine singular nominative of which

103

104

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

ends in -a (see 4 3 and 6.1), agreeing in gender, number and form with the noun it modifies. 14.1.1 Your cup is very small. ip-ka pyala bahut chota hai. Your beds are ready. ap-ke bistar taiyar hai. Where is your sister? ap-ki bahan kaha hai?

TU~

larkë-kâ bhai sahar-më kam karti haL larke-kë bhâi sahar-më kam karte hai. larko-kä bhâi sahar-më Icâm kartâ hai. larko-ke bhâi sahar-më kam karte haï. larkl-kâ bhâi sahar-më kam kartâ haL larkï-kë bhâi sahar-më kâm kartë haï. larkiyo-kâ bhâi sahar-më kam kartâ haL larkiyô-kë bhâi sahar-më kâm kartë haï. larkë-kî ma kuê-kô jâtî haL larko-ki mâë kuë-kô jâtî haï. larkï-ki ma kuê-kô jâb haL larkiyô-kl mâe kuë-kô jâtî hai. 14.2.1 More examples are: âdmî-kâ ghar sarak-par haL us-kâ kâm kyâ hai? us-kâ pësâ kyâ hai? us-kî dukân sahar-më hai. vah har tarah-ki cïzë bëctâ haL larkâ për-ki côtî-par carhnâ câhtâ hai.

The The The The The The The The The The The The

boy's brother works in the city. boy's brothers work in the city. brother of the boys works in the brothers of the boys work in the girl's brother works in the city. girl's brothers work in the city. brother of the girls works in the brothers of the girls work in the boy's mother goes to the well. boys' mothers go to the well. girl's mother goes to the well. girls' mothers go to the well.

city. city.

city. city.

The man's house is along the road. What is his business? What is his profession? His shop is in the city. He sells all kinds of things. The boy wants to climb to the top of the tree.

mai hôtal-kë mainëjar-së milnâ câhtâ hü. I want to see the manager of the hotel. yâtri pinë-kâ pânï câhtâ hai. The traveller wants drinking water. The barbershop is near the station. nâï-kî dukân stësan-kë pas haL REMARKS: (1) har means "each," "every"; tarah (I) means "kind," "sort." ( 2 ) Bear in mind that the infinitive, when governed by a postposition, is placed in the object form. Compare pinè-kà pani "drinking water" and pine-kè liye pani "water for drinking." (3) Vocabulary Notes: kam (à) "work," "occupation," coti (!) "top," "summit," nal ( a ) "barber," pesa (à) "trade," "profession," mainejar (a) "manager," yatri (a) "traveller," stesan (a) "station," "railroad station." 14.2.2 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. us-kl mótargàrl ghar-ké sàmné hai. 2. pità larké-ke bhàl-kò phal deté hai. 3. baccé dhóbl-kè gadhé-kè piche calte hai. 4. larkà àp-kl mótargarl-kè liyè pani lata hai. 5. aurat har tarah-kl clze kharfdnà cahti hai. 6. kyà us-kà bap kàrigar hai? 7. larkà kisan-ke ghòrè-kó chari-se kyó marta hai? 8. ma chóté larkè-ki bahan-ké sàth sahar-ko jàtl hai. 9. yah us-kl topi hai. 10. bari gay burhé kisàn-ké khét-mé sabziyà khatl hai. 11. kyà àdml bhài-kè bare kutumb-kè liyé kàm kar saktà hai? 12. pathik àp-ké naukar-ké sàth Hindl-me kyo bolna càhtà hai? 13. un-ké bail khét-kè pàs hai. 14. dhanl àdml-kl nayl mòtargàrl stèsan-kè pàs hai. 15. kàrigar àp-ké pità-kl mótargàrì-ké nice kàm kartà hai.

LESSON 14

105

16. mai ap-ke savalo-ke javab nahl de sakta. 17. pathik-ka saman halka hai. 18. mall bag-ke paudho-par pan! kyo nahl dalta? 19. ap-ka larka burhi aurat-ke liye kath lata hai. 20. naukar un-kl topi nahl la sakta. 21. bhukhe admi-ke thale-par khana rakhiye. 22. aurat burhe admT-kl bhukhi gay-ko ghas detl hai. 23. dhobi admi-ke purane kapre kyo nahl dhota? 24. ap-ka pesa kya hai? 25. naukar hamare pita-ke ghar-me cor pakarta hai. 14.23 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. His father works in the city. 2. The boy brings wood for the traveller's fire. 3. T h e woman buys all kinds of things in the bazaar. 4. Their brother ties the ox under the tree. 5. The child wants to climb to the top of the tree. 6. We (msc.) catch the thief in (our) hotel room. 7. Where is your automobile? 8. T h e servant places the bed on the roof of the house. 9. The boy goes slowly to the barber-shop. 10. Can your servant bring wood for the fire? 11. The monkeys play on the roof of the hotel. 12. T h e boy sits on the branch of the tree. 13. I (msc.) want to drink well-water. 14. The children run behind the washerman's donkey. 15. What is your business? 16. Please place the traveller's baggage in the room. 17. The trees of the garden have many ripe fruits. 18. There are all kinds of things to buy in the shops of the bazaar. 19. T h e holy man sits under the temple's tree. 20. From where can the boy bring water for your automobile? 21. There are all kinds of animals in the jungle. 22. What is that man's profession. 23. Where is your house? 24. The man drinks water from the temple-well. 25. Why don't they ( f m . ) bring wood for your mother? 143 admi mere plche calta hai. The man walks behind me. kutti hamare plche daurta hai. The dog runs behind us. mere sath aiye. (Please) come with me. larke hamare sath bolte hai. The boys speak with us. mere pas tall hai. I have the key. turn hare pas paise hai. You have the money, mere liye pani laiye. (Please) bring water for me. us-ke pita hamare liye seb late hai. His father brings apples for us. This section is concerned with the construction for the first and second person pronouns corresponding to the construction in which nouns are governed by compound postpositions. (See 10.1 to 10.4, and 11.1 to 11.3, and 10.1, Remarks.) In 13.5 to 13.5.3, above, have been presented the possessive adjectives of the first and second person pronouns—i.e., mcra, hamara, tumhara. Constructions involving the first and second person pronouns are rendered into Hindi by placing the object singular masculine form of the possessive adjectives of these pronouns before the second member of the postpositional compound—that is, the -ke is dropped. R E M A R K S : ( 1 ) It has been pointed out in 10.1 that the compound postpositions consist of -ke (now recognizable as the object form, masculine singular, of the -ka postposition) and a form which in many instances can be identified as an adverb. In 14.1, above, the construction consisting of noun (in object form) and the postposition -ka has been described to function as an adjective like any of the other adjectives ending in -a, which agree with the noun they modify in gender, number and form. It can now be shown that the constructions with the possessive adjectives taken

106

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

up in this section, 14.3, comprise an adjective in the object form—i.e., equivalent to the noun (in object form) and -ke of the other postpositional phrases—before an adverbial form (which can be considered to function as a noun in the object form). ( 2 ) Vocabulary Notes: tali (I) "key," seb ( a ) "apple." 143.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. bacce tumhare plche daurna cahte hal. 2. naukar mere samne khana rakhta hai. 3. kya vah tumhare sath Hindi-me bol sakta hai? 4. motargari mere samne ruktl hai. 5. adml mere plche calta hai. 6. mere pas kafl paise nahi hai. 7. accha larka plne-ka pan! hamare liye lata hai. 8. pathik hamare sath AftgrezT bolna cahta hai. 9. larki tumhare liye bag-se seb latl hai. 10. chote bandar mere pas hai. 143.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The washerman washes the clothes for us. 2. The boy brings drinking-water from the well for us. 3. Do you have a car? 4. The holy man stops in front of us. 5. Can he speak Hindi with you? 6. The dog runs behind me. 7. Do you have enough money to buy food? 8. Can you (fm.) come to the city with me? 9. I do not have a horse. 10. Please bring food from the hotel for us. 14.4 sayad mal likhu. I (msc.) may write. I ( f m . ) may write. sayad mai likhu. sayad vah likhe. sayad vah likhe.

He may write. She may write.

sayad ham likhe. sayad ham likhe.

We (msc.) may write. We (fm.) may write.

sayad turn likho. sayad turn likho.

You (msc.) may write. You ( f m . ) may write.

sayad ap likhe. sayad I p likhe.

You (msc.) may write. You ( f m . ) may write.

sayad ve likhe. sayad ve likhe.

They (msc.) may write. They ( f m . ) may write.

This section introduces the Hindi subjunctive. This mood indicates that the act described by the verb has the possibility of being fulfilled. (The may of the English sentences is not the verb may denoting permission.) The Hindi subjunctive is made by attaching to the stem of the verb the following verbal suffixes: -u for the first person singular; -e for the third person singular; -o for the turn form of the second person; and -e for the remaining plural forms. There is no distinction for gender. R E M A R K S : sayad translates English perhaps. It is not an indispensable part of the subjunctive construction and need not be expressed. 14.4.1 More examples are: sayad admi itvar-ko sahar jae. The man may go to the city on Sunday, sayad bacce aj skul jae. The children may go to school today, sayad kutta somvar-k5 vapas ae. The dog may come back on Monday.

LESSON

sayad dukandar mangal-ko cize bece.

14

107

The shopkeeper may sell the things on Tuesday. The children may sleep in the morning, The parents may eat in a restaurant on Wednesday, The carpenter may cut the tree on Thursday, You may read the books on Friday, I may come to see you on Saturday,

sayad bacce din-me soe. sayad mata'pita budh-ko restdrent-me khae. sayad barhai brihaspat-ko per kate. sayad turn sukra-ke din kitabe pirho. sayad mai sanivar-ko ap-se milne-ke liye au. REMARKS: (1) The names of the days of the week are: itvar Sunday; soinvar Monday; manga! or mangalvar Tuesday; budh or budhvar Wednesday; brihaspat or guruvar Thursday; sukra or sukravar Friday; sanivar Saturday. (2) din-me (See sentence 5.) can also be translated during the day. (3) Vocabulary Notes: barhai (a) carpenter, mata'pita (e) parents. 14.4.2 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. sayad mall makan-ke samne kam kare. 2. sayad Slkari jaftgal-me janvar mare. 3. sayad ham maAgal-ko Sahar jae. 4. Sayad mai baccd-ko kahaniya sunau. 5. Sayad dhobl somvar-ko adml-ke liye kapre dhoe. 6. sayad chote bacce itvar-ko chat-par khelna cahe. 7. Sayad aurat rasse-se gay-ko badhe. 8. Sayad machua budhvar hamare liye machliya lae. 9. Sayad turn per-ke nice aram karo. 10. Sayad sadhu mandir-ke samne baithe! 11. Sayad naukar brihaspat-ko aurat-ke sath bazar jae. 12. Sayad vah tumhare sath Hindlme bol sake. 13. Sayad tumhare adhyapak muSkil saval puche. 14. Sayad mai motargari cala saku. 15. Sayad adml pathik-ko plne-ka panl lae. 14.43 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The old fisherman may be able to catch fish. 2. The teacher may want to speak Hindi with you. 3. T h e carpenter may bring wood from the jungle. 4. I may go to the city with you (hon. msc.) on Monday. 5. T h e washerman may be able to bring the clothes on Thursday. 6. The hunter may be able to kill the dreadful tiger. 7. T h e student may want to come on Friday to speak with you in English. 8. T h e gardener may pour water on the plants. 9. W e may go with you on Saturday to eat in the hotel's restaurant. 10. T h e mechanic may be able to work under the automobile. 11. The shopkeeper may sell all kinds of things to the woman. 12. The farmer may till the field on Tuesday. 13. The woman may buy vegetables from the old man. 14. The servant may bring food from the restaurant for us. 15. W e may bring wood from the jungle for you on Wednesday. 14.5 tagevala. Tongawala. byapari: e! tagevale. Businessman: Hey! Tongawala. tagevala: jl ha, sahib? Tongawala: Yes, sir? byapari: mai Ramnagar-ka bazar jina Businessman: I wish to go to the Ramnagar cahti hu. bazaar, tagevala: mai ap-ko vaha le ja sakta hu. Tongawala: I can take you there, byapari: kitne paise loge? Businessman: How much money do you charge? tagevala: tin rupaye. Tongawala: Three rupees, byapari: tin rupaye? Businessman: Three rupees?

108

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

tâgêvâlâ: hâ, sâhib. tin rupayë. byâpârï: tin rupayë tô bahut haï. mai tô ëk rupayi dëtâ hu. tâgêvâlâ: ëk rupayâ? ëk rupayi kifi nahl. mërâ kharc bahut hai. byâpârï: tumhiri kharc bahut hai? kyô? tâgêvâlâ: pahilë mujhë apnë bïvï'baccôkô khilini hai, aur phir ghôrëkô. byâpârl: kyi tumhâri kutumb barâ hai? tâgêvâlâ: hâ. mëri bivî aur do baccë haï. byâpârl: tab tô tumhiri kutumb bâri nahl. tâgêvâlâ: ghar-më aur lôg-bhï hai. byâpârl: kaun kaun? tâgêvâlâ: mëri bhiï, us-ki bîvï, aur dô baccë. byâpârl: kyi tum-kô un-kî dëkhbhil karni parti hai? tâgêvâlâ: mëri bhâî bîmir hai aur kâm nahï kar sakti. byâpârï: yah tô buri bit hai. tâgêvâlâ: mëri mi-bhï ham*lôgô-kë sith rahti hai. byâpârï: mai tumhë derh rupayë dûgi. tâgêvâlâ: yah k i f i nahl, sihib. mujhë dhâl rupayë dïjiyë aur mai ip-kô vahi jaldi lë calûgà. byâpârï: dhil rupayë tô bahut haï. mal tumhë dô rupayë dûgi. bas. tâgêvâlâ: bahut acchi, sihib. dô rupayë thlk haï. baithiyë. byâpârï: sunô! thïk-së calânâ.

Tongawala: Yes, sir. Three rupees. Businessman: Three rupees is too much. I'll give you one rupee. Tongawala: One rupee? One rupee is not enough. My expenses are great. Businessman: Your expenses are great? Why? Tongawala: First, I have to feed my family, and, secondly, my horse. Businessman: Is your family large? Tongawala: Yes. There is my wife and two children. Businessman: Then your family is not large. Tongawala:

There are other people, too, in the house. Businessman: Who? Tongawala: My brother, his wife and two children. Businessman: D o you have to look after them? Tongawala: My brother is ill and cannot work. Businessman: That's too bad. Tongawala: My mother also lives with us. Businessman: I will give you one and onerupees. Tongawala: This is not enough, sir. Give me two and one-half rupees and I will take you there immediately. Businessman: T w o and one-half rupees is too much. I'll give you two rupees. That's all. Tongawala: Very well, sir. T w o rupees is fine. Please get in. Businessman: Pay attention! Drive carefully.

Lesson 15 15.1 ^ mai likhügi. mat likhügi.

I (msc.) will write. I (fm.) will write.

vah likhega. vah likhegi.

He will write. She will write.

ham likhege. ham likhegi.

We (msc.) will write. We (fm.) will write.

tum likhöge. tum likhögl.

You (msc.) will write. You (fm.) will write.

i p likhege. äp likhegi.

You (msc.) will write. You (fm.) will write.

ve likhege. ve likhegi.

They (msc.) will write. They (fm.) will write.

This section is conccrned with the formation of the future tense of the Hindi verb. This tense is made by attaching to the subjunctive forms the following suffixes: -ga for the masculine singular, -ge for the masculine plural, and -gi for the feminine singular and plural. 15.1.1 More examples are: The man will go to the city. admi sahar-ko jaega. The children will go to school today. bacce aj skul jaege. The dog will come back. kutta vapas aegi. larki saf karegi. The girl will clean. aurte bacco-ko dekhegi. The women will see the children. larka Hindi bolna cahegi. The boy will want to speak Hindi. admi kosis kama cahege. The men will want to try. larki Angrezi samajhna cahegi. The girl will want to understand English. patniya saval puchna cahegi. The wives will want to ask questions. larka Hindi bol sakega. The boy will be able to speak Hindi. admi aj'rat kam kar sakege. The men will be able to work tonight.

109

110

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

larki kal ga sakegi. aurte sabziyi bee sakegi. mai nagari parh sakuga. machua machliyi becne-ke liye bazar-ko jaega. larka aurto-ke liye pan! laega. larki paudhe-se phul toregi. aurte pakane-ke liye sabziya kharidegi. kya larka talab-ko calegi? kya aurat dukan-me kapra kharidegi? kya adm! akhbar parhna cahegi? kya bacca khelna cahega? kya sipahi cor-ko pakar sakega?

The girl will be able to sing tomorrow, The women will be able to sell vegetables, I will be able to read Nagari. The fisherman will go to the bazaar to sell fish, The boy will bring water for the women, The girl will pluck flowers from the plant, The women will buy vegetables to cook, Will the boy walk to the pond? Will the woman buy cloth in the shop? Will the man want to read the newspaper? Will the child want to play? Will the policeman be able to catch the thief? kya aurte khana taiyar kar sakegi? Will the women be able to prepare the food? Vocabulary Notes: kamzor (adj.) weak, kosis karna to try, to attempt, c5r ( a ) thief, taiyar (adj.) ready, prepared, taiyar karna to prepare, taiyar hona to be prepared, nagari (I) the Nagari script, saf (adj.) clean, clear, saf karna to clean, saf hona to be clean, sipahi ( a ) policeman. 15.1.2 Exercise 1. Translate into English: I. sikarl jafigal-me bahut janvar marege. 2. ham ap-ke sath sahar-ko jaege. 3. machua us nadi-me barl machliya pakar sakega. 4. naukar pathik-ke liye thanda pan! laega. 5. ma bacco-ko acchl kahaniya sunaegl. 6. kisan per-ke nice kam kab karega? 7. kya sadhu aj mandir-ke samne baithege? 8. dhobl adml-ke purane kapre dhona cahega. 9. larka burhl aurat-ke liye bhari lakrT laega. 10. kya vah tumhare sath Hindi-me bol sakegi? II. mai aj'rat tumhare sath bazar ja sakuga. 12. aurat har tarah-ki clze kharidna cahegi. 13. pita sahar-se kab vapas aege? 14. gay nadl-ke pas caregl. 15. kya naukar AngrezI samajh sakege? 15.1.3 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. I (msc.) will not be able to study tonight. 2. Will the student be able to read Nagari? 3. My parents will eat in the restaurant on Tuesday. 4. Will you be able to work in the garden today? 5. The carpenter will want to cut the tree on Thursday. 6. Will you (hon. £m.) come to see us on Friday? 7. I (msc.) will speak in Hindi with the men. 8. When will the hunters kill the dreadful tiger? 9. The servant will be able to understand English. 10. Will the weak farmer be able to till the large field with the small plow? 11. The teacher will ask us difficult questions today. 12. The washerman will walk behind the donkey. 13. Will the washerman bring the clothes tonight? 14. The elephant will drag the heavy wood from the jungle to the river. 15. The fisherman will want to take the fish to sell (them) in the city. 15.2 mai aj skol-me huga. vah makan-ke piche hoga. vah us-me hogi. ham un-ke piche hoge.

I will be in school today, He will be behind the house, She will be in it. We will be behind them.

LESSON

15

111

tum sahar-me höge. You will be in the city, äp daftar-me höge. You will be in the office, ve bäg-me högi. They will be in the garden. This section presents the future of the verb h5nä to become, to be, to exist, the subjunctive of which is obtained by dropping the future suffixes (-gi, -ge, -gi). Note that the subjunctive of the first person singular is hou, which is replaced by hü in forming the future. 15.2.1 mal garib ädmi-kö paise dügi. I will give money to the poor man. vah adhyäpak-kö javib degi. He will answer the teacher. vah bacce-kö mithäyi degi. She will give candy to the child. ham bhükhl aurat-kö röti dege. We will give bread to the hungry woman. tum piti-kö akhbär dogi. You will give father the newspaper. ip naukar-kö hukam dege. You will give commands to the servant. ve gäy-kö ghäs degi. They will give the cow grass. This section presents the future tense of the verb deni to give, which is formed by adding the future suffixes to the subjunctive. 15.2.2 mal mez-se nayi kägaz lügä. I will take fresh paper from the table, vah baccc-se sakkar legi. She will take the sugar from the child, vah larkl-se päni legi. He will take water from the girl, ham gay-se dndh lege. We will take milk from the cow. tum bail-ki gardan-se chötä ghantä löge. You will take the little bell from the ox's neck. äp ham-se phül lege. You will take flowers from us. ve cör-se nayi ghari vipas legi. They will take back the new watch from the thief. This section presents the future tense of the verb lenä to take, which is formed by adding the future suffixes to the subjunctive. 15.23 Vocabulary Notes: kägaz ( ä ) paper, gardan (I) neck, garib (adj.) poor, ghari (I) watch, ghag(i ( ä ) bell, mithayi ( i ) candy, sweets, r5ti (I) [unleavened] bread, sakkar (ä) sugar, hukam ( I ) command, order, hukam deni to command, order, hukam manna to obey. 15.2.4 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. pita mithayi kharidne-ke liye paise dege. 2. säyad gäy per-ke nice hö. 3. aurat acche larke-se lakre legi. 4. sipähl cör-se har tarah-ki clze legi. 5. sayad mal äj daftar-me höü. 6. kuä khetö-ke päs högä. 7. döst mujhe kitäbe kab väpäs degä? 8. Säyad dayälü aurat garib ädmi-kö khänä de. 9. cor dhanl ädmi-se ghari legä. 10. dhöbl naukar-se kapre legä. 11. mä bacce-ke garm düdh degi. 12. bürhe ädml-ke päs kitäbe högi. 13. säyad dhöbl äj dhöne-ke liye kapre le. 14. tum mere saväl-ke javäb kab dögl? 15. aurat betl-se phül legi. 16. ädml chöte baccö-se mithäyl kyo legä? 17. säyad mal tum-kö akhbär dü. 18. mä bhükhe pathik-kö rötl degi. 19. kyä larke-ke päs ek kuttä högä? 20. Säyad mal äj'rät äp-se kitäb lü. 15.2.5 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. There will be a bell on my ox's neck. 2. When will you (msc.) give back the candy.

112

HINDI G R A M M A R AND READER

to the child? 3. I may give you the newspaper. 4. T h e father will give the girl a handkerchief. 5. The child will take the cup of m i l k from the mother. 6. T h e dog m a y take the candy from the child. 7. T h e policeman will give back the watch to the rich man. 8. W h e n will he be in the office? 9. H e m a y be in the city tonight. 10. T h e carpenter will take the wood from the jungle. 11. T h e little girl will give the flowers to the father. 12. I may take the plates from the table. 13. T h e policeman will give orders to the servants. 14. T h e servant will take the sugar from the child. 15. T h e boy will give a cup of cold water to the thirsty traveller. 16. I may be in the house tomorrow. 17. T h e servant will show the man a room in the hotel. 18. T h e father will give all sorts of things to the children. 19. You may give the paper to the student. 20. T h e boy will take drinking water from the well.

153 T h e boy likes to speak H i n d i . T h e monkey likes to climb trees. T h e children like to s w i m in the tank. I like to travel. He likes to read books. Girls like to sew new clothes. Children like candy. T h e boy likes H i n d i . T h e cat likes m i l k . T h e child likes cats. T h e boy likes his brother. T h i s section illustrates the Hindi equivalent of the English construction consisting of the words like to followed by a verb or like followed by a noun, pasand karna translates the English verb to like. These two words can be considered to function as a single verb with the second verb of the first English phrase placed in the infinitive form before it, or the noun of the second English phrase placed in the object form (before -ko when it indicates a rational being or a n i m a l ) .

larka Hindi bolna pasand karti hai. bandar pcro-par carhna pasand karta hai. bacce talab-me tairna pasand karte hai. mal safar karna pasand karta hu. vah kitibe parhni pasand karta hai. larkiya naye kapre sina pasand kartl hai. bacce mithayi pasand karte hai. larka Hindi pasand karta hai. bilE dudh pasand kartl hai. bacca billiya pasand karta hai. larka bhal-ko pasand karta hai.

Vocabulary Notes: safar ( a ) journey, travel, safar karna to travel.

153.1 larka Hindi bolna zyidä pasand karta hai. T h e boy prefers to speak H i n d i . bandar pcro-par carhna zyidä pasand T h e monkey prefers to climb trees. kartä hai. bacce tilib-me tairna zyidä pasand karte T h e children prefer to s w i m in the tank. hai. mal safar karnä zyidä pasand karta hü. I prefer to travel. vah kitibe parhnä zyidä pasand karta hai. He prefers to read books. larkiya naye kapre sinä zyidä pasand kartl Girls prefer sewing n e w clothes. hai. bacce mithayi zyidä pasand karte hai. Children prefer candy. T h e boy prefers H i n d i . larki Hindi zyidä pasand kartä hai. T h e cat prefers m i l k . bill! düdh zyidä pasand kartl hai. T h e child prefers cats. bacci billiya zyidä pasand kartä hai. T h i s section illustrates the Hindi equivalent of the English construction consisting

LESSON

15

113

of the words prefer to followed by a verb or noun. This construction is identical with that described in 15.3, above, with one addition—the adverb zyidâ more is placed before pasand karnâ. 153.2 larkâ Angrczï bôlnë-së Hindi bôlnâ zyidâ The boy prefers speaking Hindi to speaking pasand kartà hai. English. bandar tàlàb-më tairnë-së përô-par carhni The monkey prefers climbing trees to swimzyidâ pasand kartâ haL ming in the tank. baccë ghar-mê nahinë-së tilib-më tairni The children prefer swimming in the tank zyidâ pasand kartë haï. to bathing at home. mal ghar-më rahnê-sê safar karnâ zyidâ I prefer travelling to remaining at home. pasand kartâ hu. larkiyâ purine kaprë sïnë-së nayë kaprë Girls prefer sewing new clothes to sewing sïnâ zyidâ pasand kartl haï. old clothes. baccë dudh-së mithiyï zyidâ pasand kartë Children prefer candy to milk. haï. larkâ Angrëzï-së Hindi zyidâ pasand kartâ The boy prefers Hindi to English. haL baccâ kuttô-së billiyâ zyidâ pasand kartâ The child prefers cats to dogs. haL This section illustrates the Hindi translation of the English construction indicating preference for one being, thing or action to another. This constructon is identical with that described in 153.1, above, with one addition. Compare: larkâ Hindi bôlnâ zyâdâ pasand kartâ haL The boy prefers to speak HindL (or The boy prefers speaking HindL) and larkâ Angiëzî bôlnë-së Hindi bôlnâ zyidâ pasand kartâ haL The boy prefers speaking English. Note that the word or words introduced in the English phrase by the preposition to are placed in Hindi in the object form before the postposition -se. T h e phrase indicating the thing not preferred (i.e., the -së postpositional phrase) is normally placed in the utterance before the phrase indicating the thing preferred (i.e., before Hindi bôlnâ in the example sentence). 15.3.3 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. mai am pasand kartâ hu. 2. naukar sônâ zyâdâ pasand kartâ hai. 3. baccê kuttô-së billiyâ zyâdâ pasand kartë haï. 4. kuttë haddt zyâdâ pasand kartë haï. 5. âdmï kârkhânë-më kâm karnâ zyâdâ pasand kartâ hai. 6. ham sëbô-së âm zyâdâ pasand kartë haï. 7. âp restôrent-më kyô khânâ zyâdâ pasand karêgë? 8. gâyë ghâs zyâdâ pasand kartï haï. 9. pathik pînë-kâ pânl zyâdâ pasand kartâ hai. 10. mai dhônë-kë liyë thandë pânï-së garni pânï zyâdâ pasand kartà hu. 11. pità kutumb-kë liyë kâm karnâ pasand kartë haï. 12. aurat môtargârî-së sahar-kô jânâ zyâdâ pasand kartl hai. 13. bandar mïthë phal khânâ pasand kartë haï. 14. âp HindI-më kyô zyâdâ bôlnâ pasand kartë haï? 15. ham kâm karnë-së khëlnâ zyâdâ pasand kartë haï. 16. billiyâ dudh pïnâ pasand kartï haï. 17. vidyârthï Afigrëzî parhnë-së Hindi parhnâ zyâdâ pasand kartâ hai. 18. vë sahar jànë-së hôtel-më rahnâ zyâdâ pasand kartë haï. 19. chôtë baccë pitâ-kë sâth sahar-kô jânâ pasand kartë haï. 20. pathik ghar-më rahnë-së safar karnâ zyâdâ pasand karëgâ. 15.3.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The child likes dogs. 2. T h e father prefers to read the newspaper. 3. The traveller

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

114

will prefer a large hotel room to a small room. 4. We (msc.) like food. 5. Mother prefers to stay at home. 6. T h e old farmer will prefer resting under the tree to working in the field. 7. Fish like water. 8. I (fin.) prefer resting in the hotel to swimming in the river. 9. T h e girl prefers to talk with (her) friends. 10. T h e boys like to swim. 11. T h e good student will prefer studying to playing with ( h i s ) friends. 12. T h e cow prefers to graze near the river. 13. W e (msc.) like travelling by automobile. 14. T h e girls like to sew. 15. Mother prefers staying at home to travelling. 16. T h e fisherman prefers to sell the fish in the city. 17. I (msc.) will prefer to drink well-water. 18. T h e dog likes to swim with (his) master. 19. T h e gardener prefers sitting under the tree to watering the plants. 20. Snakes like milk.

15.4 hötal-ke daftar-mé. pathik: mujhe kamrä cahiye. klark: kyi ip-ne rizarv karväyä hai? pathik: h i . mai-ne karväyä hai. klark: ap-ki nam kya hai? pathik: mera nam Patel hai. mai-ne dö hafte pahile likha thä. klark: hi. ip-ki citthi yah hai. pathik: kya kamrä acchi hai? klark: hä. kamrä acchi hai. hamire sab kamre acche hai. pathik: kyi kamre-ke sith gusalkhini-bhi hai? klark: hi. kamre-ke sith gusalkhini hai. sabhi kamrö-ke sith gusalkhine hai. yah nayi hötal hai. pathik: mere kamre-ki kyi nambar hai? klark: ip-ke kamre-ki nambar sit sau cauda hai. siman naukar le jiegi. Rimú!

Traveller: Clerk: Traveller: Clerk: Traveller:

In the Hotel Office. I wish to have a room. D o you have a reservation? Yes. I have a reservation. What is your name? My name is Patel.

I had written two weeks ago. Clerk: Yes. Here is your letter. Traveller: Is the room good? Clerk: Yes. T h e room is good. All our rooms are good. Traveller: Does the room have a bath, too? Clerk:

Yes. T h e room has a bath. All the rooms have baths.

This is a new hotel. Traveller: What is the number of my room? Clerk: Your room number is 714. The servant will take your luggage. Ramu!

R ä m ü : jl h i .

Ramu:

Yes, sir.

klark:

Clerk:

Take the gentleman's luggage to 714.

R ä m ü : jl h i . [pathik-kö]

Ramu:

Yes, Sir. [ T o Traveller.]

mere sith iiye, sähib. [kamre-ké päs] sahib, yah ip-ki kamri haL andar iiye. pathik: mera si min bistar-ke pis rakho. Rämü: bahut acchi. aur kuch? pathik: ha. yahi töliyi nahl. mal nahini eihtä hü.

Please come with me, sir. [Near the room] This is your room, sir. Please come in. Traveller: Place my luggage near the bed. Ramu: Very well. Anything else? Traveller: Yes. There are no towels here. I wish to take a bath.

sihib-ki samán sit sau caudä nambar-me le jio.

LESSON

Rämü: töliyä abhî lata hü.

115

15

Rämü:

kyä aur kuch cahiyc?

I'll bring towels immediately. Anything else?

pathik: hä. thandä pani Ilo.

Traveller; Yes. Bring me cold water.

RâmQ: bahut acchä. [dö minat-kê bad

Ramü:

vâpas ätä hai J

Very well. [He returns after two minutes.]

yah lïjiyë tôliyâ aur thandä pani.

Here are the towels and the cold

pathik: bahut acchä. pânï mëz-par rakhö.

water. Traveller: Very good. Place the water on

Rämü: kyä mai khirki khôl dû?

Râmû:

the table. pathik: hä. khirk! khôl dö.

Shall I open the window? Traveller: Yes. Open the window.

yahä bahut garmi h a i

It is very warm in here.

RâmQ: bahut acchä. aur kuch?

Râmû:

pathik: nahï. abhî nahî.

Traveller: No. Not now.

Very good. Anything else?

Râmû: bahut acchä. mai pas-hi hü.

Rämü:

pathik: yë paisê 15.

Traveller: Take this money.

Râmu:

Râmû:

bahut, bahut dhanyavàd, sâhib.

Very good. I'll be near-by. Thank you very much, sir.

Lesson 16 16.1 [9.1.3] Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e hunters kill animals in the jungles. 2. T h e monkeys run quickly in the high trees. 3. Big fish swim in the deep ocean. 4. W e ( f m . ) work in the city. 5. T h e little boys want to swim in the deep river. 6. T h e hungry woman cooks food in the new pots. 7. T h e man goes slowly in the house. 8. W e (msc.) want to pluck those fruits in the large garden. 9. T h e farmers bathe the elephant in the little river. 10. T h e men want to dig in the small field now. 16.2 [9.1.4] Translate into English: 1. kisân zamîn-më khôdtà hai. 2. chôtà larkâ âkâs-më taré dëkhnâ câhtâ hai. 3. barë kamrë-më dô mëzë haï. 4. bûrhâ âdmî ghanë jaiigal-më kâth kâttâ hai. 5. aurtë dukân-mê kaprâ kharïdnâ câhtï haï. 6. gahrë samudra-më bahut machliyâ haï. 7. chôtë larkë ëk-sâth bâj-më khëlnâ câhtë haï. 8. khët-më bhûkhî gây hai. 9. aurat sabziyâ nayï handiyâ-më pakânâ câhtï hai. 10. bâzâr-më chotï dukânë haï. 1 6 3 [9.2.3] Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e good boy brings wood to (his) mother. 2. Father reads the book to the small children. 3. We (msc.) point out the long road to the man. 4. T h e wife sends food to the hungry farmer. 5. T h e mother points out the bad boy to the father. 6. T h e girls bring water to the mother. 7. T h e little girl gives flowers to (her) father. 8. T h e husband points out the stars to (his) wife. 9. T h e woman brings out ripe fruits to the children. 10. T h e farmer wants to drive the cows to the small field. 16.4 [9.2.4] Translate into English: 1. chôtî larkï mâ-kô pânï lânâ câhtï hai. 2. larkë bûrhë âdmï-kô ucï imârat dikhâtë haï. 3. ham bhûkhë âdmï-kô khânâ dênâ câhtë haï. 4. âdmî kisânô-kô sahar dikhâtë haï. 5. pitâ bëtï-kô chôtâ tôtâ dëtë haï. 6. bhùkhà kisàn patnï-kô sabziyâ lâtâ hai. 7. mâ pitâ-kô burë bëtë-kô bhëjtï hai. 8. larkâ gurù-kô phul lâtâ hai. 9. âdmî sikârï-kô sër batâtë haï. 10. bahan mâ-kô chôtë bhâï-kô lâtï hai. 16.5 [9.33] Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e boy places the pen on the books. 2. T h e servant places the load on the ground. 3. T h e bad boy pours water on (his) sister. 4. T h e little children want to play on the roof. 5. T h e servant places the plates on the table. 6. T h e boy wants to sit on the branch. 7. T h e man drops the load on the road. 8. T h e washerman wants to place the clothes on the ground. 9. T h e woman pours water on the plants. 10. T h e man wants to sleep on the bed.

116

LESSON

16

117

16.6 [9.3.4] Translate into English: 1. ham chat-par khëlnâ càhtë haï. 2. paksl sâkhâ-par baithnâ câhtë haï. 3. âdmï chat-par palang rakhtâ hai. 4. naukar tasvîr divâr-par latkâtâ hai. 5. aurat pakkë phal mëz-par rakhtl hai. 6. sarak-par dô makân haï. 7. larkà zamïn-par ghâs rakhtâ hai. 8. kuttâ zamîn-par sôtâ hai. 9. chat-par bandar hai. 10. aurat thàlë mëz-par rakhtï hai. 16.7 [9.4.3] Translate into Hindi: 1. We (msc.) ask them questions. 2. They (msc.) want to take the fruit from the children. 3. The washerman brings the clothes from the river. 4. The cow eats the fruit from the bushes. 5. The farmer wants to strike the monkeys with a stick. 6. The thirsty man takes water from the good boy. 7. The traveller comes from the city. 8. The woman brings vegetables from the field. 9. The man ties the grass with a rope. 10. The (spiritual) teacher wants to ask me questions. 16.8 [9.4.4] Translate into English: 1. guru larkë-së savàl pùchtë haï. 2. chôtâ kisân barë bail-kô charï-së marta hai. 3. âdmï lakrï rassë-së bâdhtâ hai. 4. pyâsâ pathik mujh-së pânï lëtâ hai. 5. aurat gây bâg-së bulàtï hai. 6. ham kuë-së pânï lëtï haï. 7. bhùkhâ kisân khët-së âtà hai. 8. vê burê bakrë-kô rassë-së bâdhnâ câhtë haï. 9. ma mujh-së savâl puchtï hai. 10. bhùkhâ kuttà baccë-së khânâ curata hai. 16.9 [10.13] Translate into Hindi: 1. The child is behind the door. 2. The women speak together behind the well. 3. The mother runs after the little child. 4. The cat goes after the girl. 5. The wife walks behind the husband. 6. We (msc.) go after them. 7. The traveller sits behind that tree. 8. The fox seizes the hen behind the well. 9. The farmer goes behind the plow. 10. The hungry dog walks behind the little child. 16.10 [10.1.4] Translate into English: 1. për-kë pïchë gây hai. 2. aurat kuë-kë pïchë nahâtï hai. 3. nadï sahar-kë pîchë hai. 4. chôtâ larkà pitâ-kë pïchë caltâ hai. 5. ham ûcê për-kë pïchë baithtï haï. 6. mâlï makân-kë pïchë kâm kartâ hai. 7. aurat tasvîr darvâzë-kë pïchë rakhtï hai. 8. bëtâ pitâ-kë pïchë caltâ hai. 9. naukar bâg-kë pïchë zamïn khôdtâ hai. 10. ghar-kë pïchë bâj* hai. 16.11 [10.2.2] Translaté"into Hindi: 1. The woman ties the cow under the tree. 2. The cat runs under the house. 3. The lion drags the little donkey under the bridge. 4. The servant places the shoes under the bed. 5. Under the house lives a big snake. 6. The farmer ties the hungry oxen under the tree. 7. The child plays under the table. 8. The farmer wants to sleep under the tree. 9. The long snake goes under the house. 10. There is a fat cow under the bridge. 16.12 [10.2.3] Translate into English: 1. bail për-kë nïcë thahartë haï. 2. larkâ mëz-kë nïcë kitàb girata hai. 3. ham barë jânvar pul-kë nïcë dëkhtë haï. 4. bail kisân-kô për-kë nïcë khïctë haï. 5. kuttà ûcë për-kë nïcë sônâ câhtâ hai. 6. bhûkhï billï mëz-kë nïcë khânâ khâtï hai. 7. dublï gây për-kë nïcë âràm kartï hai. 8. për-kë nïcë pakkë phal haï. 9. machuà pul-kë nïcë machliyâ pakarnâ câhtâ hai. 10. chôtï larkiyà për-kë nïcë khëlnâ câhtï haï. 16.13 [10.3.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. The father plays with the children. 2. The mother speaks with (her) daughters. 3. The boy lives in the small house with (his) old mother. 4. The daughter runs home with (her) brothers. 5. The woman goes to the bazaar with the servant. 6. The boy

118

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

sits on the roof with (his) friends. 7. The man goes to the city with the servant. 8. The boy goes to the field with (his) father. 9. The big boy swims in the river with (his) friends. 10. Mother comes from the bazaar with the women. 16.14 [103.3] Translate into English: 1. larkâ bhâï-kë sàth khêt-kô jâtâ hai. 2. kisân bëtô-kë sâth sahar-kô jàtâ hai. 3. baccë dôstô-kë sâth chat-par khêltë haï. 4. aurat bëtï-kë sâth ghar-më pakâtî hai. 5. mâlï baccô-kë sâth bâg-më jâtâ hai. 6. mâ baccë-kë sâth khëltl hai. 7. bëtï mâ-kë sâth ghar-më kâm kartï hai. 8. naukar aurat-kë sâth bâzâr jâtâ hai. 9. chôtî larkî bahan-kë sâth bâg-me khëltl hai. 10. larkî dôstô-kë sâth bâzâr jâtî hai. 16.15 [10.4.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. The man buys many things in front of the shop. 2. There is a field in front of the river. 3. The woman places flowers in front of the holy man. 4. The automobile stops in front of the building. 5. The little boy runs in front of (his) father. 6. The gardener works in front of the house. 7. The hunter kills the wolf in front of the jungle. 8. The hungry woman grabs the chicken in front of the garden. 9. In front of the house there is a high tree. 10. The girl wants to play in front of the house. 16.16 [10.43] Translate into English: 1. sâdhu nadï-kë sâmnë baithtë haï. 2. aurat kuë-kë sâmnë hai. 3. mâ baccë-kë sâmnë phal rakhti hai. 4. chôtî larkî ghar-kë sâmnë khëltï hai. 5. ham mandir-kë sâmnë khëlnâ câhtë haï. 6. ûcï imârat-kë sâmnë chôtî dukân hai. 7. naukar ghar-kë sâmnë baithtë haî. 8. larkâ gurû-kë sâmnë baithtà hai. 9. sahar-kë sâmnë ghanâ jaflgal hai. 10. bhukhâ ghôrà ghâs-kë pas ruknâ câhtâ hai. 16.17 [11.1.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. The woman speaks with the shopkeeper near the shop. 2. The servant waits near the office. 3. The thirsty ox stops near the well. 4. The boy swims near the bridge. 5. The man bathes the big elephant near the river. 6. The little girls play together near the house. 7. There is a deep well near the road. 8. We (msc.) want to play together near the temple. 9. The trolley stops near the bridge. 10. The thirsty cow waits near the river. 16.18 [11.13] Translate into English: 1. mâlï kuë-kë pàs kâm kartâ hai. 2. aurat dukân-kë pas thahartï hai. 3. chôtë larkë mandir-kë pâs khëltë haï. 4. pyâsâ kuttâ kuë-kë pâs hai. 5. mandir-kë pâs sâdhu hai. 6. ham dôstô-kë sâth pul-kë pàs khëlnâ câhtë haï. 7. chôtî larkiyâ mâ-kë pâs sônà câhtï haï. 8. barà ut ûcë për-kë pâs sônà càhtà hai. 9. mâ dôstô-kë sâth nadî-kë pâs bôltî hai. 10. bhukhâ ghôrâ ghâs-kë pas ruknâ câhtâ hai. 16.19 [11.2.3] Translate into Hindi: 1. The woman has a handkerchief. 2. The student has two books. 3. The shopkeeper has very fresh mangoes. 4. The daughters have new saris. 5. The teacher has a small house. 6. The farmers have plows. 7. Father has a newspaper. 8. The woman has new cooking pots. 9. The man has an automobile. 10. The farmer has two oxen. 16.20 [11.2.4] Translate into English: 1. aurat-kë pàs das murgiyà haï. 2. baccë-kë pàs nayâ gëd hai. 3. âdmï-kë pâs nayî môtargârï hai. 4. un-ké pàs barà makân hai. 5. aurat-kë pâs gày hai. 6. dhôbï-kë pâs gadhâ hai. 7. us-kë pàs nayâ hal hai. 8. larkiyô-kë pàs bahut curiyâ haï. 9. dukàndâr-kë pàs bahut cïzë haï. 10. mahilâ-kë pàs bahut sâriyà haï.

LESSON

16

119

16.21 [11.3.3] Translate into Hindi: 1. The servant brings water for bathing to the traveller. 2. The teacher gives the student a book to read. 3. The boy cuts wood for the mother. 4. The farmer draws water for the thirsty oxen. 5. The mother buys bangles for (her) daughters. 6. The man goes to the tank to bathe with (his) sons. 7. The woman cooks food for the family. 8. The lady goes to the bazaar with (her) daughter to buy saris. 9. The daughter runs to the well to bring water. 10. We (msc.) want to ask for food (to eat). 16-22 [11.3.4] Translate into English: 1. larkë dôstô-kë sâth khëlnê-kê liyê bâhar jàtë haï. 2. bhûkhê baccë khânë-kë liyê andar ânâ câhtë haï. 3. bandar përô-së phal tôrnë-kë liyë bâg-më jànâ câhtë haï. 4. ham parhnë-kë liyë ëk nayî kitàb mâgtl haï. 5. ma chôtë larkë-kë liyë khilaunâ kharidtï hai. 6. kisân dô bailô-kô khânë-kë liyë ghâs dëtâ hai. 7. dhôbî dhônë-kë liyë tâlâb-më kaprë dâltâ hai. 8. caprâsî mâlik-kë parhnë-kë liyë kitàb kharidtâ hai. 9. âdml kutumb-kë liyë Sahar-me kâm kartâ hai. 10. aurat khët-së pakânë-kë liyê sabziyâ lâtî hai. 16.23 [11.42] Translate into Hindi: 1. The well is sweet. ( = The water of the well is sweet.) 2. The strong farmer pulls the small donkey. 3. The happy woman places food in front of (her) husband. 4. The hunter kills the dreadful animal. 5. The father buys a red sari for the beautiful daughter. 6. The sister places the sick child on the bed. 7. The sleepy servant sleeps in the corner. 8. The boy brings the heavy wood for the women. 9. The rich man gives food to the sad boy. 10. I (msc.) ask for warm water. 11. The beautiful girl brings the clean shirt. 12. The woman ties the white cow under the tree. 13. There is a round table in the corner. 14. The kind woman feeds grass to the hungry ox. 15. The rich man has many houses. 16.24 [11.43] Translate into English: 1. kisân bhayânak bàgh-kô mârnâ càhtâ hai. 2. sukhi larkî lâl sârî kharidtï hai. 3. ma lâl murgï-kô khilânâ câhtï hai. 4. safëd gây bâg-me hai. 5. us gôl mëz-kô bâhar lâiyë. 6. handiyâ-më garm pànî hai. 7. dôst rôgî aurat-kô khânâ lâtî hai. 8. dukhl larkî gahrê kuë-kë pâs rôti hai. 9. larkë dusta côr-kô dikhâtë haï. 10. dhôbî sâf kaprë lâtâ hai. 11. aurat sir-par bhârî lakrï rakhtî hai. 12. chôtâ âdml mazbut gadhë-kë pïchë caltà hai. 13. nadî-kë pâs safëd ghôrâ hai. 14. dayâlû aurat bhûkhë âdml-kô khânâ dëtî hai. 15. amîr âdml-kë pâs bahut dôst haï. 16.25 [11.53] Translate into Hindi: 1. Does the cat catch that small mouse? 2. Do the hungry monkeys want to steal those fruits? 3. Are those small children hungry? 4. Do those women want to bathe the children? 5. Does the woman cook these vegetables? 6. Does this small horse want to drink? 7. Does the woman want to make the thirsty cow drink? 8. Does the good woman feed the small children too much? 9. Does the angry cat bite the woman there? 10. Does the farmer tie the oxen? 11. Do you (fm.) call the girls in? 12. Do fathers understand children sometimes? 13. Does the servant understand me? 14. Are the cooking-pots good? 15. Is the horse big? 16. Is there coal in the ground? 17. Are these animals in the jungles? 18. Do the small boys want to swim in the deep river? 19. Does the washerman send the man the clothes? 20. Does the gardener pour water on the plant? 21. Does the farmer till the field with the plow? 22. Is there a garden behind the house? 23. Does the farmer rest under the tree? 24. Does the boy speak with the women? 25. Does the hunter kill the dreadful animal?

120

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

16.26 [11.5.4] Translate into English: 1. kyâ larkiya sukhï haï? 2. kyâ sabziyâ acchî haï? 3. kyâ jaghë chôtï haï? 4. kyà pyâsë ghôrë pïnâ câhtë haï? 5. kyâ âdmï andar kâm kartà hai? 6. kyâ chôtë baccë bâhar jânâ câhtë haï? 7. kyâ larkâ us-kô mântâ hai? 8. kyâ adhyâpak larkë-kô parhàtë haï? 9. kyâ machuâ machliyâ pakarnâ câhtâ hai? 10. kyâ mâ bëtiyô-kô zyâdâ khilâtï hai? 11. kyâ âdmï hâthï nahlânâ câhtâ hai? 12. kyâ bandar vahâ phal khâtâ hai? 13. kyâ aurat dukân-më cïze kharïdnà câhtï hai? 14. kyâ ghôrï kaccï sabziyâ jaldî-së khâtï hai? 15. kyâ yah pyâsâ bail kabhï kabhî tharharnâ câhtâ hai? 16. kyâ kuttâ is baccë-kô bâhar khïctâ hai? 17. kyâ yah imârat ucï hai? 18. kyâ yah ucï imârat hai? 19. kyà âkàs-më tàrë haï? 20. kyâ gahrë samudra-më machliyâ haï? 21. kyâ mâ baccô-kô kahâniyâ sunâtï hai? 22. kyâ mâlï paudhô-par pânï dàltâ hai? 23. kyâ machuâ pul-kë pâs machliyâ pakartâ hai? 24. kyà sahar-kë pïchë jafigal hai? 25. kyà bhûkhë baccë khànë-kë liyë andar ànà câhtë haï? 16.27 [12.1.3] Translate into Hindi: l.Where do they (msc.) come frorr.? 2. When do the children play with other children? 3. Why does the mother buy red shoes for (her) daughter? 4. Why does the bad boy pour water on (his) sister? 5. When does the hunter kill the dreadful animal? 6. Why does the farmer want to beat the monkeys with a stick? 7. Why does the teacher give the student a book to read? 8. From where do the monkeys steal ripe fruits? 9. When does the woman pour water on the plants? 10. When does the traveller come from the city? 11. Where is the coal? 12. Why does the traveller ask for water? 13. When does the washerman send the clothes to the man? 14. Where is the newspaper? 15. Why does the ox stop near the well 16. Where does the servant place the dishes? 17. From where does the washerman bring the clothes? 18. Why does the strong farmer drag the small donkey? 19. When does the servant bring cold water to (his) master? 20. Where does the dreadful tiger live? 16.28 [12.1.4] Translate into English: 1. âdmï kâm kab kartà hai? 2. larkà bhûkhà kyô hai? 3. jânvar jaftgal-sê kab àtë haï? 4. larkë mà-kë liyë lakrï kahà-së lâtë haï? 5. aurat kahâ pakânà câhtï hai? 6. âdmï môtargârï-kë liyë pànï kyô làtà hai? 7. machuâ machliyâ kab pakartâ hai? 8. tum parhnâ kyô câhtë hô? 9. trâm kahâ ruktï hai? 10. bail për-kë nïcë kyô thahartà hai? 11. mâ kab pakâtï hai? 12. aurat nadï-kë pâs kyô rôtï hai? 13. dhôbï kaprë kahâ dhôtâ hai? 14. gârï kyô ruktï hai? 15. sâdhu për-kë nïcë kab baithtë haï? 16. gây ghâs khânâ kab câhtï hai? 17. jânvar kaha-së âtà hai? 18. pitâ sahar-së vàpas kyô àtë haï? 19. dayàlu aurat sàdhùô-kô khànà kab dëtï hai? 20. naukar pathik-kë liyë pànï kahâ-së làtà hai? 16.29 [12.2.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. Can the man work for the large family? 2. The woman can buy vegetables to cook. 3. The boy can cut wood for the mother. 4. Can the traveller speak Hindi with the man? 5. We (msc.) can show the man the river. 6. The gardener can pour water on the plants. 7. The fisherman can catch fish from the river. 8. The farmer can till the field with the plow. 9. The girl can bring the cooking-pot quickly. 10. The mechanic can work under the automobile. 16.30 [12.2.2] Translate into English: 1. dhôbï kaprë kahà dhô saktà hai? 2. larkâ aurat-kë liyë lakrï kab lâ saktâ hai? 3. kyâ machuâ bâzâr-me' bëcnë-kë liyë machliyâ pakar saktâ hai? 4. larkë dusta côr-kô batâ

LESSON 16

121

sakte hat. 5. dayalu aurat b h u k h e a d m l - k o khana de sakti hai. 6. sukhi lark! nayl lal sari k h a r l d sakti hai. 7. h a m H i n d i parh sakte hai. 8. larkiya dosto-ke sath khelne-ke liye bahar ja sakti hai. 9. aurat pakane-ke liye sabziya adml-se kharld sakti hai. 10. larka pul-ke nice tair sakta hai.

16.31 [12.3.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. I do not eat. 2. They (fm.) do not jump. 3. You (fm.) do not understand. 4. We (msc.) do not drink. 5. You (msc. hon.) do not read. 6. I (msc.) do not say. 7. We (fm.) do not swim. 8. She does not play. 9. You (msc.) do not speak. 10. You (hon. fm.) do not run. 11. The dog does not drink. 12. The calves do not eat. 13. The child does not run. 14. The wives do not bring. 15. The hen does not eat. 16. The brother does not give. 17. The elephants do not bathe. 18. The army does not run. 19. The cow does not eat. 20. The sparrows do not fly. 1632 [12.3.2] Translate into English: 1. ham nahl khate. 2. turn nahl khelte. 3. vah nahl daurta. 4. ap nahl samajhte. 5. mal nahl jatl. 6. ap nahl pakate. 7. vah nahl khodtl. 8. ve nahl bolte. 9. ve nahl dekhti. 10. mal nahl parhta. 11. admi nahl calta. 12. larke nahl khelte. 13. billl nahl pitl. 14. larkiya nahl boltl. 15. burhiya nahl sotl. 16. aurte nahl boltl. 17. admi nahl dekhte. 18. patnl nahl samajhtl. 19. betiya nahl sotl. 20. bacca nahl khata. 1633 [12.4.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. He does not want to eat. 2. The boys do not want to send. 3. The mare does not want to drink. 4. I (fm.) do not want to go. 5. The parrots do not want to speak. 6. They (fm.) do not want to eat. 7. The wife does not want to cook. 8. We (msc.) do not want to study. 9. The fish do not want to eat. 10. You (msc.) do not want to send. 1634 [12.4.2] Translate into English: 1. bacce khelna nahl cahte. 2. ham parhna nahf cahte. 3. larkiya bolna nahl cahtl. 4. kutta khana nahl cahta. 5. aurat pakana nahl cahtl. 6. mat khelna nahf cahtl. 7. admi khodna nahl cahta. 8. pita sunna nahl cahte. 9. vah bolna nahl cahtl. 10. turn dena nahl cahte. 16.35 [12.5.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. She is not hungry. 2. The daughters are not good. 3. The shoe is not small. 4. I am not old. 5. The horse is not big. 6. The cat is not bad. 7. You (msc.) are not big. 8. The fox is not false. 9. The children are not thirsty. 10. You (hon. fm.) are not thirsty. 16.36 [12.5.2] Translate into English: 1. ghore burhe nahl. 2. mal dubla nahl. 3. machliya chotl nahl. 4. ve pyasl nahl. 5. gadhe bure nahl. 6. vah pyasl nahl. 7. larkl sukhi nahl. 8. makkhiya chotl nahl. 9. betiya bhukhi nahl. 10. mat nidralu nahl. 16.37 [12.6.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. We (msc.) do not live here. 2. The woman does not speak slowly. 3. You (msc.) do not go out. 4. The women do not cook inside. 5. The elephant does not eat too much. 6. The little child does not come after. 7. The hungry mare does not want to stop. 8. The lean women do not want to eat immediately. 9. The big man does not want to eat quickly. 10. The small children do not want to go out. 16.38 [12.6.2] Translate into English: I. bhal ek-sath nahl khate. 2. aurat andar nahl atl. 3. larke dhlre dhlre nahl bolte. 4.

122

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

gàyé bahut khus nahl. 5. acchl larkiya bahar nahl jatl. 6. bhùkhl aurté dhiré nahf khàtl. 7. ve yaha ana nahì càhti. 8. bare larké andar khélnà nahi càhté. 9. mai kabhl kabhl khélnà nahl càhti. 10. pyasl ghóri dhiré pini nahì càhti. 16.39 [13.1.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. The man does not see them. 2. The women do not hear him. 3. The mothers do not call us. 4. The donkey does not drag the girl. 5. I do not want to feed the horses. 6. The cow does not feed the calves quickly. 7. The child does not seize the cat. 8. We (fan.) do not buy fish. 9. I (fan.) do not bring food. 10. The little woman does not feed the hens. 11. The cat does not eat the fish slowly. 12. The hungry dog does not bite the bullock. 13. The old farmer does not want to tie the cows here. 14. T h e monkeys do not want to eat ripe fruit. 15. They (fan.) do not buy an old picture here. 16. The sister does not want to call in these hungry boys. 17. He does not throw the wood in the fire. 18. We (msc.) do not work in the city. 19. The servant does not point out the road to the traveller. 20. The woman does not hang pictures on the walls. 16.40 [13.1.2] Translate into English: 1. ham bhukhé kutté-kó nahl khilàté. 2. bandar pakke phal nah? khàtà. 3. burhà kisàn bare ghórò-kó nahl calata. 4. ma bhukhé bacco-k5 yaha bulina nahf càhti. 5. acchl aurat chòté larkó-kó zyàdà nahi khilàtl. 6. sukhì àdmì machliya pakarna nahf càhtà. 7. kisàn zamln-mé nahl khódtà. 8. aurat nayl handiyà-mé sabziya pakànà nahl càhti. 9. àdml sikàri-kò bàgh nahl batate. 10. naukar divàr-par tasviré nahl latkàtà. 11. bhukhà kuttà bare baccé-sé khànà nahl curàtà. 12. màlT makàn-ké piche kàm nahl kartà. 13. machuà pul-kè nice machliyà pakarna nahi càhtà. 14. naukar aurat-ké sàth bazàr nahl jàtà. 15. sàdhu ghar-ké sàmné nahl baithte. 16. ghar-kè pàs kuà nahl. 17. dhòbi-ké pàs gadhà nahi. 18. àdml kutumb-ké liyé sahar-mé kàm nahi kartà. 19. kisàrr-ké pàs hai nahi. 20. baccé makàn-ké sàmné nahi hai. 16.41 [13.2.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. Doesn't this small horse want to drink? 2. Doesn't the cat catch that mouse? 3. Doesn't the farmer tie the oxen? 4. Doesn't a father ever understand children? 5. Doesn't the hunter kill the dreadful animal? 6. Isn't there a garden behind the house? 7. Doesn't the farmer till the field with the plow? 8. Doesn't the washerman send the clothes to the man? 9. Aren't there animals in the jungle? 10. Doesn't the woman cook these vegetables? 16.42 [13.2.2] Translate into English: 1. kyà sabziyà acchl nahl? 2. kyà àdml andar kàm nahì kartà? 3. kyà nadi-mé machliyà nahl hai? 4. kyà ghòrà plnà nahì càhtà? 5. kyà àkàs-mè tàrè nahi? 6. kyà mà baccò-kó kahàniyà nahl sunàtl? 7. kyà aurat bàzàr-mé cìze kharìdnà nahl càhti? 8. kyà machuà nadl-sé machliyà nahl lata? 9. kyà méz-par kitàb nahi? 10. kyà bacca bhùkhà nahi? 16.43 [13.3.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. When doesn't a child play with other children? 2. Why doesn't the traveller ask for water? 3. When doesn't a father kiss (his) children? 4. Why doesn't the gardener pour water on the plants? 5. Why doesn't the hunter kill the dreadful animal? 6. From where doesn't the monkey steal ripe fruit? 7. Why doesn't the farmer come from the field? 8. When doesn't a dog sleep? 9. Why doesn't the washerman wash the clothes for the man? 10. When doesn't the teacher give the student a book to read?

LESSON

16

123

16.44 | 13.3.2 | Translate into English: 1. admi motargari-ke liye pan! kyo nahf lata? 2. bacca bhukha kab nahl? 3. bail kaha nahi sota? 4. dayalu aurat sadhu-ko khana kab nahi detl? 5. dhobl kapre kyo nahi lata? 6. ut ghas khane-ke liye kab nahi thaharta? 7. gar! kyo nahi ruktl? 8. larka kue-se kyo vapas nahi ata? 9. bacce ghar-me kyo nahi hal? 10. gay per-ke pas kyo nahi hai? 16.45 [13.4.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. The boy cannot bring the heavy wood. 2. Can't the washerman send the man the clothes? 3. Why can't the hunter kill the dreadful animal? 4. The servant cannot cut the wood for the woman. 5. The gardener cannot pour water on the plants. 6. The mechanic cannot work under the automobile. 7. The fisherman cannot catch fish from the river. 8. Can't the woman speak Hindi? 9. The monkey cannot seize the ripe fruit. 10. The woman cannot hang pictures on the walls. 16.46 [13.4.2] Translate into English: 1. aurat kutumb-ke liye nahf paka sakti. 2. machua sahar-ko machliya nahf la sakta. 3. admi motargari-ke liye pan! nahi la sakta. 4. turn pathik-ko sarak kyo nahf bata sakte? 5. kisan chote hal-se khet nahf jot sakta. 6. mal ap-ke sath bazar nahi ja sakti. 7. ma baccd-ko kahaniya nahi suna sakti. 8. aurat dhdne-ke liye kapre talab-ko nahi la sakti. 9. cor bachre-ko nahf cura sakta. 10. dhobl admi-ke liye kapre kyo nahi dho sakta? 16.47 [13.5.4] Translate into Hindi: 1. Where is your automobile? 2. Our father is a farmer. 3. The children play in your ox-cart. 4. My sisters want to play near the tank. 5. Is this house yours? 6. Your answers are not exact. 7. The servant does not know my friend. 8. My brothers play in the street. 9. Why does your teacher ask difficult questions? 10. Our cat wants to drink warm milk. 11. The mechanic does not work under my automobile. 12. The dog wants to bite your brother. 13. This is not my house. 14. Is your father at home? 15. I cannot speak Hindi with your mother. 16. Your ox grazes in my garden. 17. Is that boy your brother? 18. Please bring my hat. 19. Why do you (hon.) want to speak with my father? 20. The good boy gives our brothers fruit. 16.48 [13.5.5] Translate into English: 1. hamara ghar us gall-me hai. 2. men motaigari-ke liye panl laiye. 3. tumhari gay hamare khet-me kyo cartl hai? 4. tumhari bahne men bahan-ke sath bolna cahti hai. 5. yah mera makan hai. 6. yah makan mera hai. 7. kya tumhara bap hamare bap-ko janta hai? 8. men topi laiye. 9. kya men motargarl ghar-ke samne hai? 10. tumhara naukar mujhe nahi janta. 11. mal tumhare dosto-ke sath nahi bol sakta. 12. hamare bail naye pul-ke nice carte hai. 13. dayalu aurat tumhari bhukhi gay-ko ghas deti hai. 14. vah tumhara khet nahf hai. 15. bahan hamare kue-se panl vapas lati hai. 16. vah dukan men hai. 17. karigar tumhari motargari-ke nice kam karna nahi cahta. 18. tumhare pita Sahar-ko kab ate hai. 19. mera bhai khelne-ke liye bahar jana nahi cahta. 20. kya tumhara bap dukandar hai? 16.49 [142.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. His automobile is in front of the house. 2. The father gives fruit to the boy's brother. 3. The children walk behind the washerman's donkey. 4. The boy brings water fer your automobile. 5. The woman wants to buy all kinds of things. 6. Is his father a mechanic? 7. Why does the boy beat the farmer's horse with a stick? 8. Mother goes to the city

124

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

with the little boy's sister. 9. This is his hat. 10. The big cow eats vegetables in the old farmer's field. 11. Can the man work for (his) brother's big family? 12. Why does the traveller want to speak in Hindi with your servant? 13. Their oxen are near the field. 14. The rich man's new automobile is near the station. 15. The mechanic works under your father's automobile. 16. I (msc.) cannot answer your question. 17. The traveller's baggage is light. 18. Why doesn't the gardener pour water on the garden's plants? 19. Your boy brings wood for the old woman. 20. The servant cannot bring their hats. 21. Please place food on the hungry man's plate. 22. The woman gives grass to the old man's hungry cow. 23. Why doesn't the washerman wash the man's old clothes? 24. What's your profession? 25. The servant catches the thief in our father's house. 16.50 [14.2.3] Translate into English: 1. us-kë pitâ sahar-më kâm kartë haï. 2. larkâ pathik-kl âg-kë liyë lakrï lâtâ hai. 3. aurat bâzâr-më har tarah-kï cîzë kharidtï hai. 4. un-kâ bhâî bail-kô për-kë nîcë bâdhtâ hai. 5. baccâ për-kï côtï-par carhnâ câhtâ hai. 6. ham hôtal-kë kamrë-mê côr-kô pakartë haï. 7. âp-kï môtargârï kahâ hai? 8. naukar ghar-kl chat-par palang rakhtâ hai. 9. larkâ nâïkï dukàn-kô dhlrê dhîrë jâtâ hai. 10. kyâ âp-kâ naukar âg-kë lakrï la saktâ hai? 11. bandar hôtal-kï chat-par khëltë haï. 12. larkâ për-kï sâkhâ-par baithtâ hai. 13. mal kuë-kâ pânî pînâ câhtâ hu. 14. baccë dhôbï-kë gadhë-kë pïchë daurtë haï. 15. âp-kâ kâni kyâ hai? 16. pathik-kâ sâmân kamrë-mê rakhiyë. 17. bâg-kë pêrô-kë bahut pakkë phal haï. 18. bâzâr-kî dukânô-me kharïdnë-kë liyë har tarah-kï cïze haï. 19. sâdhù mandir-kë për-kë nïcë baithtë haï. 20. larkâ tumhârï môtargàrï-kë liyë kahâ-së pânï la saktâ hai? 21. jâfigal-më har tarah-kë jânvar haï. 22. us âdmï-kâ pësâ kyâ hai? 23. âp-kâ ghar kahâ hai? 24. âdmï mandïr-kë kuë-së pânï pïtà hai. 25. vë tumhârï mâ-kë liyë lakrï kyô nahï lâtï? 16.51 [14.3.1] Translate into Hindi: 1. The children want to run after you. 2. The servant places food in front of me. 3. Can he speak Hindi with you? 4. The automobile stops in front of me. 5. The man walks after me. 6. I don't have enough money. 7. The good boy brings drinking water for us. 8. The traveller wants to speak English with us. 9. The girl brings apples for you from the garden. 10. The little monkeys are near me. 16.52 [14.3.2] Translate into English: 1. dhôbï hamârë liyë kaprë dhôtâ hai. 2. larkâ kue-së pïnë-kâ pânï hamârë liyë lâtâ hai. 3. kyâ tumhàrë pâs môtargârï hai? 4. sâdhû hamârë sâmnë thahartë haï. 5. kyâ vah tumhârë sâth Hindi bol saktâ hai? 6. kuttâ mërë pïchë daurtâ hai. 7. kyâ tumhàrë pâs khànâ kharïdnë-kë liyë kâfï paisë haï? 8. kyâ àp mërë sâth sahar-kô â saktï haï? 9. mërë pâs ghôrâ nahf hai. 10. hamârë liyë hôtal-së khânâ lâiyë. 16.53 [14.4.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. The gardener may work in front of the house. 2. The hunter may kill the animal in the jungle. 3. We may go to the city on Tuesday. 4. I may tell stories to the children. 5. The washerman may wash the clothes for the man on Monday. 6. The little children may want to play on the roof on Sunday. 7. The woman may tie the cow with the rope. 8. The fisherman may bring fish for us on Wednesday. 9. You may rest under the tree. 10. The holy man may sit in front of the temple. 11. The servant may go to the bazaar with the woman on Thursday. 12. He may be able to speak in Hindi with you. 13.

LESSON

125

16

Y o u r teacher may ask difficult questions. 14. I may he able to drive the a u t o m o b i l e . 15. T h e m a n may b r i n g d r i n k i n g water to the traveller. 1 6 . 5 4 114.4.3 | T r a n s l a t e into 1. sayad b u r h à m a c h u a

English:

m a c h l i y a pakar sake. 2. sàyad adhyàpak

t u m h à r é sath

Hindi

bòlna càhé. 3 . sayad barhal jangal-sé l a k r l laé. 4 . sayad m a i somvar-kó àp-ké sath sahar j à u . 5. sayad dhòbì g u r u v a r - k ó k a p r é la sakè. 6. sayad sikàri b h a y a n a k b à g h - k ó

mar

saké. 7. sàyad vidyarthi t u m h à r é sath A n g r é z l - m é bòlnè-ké liyé sukravàr-kó à n à

càhé.

8. sàyad m a l i paudhò-par p a n ! dale. 9 . sàyad h à m hótal-ké restòrent-mé k h à n é - k è

liyé

àp-ké sàth sanivàr-kó jàé. 10. sàyad k à r i g a r mòtargàri-ké nlcé k à m k a r saké. 11. sàyad d u k à n d à r a u r a t - k ó h a r t a r a h - k l elzé bécé. 12. sayad kisàn maflgal-kò khét jote. 13. sàyad a u r a t b ù r h é àdmi-sé sabziyà k h a r i d é .

14. sàyad n a u k a r restòrent-sé h a m à r é liyé k h à n à

làé. 15. sàyad h a m b u d h v à r - k ó jaftgal-sé àp-ké liyé lakri làé.

16.55 [15.1.2] Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e hunters will kill m a n y a n i m a l s in t h e j u n g l e . 2. W e ( m s c . ) will g o to t h e city w i t h you. 3 . T h e f i s h e r m a n will be able to catch big fish in that river. 4. T h e

servant

will b r i n g cold w a t e r f o r the traveller. 5 . T h e m o t h e r will tell the children g o o d stories. 6. W h e n will the f a r m e r w o r k u n d e r t h e tree? 7. W i l l the holy m a n sit in f r o n t o f t h e t e m p l e today? 8 . T h e w a s h e r m a n will w a n t to wash the m a n ' s old clothes. 9 . T h e boy will b r i n g t h e heavy w o o d f o r t h e old w o m a n . 10. W i l l she be able to speak in H i n d i w i t h you?

11. I ( m s c . )

will be able to g o to the b a z a a r with you t o n i g h t . 12.

The

w o m a n will w a n t to buy all k i n d s o f t h i n g s . 13. W h e n will father c o m e b a c k f r o m t h e city? 14. T h e c o w will g r a z e near t h e river. 15. W i l l the servants be able to u n d e r s t a n d English?

16.56 [15.13] Translate Into English: 1. m a i à j ' r à t n a h l parh s a k u g à . 2 . k y à vidyàrthl nàgari parh sakégà? 3 . méré mangal-kò

restòrent-mé

khàégà.

4. k y à

tum

àj

bàg-mé

kàm

kar

sakógé?

màtà'pità 5.

barhal

brihaspat-kò per k à t n à c a h é g à . 6 . k y à à p l u k r a v à r - k ó ham-sé milné-ké liyé à é g l ? 7 . m a i àdmiyó-sé H i n d l - m e b ó l ù g à . 8 . sikàri b h a y a n a k b à g h - k ó k a b m à r é g é ? 9. n a u k a r AflgrézT s a m a j h sakégà. 10. k y à k a m z ò r k i s à n c h ò t é hal-sé baré k h é t - k ó jót sakégà? 11. a d h y a p a k à j ham-sé m u s k i l savàl p ù c h é g é . 12. d h ò b ì gadhé-ké plché calégà. 13. k y à d h ó b l à j ' r à t k a p r é làégà? 14. h à t h ! jaflgal-sé n a d i - k ó b h à r l kàth k h l c é g à . 15. m a c h u à sahar-mé béenéké liyé m a c h l i y à lénà c à h é g à .

16.57 [15.2.4] Translate into Hindi: 1. F a t h e r will g i v e m o n e y to b u y c a n d y . 2 . T h e c o w m a y be under the tree. 3 . T h e w o m a n will t a k e the wood f r o m t h e g o o d boy. 4. T h e policeman will take all k i n d s o f t h i n g s f r o m the t h i e f . 5. I m a y be in t h e office today. 6. T h e well will be n e a r

the

fields. 7. W h e n will ( m y ) f r i e n d return m y b o o k s ? 8. T h e k i n d w o m a n m a y g i v e f o o d to the poor m a n . 9 . T h e t h i e f will t a k e t h e watch f r o m t h e rich m a n . 10. T h e washerm a n will t a k e the clothes f r o m t h e servant. 11. T h e m o t h e r will give w a r m m i l k t o t h e child. 12. T h e old m a n will have b o o k s . 13. T h e w a s h e r m a n may take the clothes to wash today. 14. W h e n will you ( f m . ) a n s w e r m y questions? 15. T h e w o m a n will t a k e the

flower

f r o m h e r d a u g h t e r . 16. W h y will the m a n take candy f r o m little c h i l d r e n ?

17. I m a y give you t h e n e w s p a p e r .

18. M o t h e r will give the h u n g r y traveller

19. W i l l the boy have a d o g ? 2 0 . I m a y t a k e a book f r o m you tonight.

bread.

126

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

16.58 [15.2.51 Translate into English: I. mere bail-kl gardan-par ék ghanta hógà. 2. turn baccé-kò mithayl kab vapas dòge. 3. sàyad mai àp-kó akhbàr dù. 4. pità larkl-kó ék rumai dégé. 5. bacca mà-sé dudh-kà pyàlà léga. 6. sayad kuttà baccé-sé mithàyi le. 7. sipàhl dhani àdml-kò gharl vàpas dégà. 8. vah daftar-mé kab hógà? 9. sàyad vah àj'ràt sahar-me ho. 10. barhal jafigal-sé lakrl léga. II. chótl larkl pità-kó phùl degì. 12. sayad mai méz-sé thàlé lu. 13. sipàhl naukarò-kó hukam dégà. 14. naukar baccé-sé sakkar léga. 15. larkà pyàsé pathik-kó thandé pànl-kà pyàlà dégà. 16. sàyad mal kal ghar-mé hòu. 17. naukar àdmi-kó hótal-mé kamrà batàégà. 18. pità baccó-kó har tarah-kl elzé dégé. 19. sayad tum vidyàrthl-kò kàgaz dógé. 20. larkà kué-sé plné-kà pani léga. 16.59 [15.3.3] Translate into Hindi: 1. I (msc.) like mangoes. 2. The servant prefers to sleep. 3. The children prefer cats to dogs. 4. Dogs prefer bones. 5. The man prefers to work in the factory. 6. We (msc.) prefer mangoes to apples. 7. Why will you (hon. msc.) prefer to eat in a restaurant? 8. Cows prefer grass. 9. The traveller prefers drinking water. 10. I prefer warm water to cold water for washing. 11. The father likes to work for (his) family. 12. The woman prefers to go to the city by automobile. 13. Monkeys like to eat sweet fruits. 14. Why do you (hon. msc.) prefer to speak in Hindi? 15. We (msc.) prefer playing to working. 16. Cats like to drink milk. 17. The student prefers studying Hindi to studying English. 18. They (msc.) prefer to stay in the hotel to going to the city. 19. The little children like to go to the city with (their) father. 20. The traveller will prefer travelling to remaining at home. 16.60 [15.3.4] Translate into English: 1. bacca kuttò-kò pasand kartà hai. 2. pità akhbàr parhnà zyàdà pasand karté hai. 3. pathik chóté kamré-sé hòtal-kà bara kamrà zyàdà pasand karégà. 4. ham khànà pasand karté hai. 5. mà ghar-mé rahnà zyàdà pasand kart! hai. 6. burhà kisan khét-mé kàm karné-sé pér-ké nlcè àràm karnà zyàdà pasand karégà. 7. machliyà pànl pasand kart! hai. 8. mal nadl-mé tairné-sé h5tal-mé àràm karnà zyàdà pasand kartl hu. 9. larkl dòsto-ké sàth bólnà zyàdà pasand kartl hai. 10. larké tairnà pasand karté hai. 11. acchà vidyàrthl dòstó-ké sàth khélné-sé parhnà zyàdà pasand karégà. 12. gay nadl-ké pàs carnà zyadà pasand kart! hai. 13. ham mòtargàrl-sé safar karnà pasand karté hai. 14. larkiyà slnà pasand kart! hai. 15. mà safar karné-sé ghar-mé rahnà zyadà pasand kartl hai. 16. machuà sahar-mé machliyà bécnà zyàdà pasand kartà hai. 17. mal kué-kà pani pina zyàdà pasand karùgà. 18. kuttà màlik-ké sàth tairnà pasand kartà hai. 19. mali paudhópar pani dàlné-se pér-ké nìcé baithnà zyàdà pasand kartà hai. 20. sàp dùdh pasand karté hai.

Lesson 17 17.1 I need to go. mujhe jana cahiyc. The student needs to study. vidyarthi-ko parhna cahiyc. naukar-ko hamarc jane-ke liye sab kuch The servant ought to prepare everything for our departure. taiyar karna cahiyc. The woman should cook in the kitchen. aurat-ko rasoighar-me pakana cahiyc. The girl ought to bring water from the well. larki-ko kue-se pan! lana cahiyc. The teacher should speak Hindi. adhyipak-ko Hindi bolna cahiyc. This section illustrates the Hindi equivalent to the English verbal phrases introduced by the words ought to, should or needs to followed by a verb. These phrases are translated into Hindi by placing the subject of the English sentence in the object form before the postposition -ko and the verb in the infinitive form before cahiyc. 17.1.1 I have to go. mujhc jana haL vidyarthi-ko parhna haL The student has to study. naukar-ko hamarc jane-kc liye sab kuch The servant has to prepare everything for taiyar karna haL our departure. aurat-ko rasoighar-me pakana haL The woman has to cook in the kitchen. larki-ko kuc-se pan! lana hai. The girl must bring water from the well. vidyarthi-ko Hindi bolna haL The student must speak Hindi. This section illustrates the Hindi equivalent to the English verbal phrases introduced by the words have to, has to or must followed by a verb. The construction in identical with the one described in section 17.1 above, with the exception that cahiyc is replaced by the third person, singular, present tense of hona, hai, which remains unchanged. The construction indicates an inner compulsion upon the actor to perform the action expressed by the infinitive. Compare the construction described in the following section. 17.12 mujhe jana parta hai. I have to go. vidyarthi-ko parhna parta haL The student has to study. naukar-ko hamarc janc-ke liye sab kuch The servant has to prepare everything for taiyar karna parta haL our departure. aurat-ko rasoighar-me pakana parta hai. The woman must cook in the kitchen. vidyarthi-ko Hindi bolna parta haL The student must speak Hindi. 127

128

HINDI G R A M M A * AND READER

The construction illustrated in this section is identical with that described in section 17.1.1, above, with the exception that hai is replaced by the third person, singular, present tense of parna fall, parta hai, which remains unchanged. The construction indicates a compulsion from without on the actor to perform the action expressed by the infinitive. Compare 17.1.1, above. 17.13 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. naukar-ko pathik-ko pan! dena cahiye. 2. sikari-ko bhayanak janvar marna hai. 3. ham-ko bazar jana parta hai. 4. dhobl-ko kapre dhona cahiye. 5. pita-ko bazar-se larkl-ke liye am lana hai. 6. naukar-ko hamare liye bistar taiyar karna parta hai. 7. larke-ko aurat-ke liye lakrl lana cahiye. 8. vidyarthiyo-ko kitab parhna hai. 9. dhobl-ko kapre saf karna hai. 10. ham-ko Hindi-me bolna cahiye. 11. barhal-ko lakrl katna hai. 12. pyase bail-ko panl pina parta hai. 13. bacco-ko nahana cahiye. 14. adml-ko kutumb-ke liye kam karna hai. 15. kisan-ko aj khet-me kam karna parta hai. 16. naukar-ko thanda panl lana cahiye. 17. kya tum-ko jana hai? 18. bhukhe machue-ko aj machliya pakarna parta hai. 19. admi-ko paise vapas dena parta hai. 20. mall-ko paudho-par panl dalna cahiye. 17.1.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: (Note: Translate the sentences containing "must" or "have to" with either one of the constructions described in 17.1.1 and 17.1.2.) 1. I should eat this apple. 2. Do you have to work today? 3. Must you go? 4. The thirsty child needs to drink milk. 5. The washerman must bring back the clothes tonight. 6. The woman has to go to the well to bring back water. 7. We ought to stay in the house. 8. Does mother have to cook in the kitchen? 9. You must come to see us tomorrow. 10. The poor man needs to work. 11. Why must you go to the office? 12. The men have to work in the factory. 13. The old farmer needs to rest under the wide tree. 14. The woman must take the food to (her) husband. 15. You should rest today. 16. You should speak in Hindi with me. 17. The thirsty traveller needs cold water to drink. 18. When do you have to come back from the bazaar? 19. Why do you need to go? 20. The traveller needs hot water for bathing. 17.2 ap-ko kya cahiye? What do you need? mujhe ek admi madad dene-ke liye cihiye. I need a man to help (me.) aurat-ko taza panl cahiye. The woman needs fresh water, ap-ko kitne paise cahiye? How much money do you need? kisan-k5 mazduro-ki madad cihiye. The farmer needs the help of workers, pita-ko aram karne-ke liye thora vakt The father needs a little time for rest, cahiye. ma-ko khana pakane-ke liye ag cahiye. The mother needs fire to cook the food, bacce-ke naye jute cahiye. The child needs new shoes, vidyirthl-ko bahut kitibe cahiye. The student needs many books, choti Iarkl-ko khelne-ke liye guriya cahiye. The little girl needs dolls to play with. Compare this construction with that described in section 17.1. Here, instead of an infinitive, a noun is the subject of cahiye. When the noun is plural, the final vowel of cahiye is nasalized—e.g., cahiye. REMARKS: ( 1 ) This construction also corresponds to the English to want, meaning to need, to lack, to require.

LESSON

17

129

(2) Vocabulary notes: aram (a) rest, aram karna to rest (trans.), guri (!) doll, madad (i) help, assistance, [-ko] madad dena to help, [-ki] madad karna to help, mazdur ( a ) worker, laborer. 17.2.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. aurat-ko ag-ke liye lakri cahiye. 2. ham-ko aj mazdur-ki madad cahiye. 3. kisan-ko khet jotne-ke liye bara hal cahiye. 4. kya ap-ko men madad cahiye? 5. mujhe motargarl calane-ke liye admi cahiye. 6. pathik-ko sarak batane-ke liye admi cahiye. 7. kya ap-ko kuch cahiye? 8. tum-ko meri madad kyo cahiye? 9. naukar-ko aj mujhe milna kyo cahiye? 10. aurat-ko bazar-me khana kharidne-ke liye paise cahiye. 17.2.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. When does a man need friends? 2. We need fresh water. 3. I need this ox-cart today. 4. Why do you need the newspaper now? 5. Do you need anything for your travel? 6. The woman needs wood for the fire this morning. 7. Do you need the clean clothes now? 8. Why do you need to see me tomorrow? 9. I need four gardeners for two days. 10. T h e traveller needs warm water for (his) bath. 173 koi admi makàn-ke piche hai. Some man is behind the house. köi makin-ke piche hai. Someone is behind the house. koi bacca per-kè nice hai. kòl per-ke nice hai.

Some child is under the tree. Someone is under the tree.

koi larki pani läegä. koi pini läegä.

Some boy will bring water. Someone will bring water.

koi kuttä andar änä cähtä hai. köi andar änä cähtä hai.

Some dog wants to come in. Someone wants to come in.

koi aurat küe-ke pis hai. köi kue-ke pis hai.

Some woman is beside the well. Someone is beside the well.

koi larki kapre dhöigi. köi kapre dhöegi.

Some girl will wash the clothes. Someone will wash the clothes.

kyä köi aurat pakänä cihtl hai? kyä köi pakänä cihti hai?

Does any woman want to cook? Does anyone want to cook?

kyä köi beti ghar-me rahnä cähti hai? kyi köi ghar-me rahnä cihtì hai?

Does any daughter want to remain at home? Does anyone want to remain at home?

köi kitäb mez-par hai. köi ciz mèz-par hai.

Some book is on the table. Something is on the table.

köi m£z kone-mè hai. köi d z konè-mè hai.

Some table is in the corner. Something is in the corner.

kyä koi giri stesin-mè hai? kyä köi a z stesan-mè hai?

Is any train in the station? Is anything in the station?

kyä köi makän sarak-par hai? kyä köi ciz sarak-par hai?

Is any house along the road? Is anything along the road?

130

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

Sections 17.3 to 17.3.3 are concerned with the indefinite adjectives and pronouns. This section, 17.3, illustrates the nominative singular of the indefinitive adjective, some, any and the indefinite adjective, some, any and the indefinitive pronouns, someone, anyone. In each of the pairs of sentences given the first illustrates the adjective and the second the pronoun. The form, koi, serves to translate both adjective and pronoun, masculine and feminine. R E M A R K S : koi ciz translates English something.

173.1

mai kisi admi-ki ivaz sunta hu. mai kisi-ki i v i z sunti hu.

1 hear some man's voice. I hear someone's voice. M

mai kisi baccè-kò pèr-kè nicè dèkhti hu. mai kisi-ko per-kè nice dèkhti hu.

I see some child under the tree. I see someone under the tree.

mai kisi larkè-sè pani luga. mai kisi-sè pani luga.

I will take water from some boy. I will take water from someone.

mai kisi kuttè-kò khan! dugi. mai kisi-kó khàna dugi.

I will give food to some dog. I will give food to someone.

mai kisi aurat-sc sabziya kharidti hu. m a i kisi-sc sabziya kharidti hu.

I buy vegetables from some woman. I buy vegetables from someone.

mai kisi larki-kò batiuga. mai kisi-kò batiugi.

I will tell some girl. I will tell someone.

larki kisi larki-kè sàth khelna nahi cihti. larki kisi-kè sith khelna nahi cihti.

The boy does not want to play with any girl. The boy does not want to play with anyone.

kutti kisi billi-ki dudh piti hai. kutti kisi-ki dùdh piti hai.

The dog drinks some cat's milk. The dog drinks someone's milk.

larki kisi mèz-par khini rakhtì haL larki kisi ciz-par khini rakhtì hai.

The girl places the food on some table. The girl places the food on something.

mai koi kitib parhti hu. mai koi ciz parhti hu.

I read some book. I read something.

This section illustrates the object singular form, kisi, of the indefinite objective and pronoun. R E M A R K S : (1) See sentences 19 and 20 and note that, when the noun modified by the adjective is not governed by a postposition and has, therefore, the subject form, the indefinite adjective also has the subject form. (2) avaz (I) voice, sound.

173.2

koi idmi makin-ke piche hai. koi log makin-ke piche hai.

Some men are behind the house, Some people are behind the house.

koi baccc pèr-kè nice hai. koi log per-kè nice hai.

Some children are under the tree. Some people are under the tree.

LESSON 17

koi larkiya pan! lacgi. koi log panl lacgi.

S o m e girls will bring water.

koi koi koi koi kyl

S o m e w o m e n are beside the well.

131

S o m e people will bring water.

aurte kue-ke pas hai. larkiya kapre dhoegi. aurte j>akana cahti hai. gariyi stcsan-mc hai. sarak-par koi makan hai?

S o m e girls will wash the clothes. S o m e w o m e n want to cook. S o m e trains are in the station. Are there any houses along the road?

T h i s section a n d the following illustrate the subject and object plural f o r m s of the indefinite adjective. T h e pronoun rarely occurs in the plural. T o translate the plural of the indefinitive p r o n o u n a w o r d such as log people is used with the adjective. See the second sentence in each of the first three sets of sentences.

1733 m a i köi bacco-kö per-kè nice d è k h t i hü. tf ff m a i koi lögo-kö pcr-kc nice d e k h t ä h u . m a i k ö i larko-sè p a n i l ü g ä . m a i k ö i lögö-sc p a n i l u g i . m a i köi kuttö-kö k h ä n ä d u g à . m a i köi aurtö-se sabziya k h a r i d ü g ä . larkä k ö i larkiyö-ke s i t h k h c b i i nahi cähtä. m a l k ö i kitäbe p a r h t ä h u . larki k ö i mèzo-jpar k h ä n ä r a k h t i haL yätri k ö i gäriyö-me jäte h a i .

173.4

I see some children under the tree. I see some people under the tree. I will take water from some boys. I will take water from some people. I will give food to some dogs. I will buy vegetables from some women. The boy does not want to play with some girls. I read some books. The girl places the food on some tables. The travellers go into some trains.

There isn't any man behind the house. There's no one behind the house. mez-pär köi k i t i b natu. There isn't any book on the table. mez-par köi ciz natu*. There isn't anything on the table. köi ciz mez-par nahi. Nothing's on the table. m a l kisi ädmi-ki ä v ä z n a h f s u n t i . I do not hear any man's voice. m a i kisi-ki ä v i z nahT s u n t i . I do not hear anyone's voice. m a i k ö i kitäb nahi p a r h t ä . 1 do not read any book. mal köi d z n a h ! parhtä. I do not read anything. m a k ä n - k e piche k ö i lög n a l u . There aren't any people behind the house. köi gäriya stesän-me nahi. There are no trains in the station. m a l köi aurto-se sabziyä n a l u k h a r i d ü g ä . I will not buy vegetables from any women. This section illustrates the negative of the constructions given in sections 173 to 17.3.3, translating English no, not any. m ä k ä n - k e piche k ö i ä d m i

nahi.

m a k ä n - k e piche k ö i n a h i .

17.4

kuch kuch kuch kuch kuch

admi makan-ke plche hai. bacce pero-ke nice hai. larke pani laege. aurte kue-ke pas hai. larkiyi kapre dhocgi.

Some men are behind the house, Some children are under the trees, Several boys will bring water, Some women are beside the well, Some girls will wash the clothes.

HINDI GRAMMAR

132

AND

READER

Several women want to cook,

kuch aurte pakânâ câhtï haï. kuch kitâbë mëz-kë nice haï.

Several books are under the table,

kuch gâriyâ stësan-më haï.

Some trains are in the station,

kyâ sarak-par kuch makân haï?

Are there several houses along the road?

This section and 17.4.1, following, illustrate kuch, which, when functioning as an adjective modifying a plural noun, translates English some, several. R E M A R K S : kuch, when employed in the singular as an indefinite pronoun, referring to an inanimate thing, or as an adjective, translates English something, anything, some, any. T h e subject and object forms are identical, kuch in its function as a pronoun never appears before a postposition. COMPARE: kyâ mëz-par kuch hai?

Is there anything on the table?

vidyarthl kuch jântâ hai.

T h e student knows something,

kuc-me kuch hai.

There is something in the well,

maï kuch garm dûdh pïnâ câhti hû.

I want to drink some warm milk,

kyl ghar-me kuch khânâ hai?

Is there any food in the house?

17.4.1 maï kuch baccô-kô nadï-kë kinirë-par

I see some children on the bank of the river,

dëkhtâ hû. maï kuch larkô-së pânï lug!.

I will take water from several boys.

mai kuch kutto-kô khânâ duga.

I will give food to several dogs.

maï kuch aurto-së sabziyâ kharïdugâ.

I will buy vegetables from some women.

maï kuch kitâbë parhtâ hu.

I read several books.

larkï kuch mëzo-par khânâ rakhtï hai.

T h e girl places the food on some tables.

yâtrî kuch gâriyo-më jâtë haï.

T h e travellers go into several trains.

17.4.2 Exercise 1. Translate into English. 1. kyâ aurtë kisî dukân-më kaprâ kharîdnâ câhti hai? 2. kôî paksî sâkhâ-par baithtë haï. 3. kuch paksî sâkhâ-par baithtë haï. 4. sarak-par kuch makân haï. 5. adhyâpak mujh-së kuch savâl puchtë haï. 6. ham kuch jânvar pul-kë nice dêkhtë haï. 7. kôî dublî gâyë për-kë nîcë àràm kartl haï. 8. për-kë nïcë kuch pakkë phal haï. 9. kyâ khët-më kôî kisân haï?

10. kôî sâdhû nadî-kë sâmnë haï. 11. kisân bailô-kô khânë-kë liyë kuch ghâs

dëtâ hai. 12. sikârï kisî jânvar-kô jangal-më mârtâ hai. 13. kisï mëz-kô bâhar lâiyë. 14. ùcï imârat-kë sâmnë kôî chôtï dukânë haï. 15. bàzâr-më kuch chôtî dukâne haï. 17.4.3 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. Is anyone at home? 2. Can the traveller speak English with anyone? 3. There are several good rooms in the hotel. 4. Please bring some water for my automobile. 5. Some farmer will rest under the tree. 6. Is there any coal in the ground? 7. T h e big dog may bite someone. 8. Is there any well near here? 9. Please bring me some well-water1. 10. Someone is outside. 11. T h e thirsty bullock does not want to eat anything. 12. Something is behind the door. 13. Several newspapers are on the table. 14. Some newspaper is on the table. 15. Can anyone speak in Hindi with me? 17.5 Text 1. dô dôstô-kï bâteït. Translate into English. Answer the questions in Hindi: Râm Prasad

1

Manikpur 2 gâv-me rahtâ hai. us-kë pâs ëk bhaïs

3

hai. a b 4 vah ëk

gây-bhï 5 kharîdnâ câhtâ hai. sômvâr 6 -kô vah sahar-kî bâzâr-më gây kharidnë-kô hai. vahâ-par

8

vah apnë 9 ëk purânë

10

dôst Sarju n - k ô miltâ

12

hai.

7

jâtâ

LESSON

R a m Prasad kahtâ hai: B h â î

17

Sarju, R â m R a m .

,:l

Sarjû! Râm Râm, Bhâî. mërl larkî-kï s â d î j û n câhtâ hù. âj * kal

tô

17

sab kuch

,s

133

14

turn kahâ jâtc hô?

10

-më hai. mai us-kë liyë cîzë kharïdnà

bahut m a h â g â h a i . mai kuch

111

karz -- lënâ câhtâ hu. kyà turn mërî madad R â m Prasad: Sarju, tumhârl tarai:

is sâl

Sarju: hamàrî tarai tô is sâl sukhâ

f a s a l - 0 kaisï

hai. gëhu

28

29

rupayâ

kar saktë hô? hai?

-kl fasal acchî nahT. mai tô

30

is sâl

sâdî nahï karnâ câhtâ hù. larkï-kî mâ sâdî isl 3 1 sâl karnâ câhtî hai. kyà k a r u ? kahâ jâû? R â m Prasad: k y â 3 - jaldï Sarjû; larkî-kï umar aisâ

38

ghar

nahî hôtâ

hai, Bhâî? abhî

33

zyâdâ nahT, par

42

tô tumhârl larkî chôtî hai.

34

vah barï m â l û m parti 3 7 hai. larkâ acchâ hai.

30

phir 4 0 milnâ muskil

39

R â m Prasad: sarkâr 45

35

41

hai.

tô is sâl sab-kô nayê hal

43

dënà câhtî hai. kyà is-së kôî f â y d à 4 4

?

Sarjû: hal acchë haï. par ham-lôg

48

un-kô istëmàl

47

karnâ abhî nahï jàntë.

R a m Prasad: kyâ sarkâr-kê âdmï khët-me nahï âtë? tum-kô kaun sikhâtâ

49

48

nayë halô-kâ istëmàl

hai?

Sarjû: sarkâr-kâ â d m ï kabhï k a b h ï 5 0 âtà hai a u r 5 1 ham-lôgS-kô nayê halô-kâ istëmàl sikhâtâ hai. par is sàl Bhagvàn bud

86

-hï 6 3 rûthë 5 4 haï. b à d a l 5 5 âtë haï, par pànï ëk

82

nahT girtâ.

R â m Prasâd: hamàrî taraf tô b à r i s 8 7 acchï hai, aur gëhu c a n à 8 8 k h ù b 5 9 acchë haï. Dhartï

Màtâ60

dhurhtà82

-kï k r i p à 6 1

hai. mërï larkî tô skûl jâtï hai. maï-bhî

hu. sàdï-kï jaldï nahT hai. is b ï c - m ? 8 3

anâj94

larkâ

jamâ k a r t â 6 8

hu.

g a h n ë 8 8 us-kï n à n ï 8 7 dëgï. Bhagvàn-kï kripà hai. mujhë tô Sàdï-kï f i k r 8 8 nahï. Sarjû: Bhâî, mêrî musîbat

-bhï isï sàl-kï hai. Galigâ

89

70

-kï nayï nahar

pàs âtî hai. sarkar ëk d a f t a r 7 2 -bhï mërë gâv-më khôlnâ

73

71

mere gàv-kë

câhtî hai. vaha-par

nayê bïj 7 4 aur nayë hal-bhï à rahë haï. 7 8 R â m Prasâd: tum kisï mahâjan S a r j û : mahâjan bahut sud

78

-së rupayâ

mâgtâ

78

79

hai. itnâ

R â m Prasâd: Sarkàrï Kôâparctiv Sabhà hai. mërë gav-kë afsar

83

77

81

karz lô. 80

tô maï das sâl-me-bhï nahï dë saktâ.

-me kyo nahï jâtë? vahâ-par sud nahï lagtâ

tô acchë haï. m a i un-sê khàd

84

82

-kê liyë k a r z lëtà hu.

S a r j û : par, Bhàï, mërë gav-kï sabhà tô s i r f 8 8 k h ë t ï 8 8 -kë liyc-hï rupayâ k a r z dëtï hai. sâdî-kë liyë nahï. us-kë pàs zyâdà rupayâ nahT. tumhârë gav-kï sabhâ-kô Amcrikà-kë rûpayc-sê m a d a d

87

miltï

88

hai. is-së 8 9 vah zyàdà amïr hai. tum hamàrë purànc

dôst hô. mërï larkî tumhàrï hai. a i s e 9 0 punya k à m 9 1 -më t u m h e 9 2 m a d a d karnâ càhiyë. Bhagvàn tum-par dayâ

93

karë.

R i m Prasad: dëkhô, Bhâî. mai kôsiS kartâ hû. par mërë pàs kâfï rupayâ nahï, aur mërë sâmnë-bhï larkî hai. sâdï-kà anâj mërà hai. 9 4 aur cïzô-kâ tum intazâm

98

karô.

S a r j û : mërï patnï-kë pàs g a h n ë haï. aur us-kï nânï-kî kuch c a d ï 9 6 -bhï. R â m Prasâd: kitnë ru paye tum-kô a u r 9 7 càhiyë? Sarjû: dô sau rûpayë n a k a d

98

-kà k a h ï 9 9 intazâm karnâ câhiye.

R â m Prasâd: mërë gàv-kë mahâjan b a r ë 1 0 0 b h a l ë 1 0 1 âdmï haï. vë garïbô-kï kartë haï. vë larkï-kï sàdï-kë liyë sastë-me" 1 0 2 rupayâ dëtë haï. Sarjû: Bhàï, maï un-kë pâs jànâ câhtâ hu. R â m Prasâd: maï ëk gây kharïdnà câhtâ hu. tum mërë sâth âô. Sarjû: gây kyô kharïdnà câhtë hô? R â m Prasâd: bacco-kë liyë gây-kâ dûdh acchâ hôtâ hai.

madad

134

HINDI

GRAMMAR

AND

READER

Sarju: gav kab vapas jana cahte ho? Ram Prasid: kal subah 1 0 3 car baje. Sarju: gav kitnl dur hai? Ram Prasad: yaha-se ath mil 1 0 4 hai. Sarju: kitne ghante lagte 1 0 5 hai? Ram Prasad: das ghante lagte hai. dopahar 109 -me ham kisl kue-ke pas thaharte hai. a j " kal suraj 1 0 7 tez 1 0 8 hai. is liye 1 0 9 sara 1 1 0 din lagta hai. Sarju: mai tumhare gav-se apne gav kaise ja sakta hu? Ram Prasid: ek motarbas adde 111 -se tumhare gav jatl hai. vah tumhare gav-se do mil-par ruktl 1 1 2 hai. Sarju: mai tumhare sath ata hu. mai tum-se milkar bara khui hu. larki-ka bhagya 1 1 3 accha malum hota 1 1 4 hai. age 1 1 5 Bhagvan-kl iccha. 116 '

117

prasna: 111 1. is kahanl-me kya hota hai? 2. admlyo-ke kya nam hai? 3. Sarju-ko kya fikr hai? 4. Sarju apne gav-ke mahajan-ke pas kyo nahT jana cahta? 5. Ram Prasad-ke khet-me kaun kaun fasle hai? 6. kisano-ko naye halo-ka istemal kaun sikhata hai? 7. Sarju-ko apnl larkl-kl sadi-ke liye kaha-se rupaya mil sakta hai? 8. Sarju-ke pas rupaya kyo nahi? 9. Sarju sadi-ke liye rupaya Koaparetiv Sabhad-se kyo nahi leta? 10. Sarju Ram Prasad-se milkar kyo khui hua? NOTES:

1. N a m e o f person; 2. N a m e of t o w n ; 3. buffalo; ( i ) : 4. n o w ; 5. emphatic particle, too, also;

6. M o n d a y ; 7. = -ke Uye to, in order to; 8. there; 9. apna own is a reflexive adjective referring to the subject of the sentence. Here, therefore, it is translated his; 13. term of address, friend, brother; marriage

(i);

10. old;

11. N a m e of person;

14. term of greeting or salutation a m o n g H i n d u s ;

16. ( m o n t h o f ) June ( a ) ;

17. n o w - a - d a y s ;

12.

15.

18. to functions as a supplementary

tion, moreover, then; 19. everything; 2 0 . expensive, dear; 2 1 . s o m e ; 2 2 . loan l o a n ; 2 3 . help (1), madad karna to ( g i v e ) help; 2 4 . side, direction

meet;

wedding, conjunc-

( a ) , |prz lena to m a k e a

( I ) , tumhirT taraf in your section,

area; 2 5 . this year ( i ) ; 2 6 . harvest, crop ( l ) ; 2 7 . w h a t sort (interrogative adjective); 2 8 . dried out, dry; 2 9 . wheat

( a ) ; 3 0 . so, therefore; 3 1 . =

is ( o b j e c t f o r m of yah)

37.

junction); 3 9 . ghar =

malum

family

pafna

(a);

to

seem,

4 0 . again;

to appear,

4 1 . difficult;

to

look

I

+

(interrogative adjective), see 1 8 . 2 . 1 ; 3 3 . haste ( 1 ) ; 3 4 . abhi-to = like;

38.

42. Government

32.

( e m p h a t i c particle);

still, yet; 3 5 . a g t such,

(i);

of

( i ) ; 3 6 . but

this

4 3 . plow

sort

(a);

what? (con-

(adjective);

44.

advantage,

gain, profit ( a ) ; 4 5 . sec 2 9 . 4 ; 46. I9g can function as a plural particle, which need not be translated into English;

4 7 . use

(a),

to use;

istemal karna

48.

who?

cause to learn; 5 0 . sometimes; 51. and ( c o n j u n c t i o n ) ; particle; 5 4 . angry, displeased;

55. cloud

(a);

(interrogative

see 1 8 . 2 ;

pronoun),

5 2 . the Supreme Being, God

56. drop

(a);

57. rain

(i);

(a);

58. ¿ram,

49.

53.

teach,

emphatic

chick-pea

(a);

5 9 . very; 6 0 . M o t h e r Earth ( i ) ; 6 1 . favor, grace, kindness ( i ) ; 6 2 . seek, look f o r ; 6 3 . in the m e a n t i m e ; 6 4 . grain

( a ) ; 6 5 . collect, gather; 6 6 . jewels, jewelry

cern, worry ( i ) ; 6 9 . difficulty

( a ) ; 67.

(maternal)

( i ) ; 7 0 . ( r i v e r ) G a n g e s ( l ) ; 7 1 . canal

(i);

grandmother

(i);

7 2 . office ( a ) ;

6 8 . con-

7 3 . to open

(transitive); 74. seed ( a ) ; 7 5 . are coming, see 2 3 . 1 ; 7 6 . money-lender ( a ) ; 77. money ( a ) ; 7 8 . interest, usury, profit ( a ) ; 7 9 . ask, d e m a n d ; 8 0 . so m u c h ; 8 1 . Cooperative Society ( i ) ; 82. be applied, charged; 83. officer, official ( 5 ) ; 84. m a n u r e ( i ) ; 85. only; 8 6 . agriculture ( ! ) ; 87. help ( i ) ; 88. get, see 3 3 . 4 . 1 ; 8 9 . therefore; 9 0 . such, of this sort; 9 1 . meritorious deed ( o n e of religious or moral value)

( a ) ; 92.

t u m - k o ; 9 3 . favor, kindness ( i ) ; 9 4 . I will be responsible for the grain for your (daughter's) 95.

arrangement

(a);

9 6 . silver

(i);

9 7 . more,

i.e.,

in addition,

where; 100. = very; 101. g o o d ; 1 0 2 . cheaply; 103. m o r n i n g ( a ) ; for 110.

this

construction

whole,

entire;

114. appear, seem;

with 111.

lagna; bus-stop

106. (a);

noon 112.

(i);

107.

stop

115. henceforth, in the future;

sun

see 3 5 . 3 ;

9 8 . cash

104. mile ( a ) ;

(a);

(intransitive);

99.

some-

105. to take, see 34.1

108.

hot,

113

fortune,

116. wish, desire ( i ) ;

(a);

=

wedding.;

sharp; luck,

117. question

109.

therefore;

destiny (a).

(a);

LESSON 17

135

17.6 The learning of the Devanagarl script can be undertaken at this point. For a description of the Devanagarl script, see Selections in Hindi Readings, the companion volume to this book. The student will find his learning of the script expedited by the fact that it consists of Devanagarl transcriptions of the romanized conversations and texts that he has previously encountered and mastered in this book. He therefore can devote his undivided attention to the mastery of the script without the distraction of dealing with grammatical constructions, vocabulary, and subject matter that unfamiliar texts would present.

Lesson 18 18.1 agar i p hukam dëtë haï, to acchâ naukar us-ko manta hai. agar larkë-kë p i s mithâyî hai, to vah dôsto-kô us-kô dëtâ hai. agar bail bhukhi hai, to vah ghis khânëkë liyë ruktl hai. agar bacca pyâsi hai, to vah rôti hai. agar aurat thakl hai, to vah aram karnë-kë liyë ruktï hai. agar vidyârthl parhta hai, to vah savil-kë javlb janti hai. agar mërâ bhâi ghar-më rahtâ hai, to mal isim-së sinëmâ-kô j i saktâ hû. agar pitâ vakt-par vâpas âtë haï, tô ham k h i n i khitë haï. c _ « £ c agar ma b i z l r jitî hai, tô vah dukânô-më bahut cïze kharïdni câhtl hai. agar 5p dhirë boltë haï, tô mal samajh sakti hu.

f you order ( h i m ) , (then) the good servant obeys [it]. f the boy has candy, (then) he gives it to (his) friends, f the bullock is hungry (then) he stops to eat grass. f the child is thirsty, (then) he cries, f the woman is tired, (then) she stops to rest. f the student studies, (then) he knows the answers to the questions, f my brother stays at home, (then) I can easily go to the movies, f father comes back in time, (then) we eat dinner. f mother goes to the bazaar, (then) she wants to buy many things in the shops, f you speak slowly, (then) I can understand.

This section introduces the H i n d i conditional construction, the verb of each clause being in the present tense. (Compare 2.1) T h e "if" clause of English is introduced in H i n d i by the word agar if and the second clause by the word to (lit., then). R E M A R K S : to is often not expressed in Hindi. 18.1.1 agar ap thake hai, to baithiye! agar pathik pyisa hai, to us-ko pan! dljiye! agar tum-k5 Hindl-me bolna hai, to dhire bolo!

If you are tired, (then) sit down. If the traveller is thirsty, (then) give him water!

If you must speak Hindi, (then) speak slowly! agar turn javab jante ho, to mujhe us-ko do! If you know the answer, (then) give it to me! agar ap cahte hai, to andar aiye! If you wish, (then) come in!

136

LESSON

agar turn rule saktë hô, to baitho! agar turn bhûkhë ho, tô mëz-së ëk phal 15!

18

137

If you can stay, (then) sit down! If you are hungry, (then) take a fruit from the table! If you want to know, (then) ask him! If you must come with me, (then) walk slowly! If you wish to read it, (then) take the letter!

agar i p jânnâ câhtë haï, to us-së pûchiyë! agar tum-kô mere sâth inâ parti hai, tô dhirë calô! agar âp us-kô parhnâ câhtë haï, tô khat lîjiyë! This section illustrates the conditional sentence, the " i f " clause of which contains a verb in the present tense, and the second clause an imperative (see 7.1 and 7.1.1) R E M A R K S : The polite imperatives of dënâ, lënâ, and karnâ are dïjiyë, Gjiyë, and kijiyë, respectively. The turn imperatives (see 7.1.1) of these are dô, lo, and karô, respectively.

18.1.2

agar i p us-kô hukam dë, to acchi naukar us-kô mine, agar bail bhûkhâ hô, tô vah ghâs khânëkë liyë rukë. agar baccâ pyisi hô, tô vah rôë. agar aurat thakl ho, to vah aram karne-ke liye ruke. agar ap mere anc-tak vaha thahar?, to mal ap-ke liye akhbar la saku. agar khana kharab ho, to ap bimar ho jae. agar vah pakae, to ham khae. agar ap dhire bole, to mal samajh saku. agar i p ganda pani piye, to i p bimar ho

If you (should) give him an order, (then) the good servant may obey [it]. If the ox (should) be hungry, (then) he may stop to eat grass. If the child (should) be thirsty, (then) he may cry. If the woman (should) be tired, (then) she may stop to rest. If you (should) wait there until I arrive, (then) I may be able to bring you the newspaper. If the food (should) be bad, (then) you may get sick. If she (should) cook, (then) we may eat. If you (should) speak slowly, (then) I may be able to understand. If you (should) drink dirty water, (then) you may become sick. If mother goes to the bazaar, (then) she may want to buy many things in the shops.

jae. agar m i bazar jie, to vah dukano-me bahut clze kharidna cahe. This section illustrates conditional sentences, both clauses of which contain verbs in the subjunctive—indicating the possibility of the fulfillment of the condition or act expressed by the verbs. (The word should, which is not necessarily expressed in English, is, therefore, placed in parentheses in the English sentences.) R E M A R K S : (1) ho jana become functions as a single verb, hona. The construction will be discussed later. ( 2 ) The verb pina replaces its stem pi with a secondary stem, piy, before suffixes starting with vowels other than i. (See sentence 9, above.) 18.1.3 agar ap cihe, to mai ap-ke sath jauga. If you (should) wish, (then) I will go with you.

138

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

agar mera bhii yaha rahe, to mai a j " rat sinema-ko ja sakuga.

If my brother (should) remain here, (then) I will be able to go to the movies tonight,

agar ap mere ine-tak vaha thahare, to mai ip-ke liye akhbar la sakuga.

If you (should) wait there until I arrive, (then) I will be able to bring you the

agar khini kharab ho, to i p bimar ho

If the food (should) be bad, (then) you will

jicgc. agar vah pakae, to ham zarur khaege.

get sick, If she (should) cook, (then) we surely will

newspaper.

eat. This section illustrates conditional sentences, the " i f " clauses of which have verbs in the subjunctive, and the second clauses verbs in the future. 18.1.4 agar ap cahege, to mai ip-ke sith jaugi.

If you (will) wish, (then) I will go with

agar mera bhii yahi rahegi, to mai i j * rit sinema-ko ja sakuga.

you. If my brother will remain here, (then) I will be able to go to the movies tonight,

agar i p mere ane-tak vaha thaharege, to mai ip-ke liye akhbar la sakugi.

If you will remain there until I arrive, (then) I will be able to bring the news-

agar i p dhire bolege, to mai samajh

If you will speak slowly, (then) I will be

sakuga. agar ap vakt-par aege, to ham vakt-par khana khi sakege.

able to understand, If you will come on time, (then) we will be able to eat dinner on time.

paper for you.

This section illustrates conditional sentences, both clauses of which contain verbs in the future tense. R E M A R K S : ( 1 ) From the stylistic point of view the verb of the first clause usually is placed in the subjunctive in sentences of this type. ( 2 ) In the English translation of such sentences the verb of the first clause will be in the present indicative. 18.1.5 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. agar bacca accha hai, to mai us-ko cumta hu. 2. agar motargarl derl-se ae, to mai ap-ke liye thaharu. 3. agar ap bol sakte hai, to Hindi-me dhire boliye! 4. agar nadi gahri ho, to mai us-me tairu. 5. agar pan! accha hoga, to pathik us-ko piyega. 6. agar nadl-me machliya hai, to machua un-ko pakarta hai. 7. agar phal pakke ho, to maT un-ko khau. 8. agar turn cahte ho, to mujhe thanda panl do! 9. agar malik cahege, to naukar un-ke liye khana taiyar karega. 10. agar turn Hindi parho, to sayad turn bol sako. 11. agar mera dost khat likhega, to ma! us-se milne-ke liye safar karuga. 12. agar per-ke nice ghas hai, gay us-ko khati hai. 13. agar admi kam karega, to mai us-ko paise duga. 14. agar bazar pas ho, to mai us-ko dekhne-ke liye jau. 15. agar meri topi kursl-par hai, to us-ko lljiye! 16. agar ma cahe, to vah larke-ke sath bazar jae. 17. agar kutta vapas aega, to larkl us-ko khana degl. 18. agar hotal-ka kamra accha hai, to pathik sukhl hai. 19. agar aurat dukan-me bahut clze kharldegl, to dukandar sukhi hoga. 20. agar tum-ko bazar jana hai, to mere sath ao. 21. agar turn bimar ho, to ham tumhare ghar-ko aj * rat jae. 22. agar ap hukam de, to mai ap-se milne-ke liye au. 23. agar dhobl accha hai, to mai dhone-ke liye us-ko kapre deta hu. 24. agar din accha ho, to mall bagme khode. 25. agar bacca nadl-ko daurta hai, to us-ko vapas lao.

LESSON

18

139

18.1.6 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. If I (msc.) run, I fall. 2. If the policeman will catch the thief, he will beat him. 3. If you (msc.) (should) want to go to the river, I ( f m . ) may be able to go with you. 4. If you (fem. hon.) are tired, please sit in that chair! 5. If the bullocks stop, the farmer beats them. 6. If the water will be cold, we (msc.) will drink it. 7. If I (msc.) (should) run, I may fall. 8. If you (fm.) come back on time, please stop to talk with me. 9. If my friend ( m s c ) will buy the Hindi newspapers, he will read them to me. 10. If there are fruits on the tree, the monkey will steal them. 11. If you (msc.) want to talk with me, don't talk fast! 12. If the newspaper is on the table, please give it to me. 13. If the family is poor, the man has to go to the city to work in the factory. 14. If the road is long, the traveller will become tired. 15. If you (msc.) can, stop to see me on your return. 16. If the river-water will be warm, we will want to swim in it. 17. If there (should) be ripe fruits on the tree, the monkeys may steal them. 18. If you (msc.) must come, come on time. 19. If the place is beautiful, the woman will want to stop to rest there. 20. If the servant is good, the master is happy. 21. If you ( f m . ) are tired, do not work! 22. If the manager can, he will give us a good room. 23. If the clothes are clean, the woman will take them from the washerman. 24. If the servant wants to talk to the master in Hindi, he should talk slowly. 25. If your house is near-by, I will go there with you.

18.2 kaun adml ghar-ke samne hai? vah kaun hai?

Which man is in front of the house? Who is he?

larka kis admi-ko dekhta hai? larka kis-ko dekhta hai?

Which man does the boy see? Whom does the boy see?

kaun Idmi paksiyo-ko pakarte hai? ve kaun hai?

Which men catch the birds? Who are they?

larka kin admiyo-ko dekhta hai? larka kin-ko dekhta hai?

Which men does the boy see? Whom does the boy see?

kaun aurat nadi-ke pas hai? vah kaun hai?

Which woman is by the river? Who is she?

larka kis aurat-ko dekhta hai? larka kis-ko dekhta hai?

Which woman does the boy see? Whom does the boy see?

kaun aurte gati hai? ve kaun hai?

Which woman sing? Who are they?

larka kin aurto-ko dekhta hai? larka kin-ko dekhta hai?

Which women does the boy see? Whom does the boy see?

This section is concerned with the interrogative pronouns and adjectives. In each of the pairs of sentences, above, the first sentences illustrates the interrogative adjective and the second the interrogative pronoun. The forms for pronoun and adjective are identical. There is no distinction between masculine and feminine forms. The forms for pronoun and adjective are: kaun subject form, singular and plural; kis object, singular; and kin object, plural.

140

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

18.2.1 vah kyâ cïz hai?

W h a t t h i n g is t h a t ?

vah kyâ hai?

W h a t is t h a t ?

larkâ kyâ cïz dëkhtâ hai?

W h a t t h i n g docs the boy see?

larkâ kyâ d c k h t â hai?

W h a t does the boy see?

vc kyâ cîze h a ï ?

W h a t things are those?

vë kyâ haï?

W h a t are they?

larkâ kyâ cïzë dëkhtâ hai.

W h a t t h i n g s does t h e boy see?

larkâ kyâ dëkhtâ hai?

W h a t does the boy see?

T h i s section illustrates the interrogative adjective and p r o n o u n , kyâ, w h i c h modifies or refers to i n a n i m a t e objects. T h e f o r m is t h e same for case, n u m b e r , a n d gender, kis a n d kin, singular a n d plural, respectively, are the f o r m s w h i c h appear before

postpo-

sitions. 18.2.2 E x e r c i s e 1. T r a n s l a t e into E n g l i s h : 1. k a u n à d m î A f i g r ë z î s a m a j h s a k ë g â ? 2 . yah k y â hai? 3. m a i K a l k a t t â kis tarah jâ saktâ h u ? 4 . kyâ bât hai? 5. agar â p sahar jâe, tô â p kis-kë sâth j â e g ë ? 6. vah k a u n parhnâ

zyâdâ

pasand k a r t â

hai?

7. m a c h u à

ham-kô

kaun

machliyâ

bëcëgâ?

kitâbe 8.

mal

K a l k a t t â kis sarak-së jâ saktâ h û ? 9. larkâ kis aurat-kë liyë pânï lâtâ h a i ? 10. vah aurat kaun hai?

11. k a u n aurtë k h â n â taiyâr k a r s a k ë g î ?

12. â p k i n â d m i y ô - k ë sâth

bôlnà

zyâdâ pasand k a r t ë h a ï ? 13. kaun bailgârï t u m h à r ï hai? 14. m a l kis-kë sâth H i n d i b ô l ù ? 15. kis vidyârthî-kô k i t â b parhnâ h a i ? hai?

18. m a i kis-kô paisë d u ?

16. vê â d m î k a u n h a ï ?

17. baccâ kis k a m r ë - m ë

19. k a u n â d m î plnë-kâ pânï c â h t â hai? 2 0 . â p H i n d ï - m ë

"train"-kô kyâ kahtë haï? 18.2.3 E x e r c i s e 2 . T r a n s l a t e into H i n d i : 1. W h a t ' s the m a t t e r ? 2. H o w do you ( h o n . , m s c . ) say " b o o k " in H i n d i ? 3. H o w can I ( f m . ) g o to C a l c u t t a ? 4. W h o is the h u n t e r ? 5. F o r w h o m shall I ( m s c . ) b r i n g b a c k a n e w s p a p e r ? 6. W i t h w h i c h m a n will I ( f m . ) be able to speak H i n d i ? 7. W h o understands E n g l i s h ?

8. F o r whose arrival are you ( h o n . , m s c . ) w a i t i n g ?

c a n , w i t h w h i c h plow will you till the

field?

w h i c h tree do the m o n k e y s steal the ripe fruits? tions? thief?

17. W h i c h w o m a n is your w i f e ?

give t h e

flowers?

(msc.)

11. F r o m

12. W h o m will the teacher ask ques-

13. B y w h a t road can I ( m s c . ) go to C a l c u t t a ?

front o f w h i c h house is your a u t o m o b i l e ?

9. If you

10. W h i c h m e n are f a r m e r s ?

14. W h a t is that t h i n g ?

15. In

16. W i t h w h a t will the policeman strike the 18. T o

19. W h a t is his business?

w h i c h holy m a n will you ( h o n . ,

fm.)

2 0 . W h a t k i n d s of things does the shop-

keeper sell? 18.3 kaun-sâ â d m î khët-më hai?

W h i c h m a n is in the

kaun-së â d m î khët-më haï?

W h i c h m e n are in the

field? field?

larkâ kis âdmï-kë liyë k à m kartâ hai?

F o r w h i c h m a n does the boy w o r k ?

larkâ kin âdmiyo-kë liyë k â m kartâ hai?

F o r w h i c h m e n does the boy w o r k ?

kaun-sï aurat g h a r - m ë hai?

W h i c h w o m a n is in the house?

kaun-sï aurte g h a r - m e h a ï ?

W h i c h w o m e n are in t h e house

LESSON

18

141

larkâ kis aurat-kë liyë kâm kartâ hai? larkâ kin aurtô-kë liyë kâm kartâ hai?

For which woman docs the boy work? For which women does the boy work?

kaun-sï kitâb mëz-pâr hai? kaun-si kitâbë mëz-par haï?

Which book is on the table? Which books are on the table?

larkâ kis kitâb-së panne phârtâ hai? larkâ kin kitâbo-së panne phârtâ haï?

From which book does the boy tear pages? From which books does the boy tear pages?

Compare the interrogative adjective forms in the first two sentences of each of the three groups of four sentences, above, and the interrogative adjective, kaun, of section 18.2. To the subject form of kaun is attached the particle -sa which agrees with the noun modified in gender and number. The resultant interrogative adjective, kaun-sa, is employed to refer to a specific being or thing as contrasted with kaun which refers to a being or thing generally unspecified. (See 38.1.1) Compare: vah âdml kaun hai? Who is that man? and vah âdml kaun-sâ hai? Who is that (particular) man (i.e., of the men mentioned or known)? REMARKS: The object forms are the same as those for kaun. (kaun-sc and kaun-si often occur as the object forms, masculine and feminine, respectively.) 18.4 âp kitnâ pânl câhtë haï? How much water do you want? mâlï kitnï lakn jangal-së lâëgâ? How much wood will the gardener bring from the jungle? baccâ kitnâ dûdh piyëgâ? How much milk will the child drink? kitnë âdmï khët-me haï? How many men are in the field? âp kitnë idmiyo-kô paisë dëtë haï? To how many men do you give money? ghar-më kitnï aurtë hai? How many women are there in the house? larkî kitnï aurto-kë liyë pan! lâtï hai? For how many women does the girl bring water? This section illustrates the interrogative adjective, kitni, which indicates quantity. It functions like the adjectives described in sections 3.2, 4.3, and 6.1. 18.4.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. kitnë bajë haï? 2. mai âp-kë liyë kitnë lakrl vâpas lâu? 3. kitnë paisë logé? 4. kitnë âdml is sahar-me rahtë haï? 5. hôtâl-më kitnë âdml Afigrëzï bôl saktë haï? 6. kitnï aurte si saktï haï? 7. âp in sabziyô-kë liyë lutnë paisë lëgë? 8. kitnâ bajâ hai? 9. pathik kitnë dinô-kë liyë yahâ rahegë? 10. aurat kitnï larkiyo-kë liyë pakâtï hai? 18.4.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. What time is it? 2. How many days do you have to stay here? 3. How many rooms are in this house? 4. How many newspapers do you (hon., fm.) read? 5. How big is it? 6. How many children does the man have? 7. How much money will you (msc.) take for these fruits? 8. How much milk does you cow give? 9. How many oxen does the farmer have? 10. How many wells are there in the village? 18.5 Text 2. do kisânô-kï bâtcït. Translate into English. Answer the questions in Hindi: Manôhar 1 aur Mohan 2 dôno 3 janvarï 4-kë machine 5 -më Gaftgâ-kë mëlë 6 -më miltë haï. Môhan êk nayë khët-më kâm kartâ hai. vah Manôhar-kâ bhatïjâ 7 hai. Manôhar-kà gâv Môhan-së paccïs mil dur Gaftgâ dûsrî tarai hai.

142

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

Môhan: Manôhar Câcâ, pranâm. 9 âp kaisë hai? càci 10 -jï 11 aur baccê kaisë haï? Manôhar: khus rahô. 12 sab-par Bhagvân-kî kripâ 1 3 hai. tumhàrî câcl-bhî mërë sâth haî. vah is vakt mandir-me darSan 1 4 kartï haî. baccê ghar haï. âj'kal t h a n d 1 5 bahut hai. kahô Môhan, tumhàrë nayc khët kaisc haï? kitnï zamïn jôttë hô? Môhan: khët acche haï. mërë pas k a r ï b 1 6 pandrâ ë k a r 1 7 haï. is sai mal das ëkar-hï jôttâ hü, kyô-kî 1 8 mërë pas kâfî paisë nahî haï. Manôhar: kaun kaun-si 1 9 faslê hôt! haï? Môhan: mërë khët gëhu aur gannë 20 -kë liyë bahut acchë haï. pâs-hî 2 1 karïb das mïlpar èk barí cïnî 22 -kî mil ^-bhï hai, is-së gannë âsânl-së biktë 2 4 haï. Manôhar: tumhàrë pas kitnë jânvar haï? Môhan: mërë pas ck bhals aur ék bail hai. tin bakriyâ-bhï haï. bakriyâ dò s ë r 2 o düdh dëtl haï. bhaïs pac sër düdh dëtï hai. us-së âp-kï bahu 2 6 ghï 2 7 banâtï hai, aur baccë d a h ï 2 8 aur matthâ 2 9 pïtë haï. Manôhar: ëk bail-së khët kaisë jôttë hô? Môhan: Câcâ, yah bahut muskil hai. mal apnë bhâï-kâ bail istëmâl kartâ hù. us-kë pas car bail haï. is sâl sarkâr-bhï apnï masïn 3 0 -së ëk b a r 3 1 khôdtï hai, kyo-kï zamîn abhï karï 3 2 hai. aglë 3 3 sâl-me ëk aur 3 4 bail kharïdnâ câhtâ hü. Manôhar: khët-m? aur 3 4 kyà cîze hôtï haï? Môhan: is sài àdhë 3 5 -me sabziyà haï, aur âdhë khët-me gannâ aur gëhû. yaha-së âth mïl-par sahar-kâ bâzâr hai, vaha sabziyâ khûb biktî haï. sabziyo-më zyâdâ mehnat 3 6 nahT lagtï, aur paisâ-bhî zyâdâ nahï lagtâ. Manôhar: tumhàrë khët-më is sâl kaun-sî 1 9 sabziya haï? Môhan: gôbhî, 37 matar, 38 âlû, 39 tamâtar, 40 gâjar, 4 1 aur pâlak. 42 Manôhar: gannë-kï fasal is sâl kaisï hai? Môhan: is sâl gannâ tô bahut acchâ hai, par gëhu acchâ nahï. Manôhar: kitnë m a n 4 3 gëhu haï? Môhan: karïb pacâs man. câcâ, âj ' kal gëhu-kâ kyâ bhâv 4 4 hai? Manôhar: das rûpayë-kâ ëk man dukândâr kisàn-së kharïdtâ hai. turn kitnï falsê kâttë hô? Môhan: dò barí faslë kât saktâ hu, aur bïc-me 4 5 kuch sabziyâ-bhï paidâ hô 4 6 saktî haï. Manôhar: rabï-kï fasal 4 7 kyâ hai ? Môhan: rabï-kî fasal-më gëhu aur gannâ, kharîf-kï fasal 4 8 -më dâl 4 9 aur canâ 5 0 kâttâ hu. câcâ, âp-kë pâs kyâ khët hai? Manôhar: mërë pâs sab câval 5 1 -kë khët haï. kuch sabzï-bhï ugâtâ hû, lëkin 5 2 pàs-kâ bâzâr barà nahï. mërë khët-kâ câval bahut acchâ hai. ëk rûpayê-ka dò sër biktâ hai. Môhan: âp-kë khët-më pânï kaha-së âtâ hai? Manôhar: pânï Gaftgâ-së âtâ hai aur kabhï kue-së-bhï lëtà hu. Môhan: âp kitnï fasle kâttë haî? Manôhar: mërï ëk-hï acchï fasal hai. dûsrï-më tumhârï câcï dâl aur sabziyâ paidâ kartï 6 3 haï aur mai cïnï-kï mil-me kâm kartâ hü. câval aur dâl khânê-kë liyë kâfï haï. tëks 5 4 -kâ rûpayâ mil-më kamâtà 5 u hû. tumhàrë khët acchë haï, bëtâ. pûrë 5 8 sâl àmdanï 5 7 hôtï hai. Môhan: âp mërë ghar âiyë. Manôhar: hôlï 5 8 âtï hai. us-kë bâd mal tumhàrë khët dëkhnë-kë liyë â saktâ hû. 8

LESSON

M5han: Câcâ, âp aur baccê hôlî-më mere yahâ

18 59

143

âiyë.

Manôhar: hôlï-më mai tumhârë yahâ 5 9 nahï â saktâ. mërî larkï mâykë 8 0 ânâ câhtî hai. mal hôlï-kë pandrâ din bid â saktâ hû. tumhârï câcî nahï â saktl kyô-ki vë us vakt khët-më kâm kartï haï. mai câr-hï din thahar saktâ hû. dàl us vakt paktï 8 1 hai; jânvarô aur paksiyo-kâ dar 8 2 rahtâ hai. tumhârà glv kitnï dur hai? mai vahâ kaisë 6 3 pahûc saktâ hu? Mohan: mërâ gâv yahâ-së das mil dur hai, par âp-kë gâv-së paccîs mïl dur hai. âp gârîsë L â l p u r 8 4 stësân-par utariyë, vaha-së gyârâ bajë ëk bas caltï hai j ô 6 5 Bâkûp u r â 6 6 dô ghantë-më pahiïctï hai. âp mujhë apnë calnë-kâ din likhiyc. Bâkupurâ-sê mërâ gâv dô mil hai. mêrï bailgârï har 6 7 d û s r ê 6 8 din Bakùpurâ jâtî hai. âp vahâ-së bahut âsânï-së â saktë haï. m w

Manôhar: acchâ, Bëtâ. ab mai Gaftgâ-më nahânâ aur us-kë bâd mëlâ dëkhnâ câhtâ hû. malum n a h f 8 8 tumhârï câcî kahâ hai. [Môhan-kî câcî âtï hai.] Mohan: Câcï-jï, pranâm. mandir kaisâ hai? Câcî: khuS rahô, Bëtâ. ghar-me 7 0 sab-lôg kaisë haï? Mohan: sab-lôg k h u l haï. Sântï 7 1 -ko k a l 7 2 -së b u k h â r 7 3 âtâ hai. Manôhar: Môhan, turn aur câcî bâtë karô. maï nahânë-kë liyë jâtâ hû. mai bahut bhùkhâ hu. is-së jaldï khânâ khânâ câhtâ hu. [ Manôhar vâpas âtâ hai aur sab-lôg ë1c dukân-kë pïchë pcr-kï châyâ 74 -mc baithtë haï. Manôhar Môhan-kô câr â n ë 1 5 dëtâ hai aur kahtâ hai k i 7 6 dahï lâô. us-kï patnï ëk pôtlï 7 7 khôltï hai. us-me pûriyâ, 78 sabzï aur a c â r 7 9 haï. Môhan vâpas âtâ hai.] Manôhar: dahî kitnc ®°-ka hai? Môhan: dahï tïn ànc-kà ëk pâv. 81 Manôhar: Sahar-më har cïz m a h â g ï 8 2 hai. gâv-më itnâ 8 3 dahî câr paisë 8 4 -kâ miltà hai. Môhan, pânï kahâ miltâ hai? Môhan: pâs-më ëk nal 8 8 hai. mai vahâ-së pânï lâ saktâ hu. Cad: maï pânï lâûgï. barsât 8 6 -me Gaflgâ barhtï 8 7 hai aur yah sab jagah 8 8 pânï-më h ô t ï 8 9 hai. yahâ-par nal kaisâ hai? Manôhar: yah mëlë-kë liyë k h â s 9 0 intazâm hai. yahâ-par bijlï 9 1 hai, sinëmâ hai, aur gânâ 9 2 -bhï bijlï-kë lâudspïkar 9 3 -së hôtâ hai. âg bujhânë 9 4 -kâ-bhî intazâm hai. yah s a b 8 5 mëlë-kë liyë hai. mëlë-kë bâd yahâ yah sab kuch nahï rahtâ. sarkâr yah intazâm yâtriyo-kë liyë kartï hai. Câcî: yah tô bahut acchâ hai, maï tïn bajë gâv-kë liyë calnâ câhtï hû. ab calô, sab-lôg mëlâ dëkhë. prasna: 1. mëlâ kyâ hai? 2. Manôhar kaun hai? 3. Manôhar aur us-kï patnï mëlâ kyô âyë? 4. Môhan-kë khët-më kyâ kyâ cïzë ugtï haï? 5. kyâ Môhan ck bail-së khët jôttâ hai? 6. Môhan kitnï fasle kât saktâ hai? 7. Manôhar-kë khct-kâ pânï kahâ-së âtâ hai? 8. Môhankî câcî khët-më kyâ kâm kartï ha? 9. Môhan-kï câcî us-kï yahâ kyo nahï â sakëgï. 10. mëlë-kë liyë sarkâr-në kyâ intazâm kiya? NOTES:

1. m a n ' s n a m e ; 2. m a n ' s n a m e ; 3. both

( a d v . ) ; 4. ( m o n t h o f ) J a n u a r y ; 5. m o n t h

(â);

6.

fair (held for religious or commercial purposes) ( â ) ; 7. ( p a t e r n a l ) n e p h e w ( â ) ; 8. ( p a t e r n a l ) uncle ( â ) ; 9. a f o r m of reverential salutation e m p l o y e d suffix d e n o t i n g respect or e n d e a r m e n t ;

by H i n d u s ;

10. a u n t

12. Be healthy a n d h a p p y ;

(paternal

uncle's w i f e )

13. favor ( i ) ;

(i);

11.

14. visit to sacred

144

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

shrine, worship of image ( a ) ; 15. cold, coldness ( I ) ; 16. about, approximately; 17. acre ( a ) ;

18. be-

cause; 19. See 38.1.1; 20. sugar-cane ( a ) ; 21. right near-by; 22. sugar ( i ) ; 23. mill, factory ( i ) ; 24. are sold; 25. a weight =

2 pounds ( a ) ; 26. daughter-in-law

( =

Mohan's wife)

(1); 27. clarified

butter ( a ) ; 28. curds ( a ) ; 29. buttermilk ( a ) ; 30. machine ( I ) ; 31. time ( a ) ; 32. hard; 33. next; 34. what other—i.e., in addition; 35. half; 36. hard work

(1); 37. cauliflower

(I);

38. peas ( a ) ;

39.

potatoes ( a ) ; 40. tomatoes ( a ) ; 41. carrots ( a ) ; 42. spinach ( a ) ; 43. a maund = = 80 pounds (40 seers =

1 maund) ( a ) ; 44. rate ( a ) ; 45. in between; 46. be grown; 47. Spring-crop ( i ) ; 48. Autumn-crop

( i ) ; 49. pulses (1); 50. gram ( a ) ; 51. rice ( a ) ; 52. but; 53. grow; 54. tax ( a ) ; 55. earn; 56. whole, entire; 57. income ( I ) ; 58. the religious festival held at approach of the vernal equinox; 59. -ke yahJ, the place of, the abode of; 60. maternal home ( a ) ; 61. ripen, become ripe; 62. fear ( a ) ; 63. how (adv.); 64. name of town; 65. which (relative pronoun, see 2 5 . 2 ) ; 66. name of town; 67. every; 68. second; 69. I don't know.

(For the construction see 29.2, Remarks, and note that ki is often

omitted in colloquial Hindi.); 70. at home; 71. girl's name; 72. yesterday; 73. fever ( a ) , -ko bukhar ana to have a fever; 74. shade ( i ) ; 75. anna (the 16th part of a rupee, according to the older system of coinage)

( a ) ; 76. see 29.1 to 29.3; 77. bundle ( i ) ; 78. purees (type of bread made with whole

wheat flour, which puffs up when fried in ghee or oil) ( a ) ; 79. pickles ( a ) ; 80. how much; 81.

=

1/4 seer ( 1 / 2 pound) ( a ) ; 82. expensive; 83. this much; 84. 1 /64th part of a rupee (the older system of coinage)

( a ) ; 85. (water-) tap ( a ) ; 86. rainy-season

(l);

87. increases, rises, floods; 88. all this

place, this entire area; 89. is under water; 90. special; 91. electricity ( i ) ; 92. music ( a ) ; 93. loudspeaker ( a ) ; 94. to extinguish; 95. all this.

Lesson 19 19.1 mai khata tha. mai khati thi.

I (msc.) was eating. I ( f m . ) was eating.

vab khata tha. vah khati thi.

He was eating. She was eating.

ham khata the. ham khati thi.

We (msc.) were eating. We (fm.) were eating.

turn khate the. turn khati thi.

You (msc.) were eating. You ( f m . ) were eating.

ap khate the. ap khati thi.

You (msc.) were eating. You ( f m . ) were eating.

vc khate the. ve khati thi.

They (msc.) were eating. They ( f m . ) were eating.

This section illustrates the past of the tense described in section 2.1. (This is termed the "Imperfect" or "Past Continuous" by grammarians.) The construction consists of the present participle, which agrees with the subject of the sentence in gender and number, and the imperfect of hona, thl (for the masculine singular), the (for the masculine plural), thi (for the feminine singular), and thf (for the feminine plural). 19.1.1 More examples are: The man was lying down. a dm! letta tha. The men were lying down. a dm! lette the. aurat phekti thi. aurte phekti thi.

The woman was throwing. The women were throwing.

bahadur admi larta tha. bahadur aurte lam thi.

The brave man was fighting. The brave women were fighting.

savcet larka kam karta tha. savcet larke kam karte the.

The careful boy was working. The careful boys were working.

145

146

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

sivcet larki k l m kart! thi. savcct larkiyi kam kartì thi.

The careful girl was working. The careful girls were working.

hosiyar vidyirthi skul jita thi. hosiyir vidyirthi skul jatc the.

The clever student was going to school. The clever students were going to school.

hosiyir larkl skul jiti thi. hosiyar larkiyi skul jiti thi.

The clever girl was going to school. The clever girls were going to school.

khus klark daftar-mè gita tha. ¡mandar larkl paisc vapas dèti tha. garib admi mandir-kè simne phul becta tha. cupcap cor patii gali-mc rista dekhti thi.

The happy clerk was singing in the office. The honest boy was giving back the money. The poor man was selling flowers in front of the temple. The quiet thief was waiting in the narrow street. The sad child was drinking the pure milk. What was the rich man doing? The stranger was hiding a sharp razor. The weak man was asking for a strong rope. The wise father was giving candy to the child.

dukhi bacca khalis dudh piti thi. amlr admi kyi karti thi? ajnabl itimi ek tèz usta ri chupati tha. kamzòr admi mazbut rassi migta tha. buddhimin piti baccè-ko mithiyi dite the. javin admi ek sigret piti thi. aurat sif jute lati thi. nankar sàf pyilè liti thi. larki ek isan sabak parhti thi. kisin sakht za min khòdti thi. admi bharì bòjh tòlti thi. aurat khubsùrat tasvir kharidb thi.

The young man was smoking a cigarette. The woman was bringing clean shoes. The servant was bringing clean cups. The girl was reading an easy lesson. The farmer was digging the hard ground. The man was weighing the heavy load. The woman was buying the beautiful picture.

larkiyi bimir adml-kò ek phal detl thi.

The girls were giving a fruit to the sick man. barbai ek gol mez banita tha. The carpenter was making a round table. larki ghar-sè garm dudh liti thi. The girl was bringing warm milk from the house. aurte tlrth'sthàn-kò jàtl thi. The women were going to a sacred place. The women were going to holy places. aurte tìrth'sthinò-ko jiti thi. R E M A R K S : (1) The adjectives occurring in this section are of the type described in section 11.4. (2) râsti dëkhni translates English wait, watch out for. ( 3 ) Vocabulary Notes: ustari ( i ) razor, tirth'sthin ( a ) sacred place, pilgrimage spot, p y i l i ( a ) cup, bôjh ( â ) load, burden, sabak ( a ) lesson, sigrët (I) cigarette. 19.1.2 klark khus thi. The clerk was happy, klark khus the. The clerks were happy. idmi garib tha. idmi garib the.

The man was poor. The men were poor.

LESSON

19

aurat kamzor thi. aurte kamzor thi.

The woman was weak, The women were weak.

mez g51 thi. meze gol thi.

The table was round, The tables were round.

147

This section illustrates the "Imperfect" of the Hindi verb to be, to exist. The form agrees in gender and number with the subject of the sentence—tha for the masculine singular; the for the masculine plural; thi for the feminine singular; thi for the feminine plural. (See 19.1 above.) 19.13 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. ham kamzor admiyo-ko khilate the. 2. bacca garm dudh pita tha. 3. kisan-ke pas hal tha. 4. khus larkiya khelne-ke liye bahar jatl thi. 5. naukar pathik-ke liye pan! lata tha. 6. hosiyar caprasl daftar-ke pas tha. 7. adhyapak asan kahanl kyo parhte the? 8. aurat bimar adml-ke liye garm pan! latl thi. 9. motarbas tlrth'sthan-se kab vapas at! thi? 10. mall sakht zamln khodta tha. 11. kya aurte saf pyale latl thi? 12. sarak-ke pas khubsurat imarte thi. 13. adhyapak hosiyar larko-se asan saval kyo puchte the? 14. amir adml ek sigret pita tha. 15. kya naukar imandar tha? 16. stri-ke pas nayi sariya thf. 17. javan adml daftar-me gata tha. 18. larkl mez-ke nice garm dudh chupatl thi. 19. cupcap sadhu mandir-ke samne baithte the. 20. bimar adml dukhl tha. 19.1.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The boy was bringing the heavy wood for the woman. 2. The boy had a book. 3. The women were going to a sacred place. 4. The foreign man was asking the servant for water. 5. Was the boy honest? 6. Father was smoking a cigarette. 7. T h e young woman was giving candy to the child. 8. Why were the farmers digging the hard ground? 9. Why was the child sad? 10. The poor woman wanted to sell flowers in front of the temple. 11. The weak man was sad. 12. The round house was near the narrow street. 13. The young women were beautiful. 14. For whom was the man buying the razor? 15. The happy girls were singing together near the well. 16. The weak man was weighing the heavy wood. 17. The clever girls were reading the easy lesson. 18. The women were waiting for (their) friends near the well. 19. H e was bringing a clean cup for the sick man. 20. The mother was bringing a cup of warm milk for the happy child. 19.2 mujhe sahar-ko jana cahiye tha. I ought to have gone to town, vidyarthi-ko parhna cahiye tha. The student ought to have studied, naukar-ko hamate jana-ke liye sab kuch The servant should have prepared everytaiyar kama cahiye tha. thing for our departure, larki-ko kue-se pan! Una cahiye tha. The girl ought to have brought water from the well. aurat-ko rasoighar-me panl ubalna cahiye The woman should have boiled water in the tha. kitchen. This section illustrates the past tense of the cahiye construction described in section 17.1. tha remains unchanged. 19.2.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. dhobl-ko kapre dhona cahiye tha. 2. larke-ko ag-ke liye lakrl lana cahiye tha. 3. tum-ko

148

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

Hindl-me bolna cahiye tha. 4. mali-ko paudho-par pan! dalna cahiye tha. 5. sikari-ko bhayanak janvar marna cahiye tha. 6. kisan-ko sakht zamln khodna cahiye tha. 7. ap-ko Hindi samajh sakna cahiye tha. 8. bacce-ko blmar admi-ko ek phal dena cahiye tha. 9. admiyo-ko tirth'sthan jana cahiye tha. 10. ham-ko dayl taraf jana cahiye tha. 19.2.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. You should have drunk the milk. 2. Should the children have stayed at home? 3. We ought to have given the poor man money. 4. You should have rested today. 5. The weak gardener needed to .rest beside the well. 6. The washerman should have brought back the clothes today. 7. They should have come to see us yesterday. 8. The poor man needed to work. 9. Ought you to have gone to the office today? 10. Should we have gone to the movies tonight? 19.3 aurat-ko taza panl cahiye tha. The woman needed fresh water, ap-ko kitne paise cahiye the? How much money did you need? kisan-ko mazduro-ki madad cahiye thi. The farmer needed the help of workers, bacce-ko naye jute cahiye the. The child needed new shoes, vidyarthi-ko bahut kitabe cahiye thi. The student needed many books. These sentences illustrate the past of the construction described in 17.2. Here tha agrees in gender and number with the subject. 19.3.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. aurat-ko ag-ke liye lakrl cahiye thi. 2. ham-ko kal mazdur-ki madad cahiye thi. 3. kisan-ko khet jotne-ke liye bara hal cahiye tha. 4. kya ap-ko merl madad cahiye thi? 5. mujhe motargarl calane-ke liye adml cahiye tha. 6. pathik-ko sarak batane-ke liye adml cahiye tha. 7. kya ap-ko kuch cahiye tha? 8. tum-ko men madad kyo cahiye thi? 9. naukar-ko kal mujhe milna kyo cahiye tha? 10. aurat-ko bazar-me khana kharldne-ke liye paise cahiye the. 19.3.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. When did a man need friends? 2. We needed fresh water. 3. I needed this ox-cart yesterday. 4. Why did you need to go to the office yesterday? Did you need anything for your travel? 6. The woman needed wood for the fire this morning. 7. Did you need the clean clothes yesterday? 8. Why did you need to see me yesterday? 9. I needed a gardener for two days. 10. The traveller needed warm water for (his) bath. 19.4 agar vah aj sahar-me hota, to mai us-ke If he were in town today, I would be with sath hota. him. agar ap vakt-par ite, to ham vakt-par If you had come on time, we would have khana kha sakte. been able to have dinner on time, agar mai ghar-me hota, to mai palaiig-par If I were home, I would sleep in bed. sota. agar mai skul-me hota, to mai parhta. If I had been in school, I would have studied, agar aurat bazar-ko jati, to vah dukano-me If the woman had gone to the bazaar, she cize kharidti. would have bought things in the shops, agar ap-ki bahan savere uthti, to vah If your sister had gotten up early in the hamare sath khati. morning, she would have eaten with us. agar mai parh sakta, to bahut kuch sikhta. If I could have read, I would have learned a lot.

LESSON

agar bacca cal sakta, to vah ghar-ke bahar khelta. agar vidyarthi kuch janta, to vah adhyapak-ko batata. agar men ma pakati, to ham zarur khate.

19

149

If the child could walk, it would play outside the house, If the student knew anything, he would tell the teacher, If my mother would cook, (then) we surely would eat. This section illustrates another conditional construction. In sentences of this type the verb of the "if" clause indicates an act or action which was incapable of being carried out and, hence, the act or action described by the verb of the following clause did not take place. This conditional construction is termed in some grammars "Contrary to Fact" or "Unreal Subjunctive." (Compare the conditional construction discussed in 18.1 to 18.1.4. In those the verbs of the "if" clauses indicated acts capable of completion, and, therefore, the verbs of the following clauses indicated acts carried out or being carried out or about to be carried out.) Consider the following: In the first sentence, above, If he were in town today, I would be with him., the person referred to by the pronoun, he, is not or was not in town and I, therefore, am not with him. In the third sentence, If I were home, I would sleep in bed., I am not home and, therefore, I am not sleeping in bed. In the fourth sentence, If I had been in school, I would have studied., I was not in school; I therefore, did not study. In the seventh sentence, If I could have read, I would have learned a lot., I could not read and I, therefore, did not learn a lot. The significant feature of this construction is that the verb of each clause is rendered into Hindi by the present participle, alone, which agrees in gender and number with the subject. REMARKS: (1) This construction is to be distinguished from the conditional constructions having verbs in the subjunctive. (See 18.1.2 and 18.13 where the verbs of the "if" clauses describe acts capable of completion.) (2) The compound postposition -ke bahar outside of functions like the compound postpositions discussed in sections 11.1 to 113. 19.4.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. agar aurat thakl hot!, to vah aram karne-ke liye ruktl. 2. agar ap mere ane-tak vaha thaharte, to mat ap-ke liye akhbar la sakta. 3. agar khana kharab hota, to ham blmar ho jate. 4. agar ap dhlre bolte, to mat samajh sakti. 5. agar turn cahte, to ham tumhare sath sahar-ke bahar jate. 6. agar lark! Hindi parhtl, to vah ap-ke sath bol sakti. 7. agar perke nice ghas hot!, to gay us-ko khatl. 8. agar bazar pas hota, to aurat us-ko dekhne-ke liye jati. 9. agar hotal-ka kamra accha hota, to pathik sukhi hota. 10. agar tum-ko sahar jana hota, to mal tumhare sath ata. 11. agar dhobl accha hota, to ham us-ko dhone-ke liye kapre dete. 12. agar adml Hindi bol sakta, to vah ap-ke sath bolta. 13. agar pan! mitha hota, to larka us-ko pita. 14. agar men bahan gati to mal ghar-ke bahar jata. 15. agar phal pakke hote, to bandar un-ko curate. 19.4.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. If the policeman would catch the thief, he would beat him. 2. If the oxen had stopped, the farmer would have driven them. 3. If the water were cold, we would drink it. 4. If my friend would buy the newspaper, we would be able to read it. 5. If you (hon. fm.) had wanted to say anything, you would have talked. 6. If there had been ripe fruits on the tree, the monkeys would have plucked them. 7. If you (msc.) were tired, you would have rested. 8. If the servant were good, the master would be happy. 9. If the water

150

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

had been hot, we (msc.) would have washed with it. 10. If your house had been near-by, I (msc.) could have gone there with you. 11. If the child were to run, he would fall. 12. If the road were long, the traveller would become tired. 13. If you (hon. msc.) had to come to see me, you should have come on time. 14. If the road had been long, the traveller would have become tired. 15. If you (hon. fm.) could get up early, you could go with us to the city. 19.5 pahila larka kitab parhta haL

T h e first boy reads the book,

dusra larka us-ki bat sunta hai.

T h e second boy listens to him.

tisra larka kamre-se bahar jata hai.

T h e third boy goes out of the room,

cauthl larki kuc-kc pas rukti hai. pacvi larki us-ki madad karti hai.

T h e fourth girl stops near the well, T h e fifth girl helps her.

chathi larki balti kue-me dalti haL

T h e sixth girl drops the bucket in the well,

satva admi khet-me khodtl hai. athvl admi us-ka hukam manta hai.

T h e seventh man digs in the field, T h e eighth man obeys his command,

nava admi paudho-par pini dalta hai. dasvf aurat mithayi banati haL

T h e ninth man pours water on the plants, T h e tenth woman makes sweets,

gyarvi aurat bacce-ke piche bhagti hai. barhvi aurat un-par hasti hai.

T h e eleventh woman runs after the child, T h e twelfth woman laughs at them.

This section illustrates the ordinal numbers. Observe that pacva fifth and the adjectives from satva seventh, on, are formed by adding the suffix -va to the cardinal numbers. The ordinals function like the adjectives described in sections 4.3 and 6.1. T h e adjectives whose final vowels are nasalized keep this nasalization when the final vowels are changed to agree in gender, number, and form with the nouns they modify. REMARKS: ( 1 ) bit sunna means to listen (literally, to hear the account or saying); madad karna translates English to help. They function like kam karna to work. ( 2 ) dusra also translates other, another; e.g., larka dusre larko-ke sath khelta hai. The boy plays with other boys.; yah dusra dost hai. This is another ( = a second) friend. 19.5.1 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. ma bacco-ko tisri kahanl parhegl. 2. pacva larka burhi aurat-ke liye bhari lakri laega. 3. turn mere barhve saval-ka javab kab doge? 4. kisan dusre per-ke nice aram karta hai. 5. dost mujhe athvT kitab vapas deta hai. 6. chathi tren kab pahucegl. 7. vah cauthe makan-ke piche hai. 8. navl lark! gyarve larki-ki bat suntT hai. 9. pahill larki balti kue-me dalne-ke liye jatl hai. 10. naukar dasve pathik-ke liye thanda pan! lata hai. 19.5.2 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. T h e carpenter cuts the fifth tree. 2. T h e traveller stays in the third room. 3. You (hon. msc.) can take water from the second well. 4. When will the seventh train come into the station? 5. T h e eleventh man may be in the office today. 6. T h e first man will be able to speak Hindi with you. 7. Father prefers to read the tenth newspaper. 8. You should take the fourth fruit. 9. The fourth servant will pick up the plates from the table. 10. T h e eleventh traveller prefers to rest. 19.6 Text 3. Bambai-ki sair.1 Translate into English. Answer the questions in Hindi: seth

7

STta 2 aur Syama 3 Rampur 4 -me rahti hai. Slta-kl larki Sarla 5 -ki sad! 6 Bambai-ke Manikcand 8 -ke larke, Surajmal, 9 -se hot! hai. ek sal bad 10 Sarla-kT ma blmar ho

LESSON 1 9 11

151

jâtï hai, aur Bambaï davâ -kê liyë jâtl hai. vahâ-së vah dô mahïnë-kë bâd vâpas âtî hai, aur Syâmâ-së bâzâr-më miltî hai. Syâmâ: Sîtâ Bahan, 12 âp-kl tabiyat 13 ab kaisî hai? âp Bambaï-më kahâ thï? Sïti: mêrî tabiyat ab bilkul 1 4 thïk hai. par abhl halkâ 15 khânâ-hï khâtï hû. mal Sarlâ-kë ghar thaharï thï.1® Syâmâ: Sarlâ kaisî haiP us-kâ patl kyâ kartâ hai? Sïtâ: Sarlâ bahut khus hai. us-kâ patï kàlëj 1 7 -më parhtâ hai. us-kê sasur 18 -kë pas âth makàn aur kaprë-kâ rôzgâr 19 hai. us-kë makin-më ëk chôtâ flait 20 mehmâno 2 1 -kë liyë thâ. mal usï-më rahtî thï. Sarlâ-kï sàs 2 2 bahut bhali-hai. rôz l â m 2 3 aur subah mujhë dëkhnë âtî thi. Sarlâ-kë s^sur-kë pas dô môtrë hai. mujhë Sarlâ-kî sâs apnî môtar-më rôz sâm caupâtï 2 4 -par le jâtï thï. Syâmâ: Sïtâ Bahan, mai Bambaï dëkhnâ câhtï hu. Sïtâ: Bambaï acchï jagah hai. sâm-kë vakt samudra-kë kinârë bahut lôg ghûmnë 26 -kô âtë haï. vahâ-par barë bare gharô-kï aurtfbhï âtî hai. vê klabô 2 8 -më jâtï haï; tënis 2 7 khëltï haï. Syâmâ: un-kô klabo-me jânë-kâ vakt kahâ miltâ hai? Sïti: un-kê yahâ naukar sab kâm kartë haï. Syâmâ: âp-në28 Bambaï-më kyâ kyâ kharïdâ? Sïtâ: maï-nê 2 8 vaha bâzâr dêkhâ. sâriyâ bahut acchï haï. vahâ-par môtï 2 9 -kê gahnë acchë the. maï-në ëk sët 3 0 Kamlâ 3 1 -kë liyë kharïdâ hai. kuch kaprë-bhï us-kê liyë kharïdnâ câhtï thï. us-kï sâdî-bhï aglë 32 sâl karnë-kâ vicâr 3 3 hai. par mërï bïmârï 8 4 -më bahut paisc lagë. is liyë maï zyâdâ cïze' na kharïd sakî. Syâmâ: âp-kâ aspatâl 85 ghar-së kitnî dur thâ? âp vaha kaisë jâtï thï? Sïtâ: mcrâ aspatâl âth mïl thâ. Syâmâ: tab 3 8 tô âp-kô ânë jànë-kî bahut taklïf hôgi? 37 Sïtâ: nahî. kabhï kabhî Sarlâ-kï môtar-par jâtï thï, aur kabhï rëlgârï-së. Bambaï-më sahar-kë andar bijlï-kï rëlgârï caltî hai. ëk jagah-sc dùsrï jagah jânâ âsân hai. môtar basë-bhï caltï haï. Syâmâ: môtar basé Dillï-më-bhï haï. Sïtâ: Dillï-kï basé acchï nahf. vë bahut dër-së 3 8 âtî haï. Bambaï-më dô manzilë 89 bâsë-bhï hai aur har pac minat-par dûsrï bas âtî hai. vë bahut sastï haï. Dillï-kï tarah Bambaïkî sarko-par ut aur ghôrë gâriya nahî. vahâ-par tëksî, basë aur môtrë-hï dikhâyî 4 0 dëtï haï. Syâmâ: tab tô vah bahut acchâ sahar hôgâ. âp-kî larkï barî bhâgyavân 41 hai. Sïtâ: Bambaï-më barë barë ghar haï. ëk ëk bilding 4 2 sât yâ âth manzil ûcï hai. aur us-mc chôtë k a ï 4 3 flait hôtê haï. Syâmâ: tab tô ëk bilding ëk muhallë 44 -kï tarah hôgi. Sïti: yah bât thïk nahî, Syâmâ. vaha-kë lôg itnë milansâr 45 nahî. itnë pâs 4 6 rahtë haï, par kisï-së zyâdâ nahf bôltë. Syâmâ: vë lôg kyâ bôlï 4 7 bôltë haï? Sïtâ: vahâ-par Marâthï 4 8 aur Gujarâtï 4 9 dô bôliyâ bôlï jâtï 5 0 haï. larkiya akëlï 61 bâisiklô 52 -par skul jâtï haï. Bambaï-më aurtë zyâdâtar 5 3 akëlï bâzâr jâtï haï, aur apnâ sab kâm âp 54 -hï kartï haï. Syâmâ: yah tô Sarlâ-kë liyë bahut acchâ hai. vah kâlëj parhi hai. pardë 55 -më usé taklïf hôtt. kyâ vah khânâ âp-hï banâtï hai?

152

HINDI

GRAMMAR

AND

READER

Sita: nahl us-ké ghar-mé tin naukar hai. kabhi kabhl vah-bhl khànà banàti hai. us-ki sas bahut acchà khànà pakàti hai. Syama: àp use kab bulàégi? mal us-se bahut milnà càhtl hu. Sita: mal use garml 5 8 -me bulàugi. Bambal-kT garml us-ké liyé thik nahl. vah khuli 5 7 aur sukhl jaghó-me rahtl thi. BambaI bahut nam 5 8 hai. is-sé us-kà svàstha 5 9 thik nahi. maT-bhl abhl kamzór 6 0 hu. Syamà: Bahan, àp-lóg is sài kisl pahàr 6 1 -par kyó nahi jàtì? àp bahut thaki hai. bimàrlkè bàd havà 6 2 badalnà 6 3 acchà hòtà hai. Sita: Sarlà-kè pità-bhl yahl kahté hai. ham-lóg Masurl 6 4 -me ghar-kà intazàm karégé. Sarlà-ké pità ék mahlné-ki chutti 6 5 lege. Syama: Sarlà yaha kitné din thaharegi? mal-né sàdi-ke bàd-sé use nahi dèkhà. us-ké àné-kl khabar dijiyè. acchà, 66 ab mai calti hu. Sita: acchà, namasté. mai Sarlà-kò àp-ké ghar làugi. vah yahà das din thaharegi. phir èk mahlnà Masùri rahné-ké bàd BambaI vàpas jàegl. prasna: 1. Sita BambaI kyó gayi? 2. Sarlà-kà pati kyà kartà hai? 3. Sarlà-ké sasur-kà kyà pèsà hai? 4. BambaI kaisà sahar hai? 5. Sltà-né kyà kyà cizé Bambal-me kharidl? 6. Bambai-ké lòg sàm-ké vakt kyà karté hai? 7. Bambai aur Dilll-ki baso-mé kyà f a r k 6 7 hai? 8. Bambal-mé kyà bòli boli jàtì hai? 9. kyà Sarlà-kó Bambai-kl garml pasand hai? 10. kyà Bambal-ki aurte' khànà apné àp pakàti hai? NOTES:

1. walk,

6. m a r r i a g e ment,

trip, visit

(T); 7. m e r c h a n t

medicine

(I);

(ì);

2. girl's n a m e ;

(a);

8. m a n ' s n a m e ; 9 . m a n ' s n a m e ;

12. friend

(l);

15. light;

16. for the construction see 2 0 . 1 2 0 . flat, apartment

shore

(i);

2 9 . pearl

2 5 . to g o about, (i);

3 5 . hospital story

(i);

(a);

3 0 . set

(à);

-1. n a m e of

to 2 0 . 1 . 3 ;

2 1 . guest

to turn

(a);

about,

3 1 . girl's n a m e ;

17. college

(I);

(a);

22. mother-in-law

to stroll;

26. club

town;

10. a f t e r w a r d s ;

13. health, condition, disposition

ness

(a);

3. girl's n a m e ;

tennis

(a);

thought

(à); (a);

treat-

altogether;

2 3 . every e v e n i n g ;

27.

33.

name;

14. completely,

18. f a t h e r - i n - l a w (i);

(à);

3 2 . next, f o r t h c o m i n g ;

5.

11. medical

28.

19. busi24.

sea-

sec

21.1;

3 4 . illness

(I);

( a ) ; 3 6 . then; 3 7 . use of future to denote doubt or probability; 3 8 . late ( a d v . ) ; 39. d e c k ,

40. dikhayl dénà be seen, appear; 41. fortunate, lucky;

4 2 . building

(T) ; 43. several,

some;

4 4 . locality, district, division of town ( a ) ; 45. friendly, sociable; 4 6 . so close; 4 7 . dialect, language ( i ) ; 48.

Marathi;

49.

Gujarati;

50.

are

spoken

(see

37.1

5 3 . generally; 54. self (reflective p r o n o u n ) ; 5 5 . pardah

for

the

(a) —

Passive);

51.

alone;

52.

the custom under which

bicyclc

(!) ;

the w o m a n

is

secluded f r o m all males other than those of the close family u n i t ; 56. s u m m e r ( i ) : 5 7 . o p e n ; 58. d a m p , wet;

5 9 . health, well-being

(a);

60. weak;

61. mountain

(a);

62. climate

( ! ) ; 63. change

(For

infinitive functioning as the subject of a sentence, i.e., a noun, see 3 7 . 2 and cross references.) ; 6 4 . of t o w n ; 6 5 . vacation ( i ) ;

6 6 . good

( a d v . ) ; 6 7 . difference

(a).

the

name

Lesson 20 20.1 mai cala.

I (msc.) walked.

mai caE.

I ( f m . ) walked.

vah cala.

H e walked.

vah cali.

She walked.

ham cale. ham calf

W e ( m s c ) walked.

turn cale. turn call.

You (msc.) walked. You ( f m . ) walked.

a p cale.

You (msc.) walked.

ap cali.

You ( f m . ) walked.

ve cale.

They (msc.) walked.

ve call.

They ( f m . ) walked.

We ( f m . ) walked.

T h i s section introduces the H i n d i equivalent of the English " S i m p l e Perfect" tense. T h e Hindi construction consists of the past participle of the verb which, in the case of intransitive verbs (i.e., verbs which cannot take a direct object), agrees in gender and number with the subject of the sentence. T h e past participle of a verb is formed by attaching to the verbal stem the following suffixes; -a for the masculine singular; -e for the masculine plural; -1 for the feminine singular; and -I for the feminine plural. (Compare the "Imperfect" of hona in 19.1.) 20.1.1 More examples are: bacce ghar rahe. yatri aj subah pahuca. nadi samudra-me gayi. lark! dukan-me das minat thahari. billi kue-me giri. sabziya khet-me ugi. adml do ghante cale.

T h e children remained at home. T h e traveller arrived this morning. T h e river flowed into the sea. T h e girl waited in the shop for ten minutes. T h e cat fell into the well. T h e vegetables grew in the field. T h e men walked ( f o r ) two horrs.

153

154 âdmî âdmi aunt aurtê

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

kamrê-mê kamrê-mê kamrê-mê kamrê-mê

iyi. iyê. iyi. iyi.

larki per-ke nice soya, larke per-ke nice soye. larki per-ke nice soyi. larkiya per-ke nice soyi.

The The The The

man came into the room. men came into the room. woman came into the room. women came into the room.

The The The The

boy slept under the tree. boys slept under the tree. girl slept under the tree. girls slept under the tree.

R E M A R K S : Verbal stems ending in a vowel add -y before the suffixes are attached. See sentences 3 and 8 to 15, above, jana to go replaces the stem j l with ga to form the past participle. See section 2.1, remarks ( 2 ) for the stem and section 22.1 for the prst participle of jana.

20.1.2

bacce ghar rahe hal. yatri aj subah pahuca haL nadi samudra-me gayi hai. larki dukan-me das minat thahari hai.

The children have remained at home. The traveller has arrived this morning. The river has flowed into the sea. The girl has waited in the shop for ten minutes. bilG kuê-mê giri hai. The cat has fallen into the well. sabziyi khêt-mê ugi haï. The vegetables have grown in the field. âdmi do ghantê cale haï. The men have walked (for) two hours. âdmi kamre-mê âyâ hai. The man has come into the room. larki pêr-kê nice sôyi hai. The girl has slept under the tree. This section illustrates the Hindi equivalent of the English "Present Perfect" tense. This consists of the past participle of the construction described in section 20.1, above, plus the present tense of the verb hônâ. R E M A R K S : (1) Here the past participle suffix is not nasalized for the feminine plural. (2) baitha hai translates is seated. 20.1.3 baccë ghar-mê rahê the. The children had remained at home. yitrï âj subah pahûcâ thà. The traveller had arrived this morning. nadi samudra-me gayï thi. The river had flowed into the sea. larkiyi pêr-kê nice sôyi thi. The girl had waited in the shop for ten minutes. sabziyi khêt-mê ugi thf. The vegetables had grown in the field. âdmi kamrê-mê iyê thè. The men had come into the room. larkiyi pêr-kê nicë sôyi thi. The girls had slept under the tree. This section illustrates the Hindi equivalent of the English "Past Perfect" tense. This consists of the past participle plus the imperfect construction of the verb hona, tha (See 19.1), which with the past participle agree with the subject of the sentence in gender and number. 20.1.4 bacce ghar rahe hogc. yitri Ij subah pahuca h5ga.

The children will have remained at home, The traveller will have arrived this morning.

LESSON 2 0

lark! dukan-me das minat thahari hogi.

155

The girl will have waited in the shop for ten minutes. adml kamre-me aye hoge. The men will have come into the room, mai car ghante soya huga. I will have slept four hours. This section illustrates the Hindi equivalent of the English "Future Pcrfect" tense. This consists of the past participle plus the future of the verb hona (See 15.2), the suffix of which with the past participle agrees in gender and number with the subject of the sentence. R E M A R K S : This construction also translates English must have (expressing the possibility of an act having taken place). E.g., the first sentence can be translated: T h e children must have remained at home, and the second sentence: The traveller must have arrived this morning. 20.1.5 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. larke do ghante-ke liye chotl nadi-me taire. 2. ma aurto-ke sath bazar-se ay! thl. 3. pathik sahar-se aya hai. 4. larka burhi ma ke sath chote makan-me raha tha. 5. hamara bail nadi-ke pas cara hoga. 6. bandar uce per-par jaldi-se daure. 7. gar! makan-ke samne rukl thl. 8. bacce dhobl-ke gadhe-ke plche cale hoge. 9. bhukha kutta chote bacce-ke piche cala hai. 10. motargar! mere samne ruki hogi. 11. gay chote bachre-ke sath daurl hai. 12. adml ghar-ke samne baithe. 13. naukar daftar-ke pas bis minat thahare the. 14. pita sahar-se vapas aye hoge. 15. kisan per-ke nice soya. 16. sadhu talab-ke pas baithe hai. 17. dukhl larka nadi-ke pas rdya tha. 18. bet! pita-ke sath §ahar-ko ayl hai. 19. pathik hotal-me das din raha hoga. 20. pita bacco-ke sath khele. 20.1.6 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The dog slept on the ground. 2. My friend had come to the city to see me. 3. T h e barber has come into the house. 4. The washerman had walked behind the donkey. 5. The boy will have swum under the bridge. 6. The thirsty traveller went to the well. 7. The child will have slept in the garden. 8. The holy man is seated beside the road. 9. The animals had come from the jungle at night. 10. The camcl will have stopped beside the river to drink. 11. The servant walked behind (his) master. 12. The women have stopped near the shop. 13. Why had the train stopped near the bridge? 14. Your cow will have grazed in our field. 15. The trolley stopped in front of the temple. 16. T h e hungry horse has stopped near the grass. 17. Why had the man come back from the city? 18. Will the boy have come back from the well with water? 19. T h e litde girls played under the tree. 20. The servants are seated in front of the office.

20.2 naukar-ko k l m karni pasand hai. bacce-ko sona pasand h a i mujhe khelna pasand hai. mujhe yah kitab pasand hai. Iarke-k5 yah mulk pasand hai. bilH-ko dudh pasand hai. bacce-ko kutte pasand hai. Iarki-k5 khubsurat kapre pasand hai. mujhe khatte amle pasand nahi hai. mujhe mahagi clze pasand nahi hai. mujhe mi the am pasand hai.

The servant likes to work, The child likes to sleep, I like to play, I like this book. The boy likes this country. The cat likes milk, The child likes dogs. The girl likes beautiful clothes, I don't like sour olives, I don't like expensive things, I like sweet mangoes.

156

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

kya ap-ko sardi pasand hai? Do you like the cold? kya ap-ko garmi-ka mausam pasand hai? Do you like hot weather? This section illustrates another way of translating into Hindi the English construction consisting of likes (to) followed by another verb or noun. (Compare 15.3) The English subject is placed in Hindi in the object form before the posposition -ko; the English object is made the subject of pasand hona to be liked. R E M A R K S : amla ( a ) olive, garmi (I) warm weather, summer, mulk ( a ) country, sardi ( I ) cold weather, winter. 20.2.1 naukar-ko kam karna zyada pasand hai. bacce-ko sona zyada pasand hai. mujhe khelna zyada pasand hai. mujhe yah kitib zyada pasand hai. larke-ko yah des zyada pasand hai. billl-ko dudh pina zyada pasand hai. bacce-ko kutte zyada pasand hai. larki-ko khubsuxat kapre kharidna zyida pasand hai.

The servant prefers to work. The child prefers to sleep. I prefer to play. I prefer this book. The boy prefers this country. The cat prefers to drink milk. The child prefers dogs. The girl prefers to buy beautiful clothes.

This section illustrates another way of translating into Hindi the English phrase beginning with the word prefers (to). (See 15.3.1.) The construction is identical with that described in section 20.2 with one addition—the adverb zyada more is placed before pasand hona. R E M A R K S : des ( a ) country. 20.2.2 naukar-ko khet-me kh5dne-se ghar-me kam karna zyada pasand hai. mujhe parhne-se khelna zyada pasand hai. mujhe us kitab-se yah kitab zyada pasand hai.

The servant prefers working in the house to digging in the field. I prefer playing to studying. I prefer this book to that book.

The boy prefers seeing this country to some other country. The child prefers dogs to cats. The girl prefers beautiful clothes to ugly clothes. This section illustrates another way of translating into Hindi the English construction indicating preference for one being or thing over another. (Compare 15.3.2) This construction is identical with that described in section 20.2.1 with one addition. Compare: mujhê yah kitâb zyida pasand hai. I prefer this book.; and mujhë us kitâb-së yah kitib zyada pasand hai. I prefer this book to that book. Observe that the words introduced in the English phrase by the preposition to are placed in Hindi in the object form before the posposition -se. 20.2.3 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. pathik-kô pïnë-kë liyê thandâ pânl pasand hai. 2. ham-kô môtargârî-së safar karnâ zyâdâ pasand hai. 3. kyâ tum-kô sardî-së garmï-kâ mausam zyâdâ pasand hai? 4. mujhë kamrë-më ârâm karnâ zyâdâ pasand hai. 5. baccô-kô mïthë âm pasand haï. 6. àp-kô

larke-ko kisi aur des-se yah des dekhna zyada pasand hai. bacce-ko billiyo-se kutte zyada pasand hai. larki-ko badsurat kapro-se khubsurat kapre zyada pasand hai.

LESSON 2 0

157

mujh-se vah admi kyo zyada pasand hai? 7. us-ko akhbar parhna zyada pasand hai. 8. kya tum-ko bailgari-se tram-me safar karna zyada pasand hai? 9. ham-ko sardl-ka mausam pasand hai. 10. admi-ko kam karne-sc ghar-me aram karna zyada pasand hai. 11. mujhe nahane-ke liye garm pan! zyada pasand hai. 12. ap-ko garml-ka mausam kyo pasand naht? 13. mujhe parhne-se sona zyada pasand hai. 14. larke-ko ghar-me rahna zyada pasand nahf! 15. kya ap-ko safar karna pasand hai? 20.2.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. Do you like working? 2. Why do you prefer travelling? 3. The traveller prefers cold weather to hot weather for travelling. 4. The boy likes to swim. 5. Does the child prefer sour things? 6. I prefer automobiles to ox-carts. 7. Why do you prefer this book to that newspaper? 8. I like to rest. 9. Does anyone prefer to walk? 10. Some people prefer walking to going by automobile. 11. The girl likes to sew. 12. Some people prefer sweet things. 13. We will prefer mangoes to sour olives. 14. Will anyone prefer that country to this country? 15. The cow likes to eat grass. 20.3 admi larke-se bar! hai. The man is bigger than the boy. per maltan-se uca hai. The tree is higher than the house, nadi kue-se gahri hai. The river is deeper than the well, sarak gali-se Iambi hai. The road is longer than the street, larki aurat-se choti hai. The girl is smaller than the woman, bahan bhai-se acchl hai. The sister is better than the brother. Sections 20.3 to 20.3.8 deal with the Hindi constructions equivalent to the comparative and superlative of English adjectives. This section illustrates the comparative construction. It can be seen that this is based on the Predicate-Adjective construction described in section 3.2, with one addition—the word or words introduced in the English sentence by than are placed in Hindi in the object form before the postposition -sc. Compare: admi bara hai. T h e man is big. and admi larke-se b a n hai. The man is bigger than the boy.; per uca hai. T h e tree is high, and per makin-se uca hai. The tree is higher than the house.; nadi gahri hai. T h e river is deep, and nadi kue-se gahri haL The river is deeper than the welL; yah uca per haL This is a high tree, and yah us-se uca per haL This is a higher tree than that.; yah gahri nadi haL This is a deep river, and yah us nadi -se gahri nadi hai. This is a deeper river than that river.

203.1 yah tasvir us tasvir-se zyada khubsurat hai.

This picture is more beautiful than that picture. yah larka us larke-se zyada hosiyar hai. This boy is cleverer than that boy. harin ser-se zyada kayar hai. The deer is more cowardly than the lion, naram zamin sakht zamin-se zyada upjau Soft ground is more fertile than hard haL ground, billi kutte-se zyada pyasi haL The cat is thirstier than the dog. The comparative construction illustrated in this section is identical with that described in section 2 0 3 with the addition of the adverb zyada more, which is used with certain adjectives. R E M A R K S : ( 1 ) It is difficult to formulate a rule indicating when zyada is required for the comparative construction and when it is not. In many instances adjectives de-

158

HINDI G R A M M A R AND READER

scribing quality require zyada and those describing quantity (See 2 0 3 ) do not require it. It seems, too, that adjectives which do not change their form for gender and number (See 11.4) require zyada in this construction. (2) adhik more occurs as an alternative for zyada. 203.2 adml sab-se bara haL The man is the biggest (of all). per sab-se uca hai. The tree is the tallest (of all). sarak sab-se Iambi hai. The road is the longest (of all). larki sab-se choti haL The girl is the smallest (of all). tasvir sab-se zyada khubsurat hai. The picture is the most beautiful (of all). larka sab-se zyada hosiyar hai. The boy is the most clever (of all). harin sab-se zyada kayar hai. The deer is the most cowardly (of all). This section deals with the superlative construction. Like the comparative constructions described above, the superlative is based on the "Predicate-Adjective" construction in section 3.2 with one addition—the phrase sab-se (lit., of all). Compare: adml bara hai. The man is big. and adml sab-se bara hai. The man is the biggest (of all).; per uca hai. The tree is tall, and per sab-se uca hai. The tree is the tallest (of all).; sarak Iambi hai. The road is long, and sarak sab-se Iambi hai. The road is the longest (of all). (Note the sentence with zyada and see section 20.3.1 above.) 203.3 Exercise I. Translate into English: 1. yah mazdur us mazdur-se zyada kamzor nahi hai. 2. ham sab-se mithe phal khana cahte hai. 3. kya kua nadl-se gahra hai? 4. gall sarak-se patli hai. 5. yah choti mez us gol mez-se caurl hai. 6. mujhe sab-se lamba rassa cahiye. 7. larka dost-se zyada javan hai. 8. yah mandir sab-se zyada khubsurat hai. 9. us-ka bojh mere bojh-se zyada bhari nahi. 10. ma bacce-ko sab-se mitha seb detl hai. 11. mujhe sab-se Iambi char! laiye. 12. kue-ka pan! nadi-ke panl-se thanda hai. 13. hathl sab janvaro-se bara hai. 14. mujhe sab-se zyada mazbut mazdur bhejiye. 15. taftg gall sab-se zyada khatarnak hai. 20.3.4 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. For travelling an automobile is better than an ox-cart. 2. I need a stronger man than you. 3. Why do you (fm.) want the biggest apple? 4. Do you have a longer rope than this? 5. Is your ox-cart the best? 6. For this work I need a stronger man than you. 7. He is the happiest of all. 8. Isn't well-water better to drink than tank-water? 9. I need the driest wood for the fire. 10. This room is not better than that room. 11. His automobile is smaller than yours. 12. Did the woman need to buy the best sari in the shop? 13. This road is longer than the other road. 14. I (msc.) want to drink colder water than this. 15. This is not the prettiest flower. 203.5 yah tasvir us tasvlr-se kam sundar hai. yah larka us larke-se kam hosiyar hai. ser harin-se kam kayar hai. sakht zamln naram zamin-se kam upjau hai.

This picture is less beautiful than that picture. This boy is less clever than that boy. The lion is less cowardly than the deer, Hard ground is less fertile than soft ground,

LESSON

20

159

The construction illustrated in this section is identical with that described in section 20.3.1. Here kam less replaces zyidà more. REMARKS: harin ( a ) deer. 203.6 yah tasvir sab-sc kam sondar haL This picture is the least beautiful (of all), yah larki sab-sc kam hdsiyàr haL This boy is the least clever (of all), yah ser sab-sc kam kayar haL This lion is the least cowardly (of all), sakht zamin sab-se kam upjau hai. Hard ground is the least fertile (of all). The construction illustrated in this section is identical with the sentences with zyàdà described in section 203.2. Here kam replaces zyàdà. 203.7 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. yah khét us khét-sé kam upjau hai. 2. vah sab-se kam chótà mazdur hai. 3. kyà tumkó is-sé kam lambà rassà càhiyé? 4. àp-ké bail kyó sab-sé kam chóté hai? 5. vah zamin is zamin-sé sakht hai. 6. kyà tum is-sé kam mahàgl handiya kharidnà càhti hó? 7. àp-kà khèt kyó sab-se kam upjàu hai? 8. kyà us-kà kuà sab-sé kam gahrà hai? 9. kisàn-kò is-se kyó kam bara hai càhiyé? 10. yah sahar-ki sab-sé kam ucT imàrat hai. 203.8 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. Why is your field less fertile than his? 2. This ox is less strong than that ox. 3. Is this road less long than that road? 4. Which is the least difficult of these questions? 5. Is the hard ground the least fertile of all? 6. The man is bringing a less heavy load than (his) servant. 7. This road is the least dangerous of all. 8. The servant is less thirsty than the gardener. 9. Call in the least sleepy servant to help me. 10. He is the least careful of all. 20.4 Text 4. ck kisan kutumb-kl dincarya.1 Translate into English. Answer the questions in Hindi: mà subah pie bajé uthtl hai. muh u hath 2 dhókar 3 gàyó-kó khànà pani déti hai aur dudh nikàlt! 4 hai. Ma: Santi,5 Kamlà 5 aur Munnà 8 ut ho; sabérà 7 hó gayà. 8 dèkhó kitnà din niklà hai* calò, kué-sé pan! làé, tum log apnà apna 10 gharà 1 1 lo. [sab pan! làt! hai.] Mà: Kamlà àg jalàó, 12 aur dùdh us-par rakhó. ma! gày-kó khólugi. 13 Santi, tum-né apné bistar 1 4 nahf uthàyé. Munnà-ké-bhi bistar uthàó. mai jhàrQ 1 8 dug!. 16 Santi: Munnà ab-tak 1 7 sótà hai. kyà usé jagàu? Ma: us-kó jagàó aur muh dhókar 3 usé dùdh dó. tum aur Kamlà-bhi dudh piyó. Kamlà: Mà, tum kyà piyógi? Mi: ma! nahàkar 1 8 pùjà 1 9 karugl aur us-ké bàd cày piyugi. abhi méré liyè kuch mat 2 0 dó. Kamlà, apné pità-kó dudh aur mithàyl dó. vé khét-me kàm kartè hai. Munnà-kó-bhi sàth 2 1 lé jàó. 22 ma! pùjà karnà càht! hu. [ pùjà karné-ké bàd mà rasói-mé àti hai. cày banàtl hai aur piti hai. us-kè bàd vah dàl 2 3 àg-par rakhti hai. SàntI bartan 2 4 dhótì hai. Kamlà khét-sé vàpas àti hai aur sabzl-bhi lati hai. Munnà apné pità-ké sàth khét-mé rahtà hai.] Ma: Kamlà, sabzi dhókar 3 kàtó aur mujhé dó. thàli 2 5 -mé tin pàv 2 8 à t à 2 7 làó aur mujhé ék lóté 2 8 -mé pàni-bhi dó.

160

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

Kamlâ: kyà itnâ àtâ kàfï hai? Ma, âj mai rôti 2 9 bëlûgï. 30 [ma rôti pakâtî hai aur Kamlà bëltî hai.] Munnâ: Ma, mujhê bhukh 3 1 l a g î 3 2 hai. mal khàûgâ. Ma: Santi, Munnà-kô nahlâkar 3 3 kaprë badlô 3 4 aur us-kë liyë thâlî dô. [Munnâ aur Santi donò khânâ khâtë haï.] Piti: kyâ khânâ banà 3 5 hai? mal khânë 3 6 âû? Kamlà: ha, Pitâ-ji. khânâ taiyâr hai. Piti: mai das minât-më âugà. Sântî, bâltl 3 7 aur rassî 3 8 dô. mal nahàùgâ. mërî dhôtï ,i9 kaha hai? [Santi dhôtï lâtî hai.] Ma: Sântî, tumhârë pitâ khânë 4 0 âtë haï. un-kë liyë âsân 4 1 rakhô aur pànï aur thâlî dô. Kamlâ, tum pitâ-jï-kë liyë p â n 4 2 taiyâr karô. Piti: Munnâ kahâ hai? us-në abhî khânâ khâyâ nahî? Ma: Munnâ bâhar khëltâ hai. us-në khânâ khâyâ. âp khâiyë. [us-kë bàd mà aur Kamlà-bhî khâtî haï. pitâ àràm karnë-kë liyë apnë kamrë-më jâtê haï. mâ bartan dhôtï hai aur Kamlâ rasôï sâf kartï hai. Sântî bartanô-kô phir rasôî-më lê jâtï hai. Munnâ apnë pitâ-kë pâs lëtkar bâte kartâ hai. aur phir thôrï dër-me sô jâtâ 4 3 hai.] Kamlâ: âj s â m 4 4 -ko khânâ pakâûgî. tum divâlî 4 5 -kï mithâyî banâô. Ma: acchâ, Kamlâ, calò, kûë-së thôrà pânï aur 4 6 lâô. ghar-mC pïnë-kâ pânî nahî. [pânï lânë-kê bâd dônô Râmprasâd 4 7 -kï patnî Susïlâ 4 8 -kë pâs jâkar 4 9 baithtï haï.] Susïlâ: âô, Jïjï, 50 baithô. bahut dinô-kë bâd idhar 5 1 âyî. Kamlà, tum yah kyâ bintï ° 2 hô? Kamlâ: maï Munnâ-kë liyë svëtar 5 3 banâtï hû. Susïlâ: yah tô bahut acchï hai. kitnë dinô-më êk svëtar banëgà? Kamlâ: mai bahut dhîrë bintï hû. ëk mahïnë-më banëgâ. Mâ: Kamlâ-kô binnâ bahut pasand hai. par yah mërî madad bahut kartï hai. isë vakt kam miltâ hai. Susïlâ, kyâ tum divâlï-par màykë jâôgï? Susïlâ: maï is bâr ;)4 yahï 5 5 rahûgï. mërë bhâï yahâ âëgë. mai un-kë liyë acchï mithâyî banânâ câhtï hû. vë pahilî bâr mërë ghar âëgë. Jîjî, kyâ tum mërî madad kar saktî hô? Mâ: hâ, Susïlâ, barï khusï-së. tum sâm-kô mërë khar âô. maï âj sâm mithâyî banâugï. Susïlâ: khânâ kaun banâëgâ? kyâ âp rât-më mithâyî banâëgî? Mâ: nahî, Susïlâ. Kamlà âj khànà banâëgî. Sântî Munnâ-kô sulâëgï tum-bhî mërë yahâ khâô. tumhârë bhaï kitnë din thaharëgë? Susïlâ: vë das din thaharëgë. bahut acchâ. maï gâyô-kô khânâ dëkar dùdh nikâlkar âp-kë ghar àûgï. Ma: tumhàrï gâyë kitnë bajë vàpas âtî haï? Susïlâ: mërî gâyë âp-kï gâyô-kc sàth-hï âtî haï. àp-kî gâyë kaun bâdhëgà? Mâ: Munnà-kë pitâ âj khët-së jaldî 5 7 âëgë. vë jànvaro-kô khânâ pànï 5 8 degë un-kë s ï g 5 9 rangëgë. 6 0 maï ab mithâyî banânâ suru karùgï. 61 tum apnâ kâm khatam karkë 6 2 mërë ghar âô. prasna: 1. ma subah kyà kartï hai? 2. bëtîyâ kyà kartï haï? 3. Kamlà bhàï-kë liyë kyà banàtï hai? 4. svëtar banànë-më isë kitnë din lagtë haï? 5. ghar-kë kàm karnë-kë bâd aurtt kyâ kartï haï? 6. vë kis tyôhàr 6 3 -kî taiyârï 6 4 kartï haï? 7. Susïlâ kîs-kë liyë mithâyî banânâ câhtï

LESSON

20

161

hai? 8. sam-ko gayo-ko k a u n k h a n a dega? 9. M u n n a - k e pita khet-se jaldl kyo ana cahte hal? 10. gayo-ko khet-se vapas k a u n laega? NOTES: 1. daily routine, occupation ( i ) ; la. mouth ( a ) ; 2. face ( a ) , face and hands: 3. washing, for the gerund see 30.1; 4. dudh nikalna to milk, nikalna take out; 5. girl's name; 6. boy's name; 7. dawn, early morning ( a ) ; savera also occurs; 8. = hua, for the verbal cluster see the introduction to Lesson 28 and 28.3; 9. See how late in the day it is.; 10. for the repetition see 36.2, the second group of sentences; 11. water-pot ( a ) ; 12. light, lit., cause to burn; 13. open, release, untie; 14. bedding ( a ) ; 15. broom ( a ) ; 16. jharu dena to sweep; 17. still, up till now; 18. having washed, see note 3; 19. worship (1); 20. negative adverb employed with imperative; 21. with, along (adv.); 22. = lo take, for the verbal cluster see note 8; 23. pulse, sweet pea (1); 24 vessel, utensil, dish ( a ) ; 25. flat dish ( l ) ; 26. = 1 / 4 t h s e e r . ( a ) ; 27. flour, ground grain ( a ) ; 28. small metal water-pot ( a ) ; 29. flat wheat cake ( I ) ; 30. roll out; 31. hunger ( l ) ; 32. = I'm hungry., for the construction with lagna see 34.11; 33. wash (a second being), see note 3; 34. change; 35. made, banna to be made; 36. for the infinitive without -ko see 37.2.2; 37. bucket (I); 38. rope ( I ) ; 39. cloth worn by men around lower half of body wrapped to form type of trousers ( I ) ; 40. for the infinitive without -ko see 37.2.2; 41. seat ( a ) ; 42. a preparation of lime and other ingredients wrapped in a betel-leaf ( a ) ; 43. so jana fall asleep, see note 8;. 44. this evening; 45. dlvali ( i ) , a festival celebrated on the day of the new moon of the month of Kartik (October-November). The feature of this is the illumination of houses and streets with rows of lamps; 46. a little more water, i.e., in addition; 47. man's name; 48. woman's name; 49. having gone, see note 3; 50. elder sister, sister-in-law ( I ) ; 51. hither, here; 52. knit; 53. sweater ( a ) ; 54. time ( a ) ; 55. here, in this place; 56. put to sleep; 57. = early; 58. very often two nouns occur together without aur and linking them; 59. horn ( a ) ; 60. color; 61. begin; 62. having done, see 30.1, Remarks ( 3 ) ; 63. holiday, festival ( a ) ; 64. preparation (I).

Lesson 21 21.1 mai-ne dekha.

I ( m s c . ) saw.

mai-ne dekha.

I ( f m . ) saw.

us-ne dekha. us-ne dekha.

H e saw. She saw.

ham-ne dekha.

We (msc.) saw.

ham-ne d e k h i .

We ( f m . ) saw.

tum-ne dekha.

You (msc.) saw.

tum-ne dekha.

You ( f m . ) saw.

ip-ne dekha.

You (msc.) saw.

ap-ne dekha.

You ( f m . ) saw.

uhno-ne dekha. unho-ne dekha.

They (msc.) saw, They ( f m . ) saw.

T h i s section illustrates the Hindi construction which translates English constructions involving the Simple Perfect tense of transitive verbs (i.e., verbs which can take a direct object). T h e Hindi construction consists of the English subject placed in the object form before the postposition -ne, and the past participle of the verb, bearing the subject singular masculine suffix, -a. These sentences illustrate transitive verbs without direct objects. Here the past participle will bear the subject singular masculine suffix -5, no matter what the gender of the noun placed before the postposition -ne may be. R E M A R K S : T h e form of the first person pronoun when placed before the postposition -ne is mal; the form of the third person plural pronoun is unho- (Similarly, the plural form of the yah pronoun will be inho-; and that of kaun, kinho-). 21.1.1 bete-ne larke-ko dekha.

T h e son saw the boy.

bete-ne larko-ko dekha.

T h e son saw the boys.

beto-ne larko-ko dekha.

T h e sons saw the boys.

bete-ne larki-ko dekha.

T h e son saw the girl.

bete-ne larkiyo-ko dekha.

T h e son saw the girls.

beto-ne larkiyo-ko dekha.

T h e sons saw the girls.

162

LESSON

21

beti-ne larki-ko dekha. beti-ne larkiyo-ko dekha. betiyo-ne larkiyo-ko dekha.

The daughter saw the girl. The daughter saw the girls. The daughters saw the girls.

beti-ne larke-ko dekha. beti-ne larko-ko dekha. betiyo-ne larko-ko dekha.

The daughter saw the boy. The daughter saw the boys. The daughters saw the boys.

163

This section is concerned with the translation into Hindi of the direct objects of English transitive verbs in the Simple Perfect tense. The direct object of the English sentence is translated into Hindi by the object form of the noun or pronoun which is placed before the postposition -ko. The verbal construction is the same as that described in 21.1, with the participle having only one form—that bearing the subject singular masculine suffix, -a. R E M A R K S : It has been noted before (See 9.1.1, Remarks, 1) that in connection with nominal forms denoting things (and, sometimes, animals), when the postposition -ko is not employed, the noun is placed in the subject form. In such cases the past construction used will be that described in section 21.2, following. It can further be said that when a participle or specific thing (or animal) is indicated the postposition -ko is used, and, therefore, the construction described in this section would apply.

21.12

bete-ne larke-ko dekha hai. bete-ne larko-ko dekha hai. beto-ne larko-ko dekha hai.

The son has seen the boy. The son has seen the boys. The sons have seen the boys.

bete-ne larki-ko dekha hai. bete-ne larkiyo-k5 dekha hai. beto-ne larkiyo-ko dekha hai.

The son has seen the girl. The son has seen the girls. The sons have seen the girls.

beti-ne larki-ko dekha hai. beti-ne larkiyo-ko dekha hai. betiyo-ne larkiyo-ko dekha haL

The daughter has seen the girl. The daughter has seen the girls. The daughters have seen the girls.

beti-ne larke-ko dekha haL beti-ne larko-ko dekha haL betiyo-ne larko-ko dekha hai.

The daughter has seen the boy. The daughter has seen the boys. The daughters have seen the boys.

This section illustrates the Hindi equivalent of English constructions containing the Present Perfect of transitive verbs. It consists of the past participle of the construction described in section 21.1.1 plus the present third person singular of h5na, haL 21.13 bete-ne larki-ko dekha tha. The son had seen the boy. bete-ne larko-ko dekha tha. The son had seen the boys, beto-ne larko-ko dekha tha. The sons had seen the boys. bete-ne larki-ko dekha tha. bete-ne larkiyo-k5 dekha tha. beto-ne larkiyo-ko dekha tha.

The son had seen the girl, The son had seen the girls, The sons had seen the girls.

164

H I N D I G R A M M A R A N D READER

beti-ne larki-ko dekha thi.

T h e daughter had seen the girl,

beti-ne larkiyo-ko dekha tha.

T h e daughter had seen the girls,

betiyo-ne larkiyo-ko dekha tha.

T h e daughters had seen the girls.

beti-ne larke-ko dekha tha.

T h e daughter had seen the boy.

beti-ne larko-ko dekha tha.

T h e daughter had seen the boys.

betiy5-ne larko-ko dekha tha.

T h e daughters had seen the boys.

This section illustrates the Hindi equivalent of English constructions containing the Past Perfect of transitive verbs. It consists of the past participle of the construction described in section 21.1.1 plus tha, the imperfect of hona, which bears the subject singular masculine suffix, -a. 21.1.4 bete-ne larke-ko dekha hoga.

T h e son will have seen the boy.

bete-ne larko-ko dekha hoga.

T h e son will have seen the boys,

beto-ne larko-ko dekha hoga.

T h e sons will have seen the boys.

bete-ne larki-ko dekha hoga.

T h e son will have seen the girl,

bete-ne larkiyo-ko dekha hoga.

T h e son will have seen the girls,

beto-ne larkiyo-ko dekha hoga.

T h e sons will have seen the girls.

beti-ne larki-ko dekha hoga.

T h e daughter will have seen the girl.

betT-ne larkiyo-ko dekha hoga. betiyo-ne larkiyo-ko dekha h5ga.

T h e daughter will have seen the girls, T h e daughters will have seen the girls.

beti-ne larke-ko dekha h o g i .

T h e daughter will have seen the boy.

beti-ne larko-ko dekha hoga.

T h e daughter will have seen the boys,

betiyo-ne larko-ko dekha hoga.

T h e daughters will have seen the boys.

This section illustrates the Hindi equivalent of English constructions containing the Future Perfect tense of transitive verbs. T o the past participle of the construction described in section 21.1.1 is added the future third person, singular, of the verb hona, the future suffix of which bears the masculine singular suffix, -a. (See remarks of 20.1.4) 21.1.5 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. ma-ne bacco-ko ghar-me bulaya. 2. sikari-ne bhayanak janvar-ko suna. 3. naukar-ne pul-ke nice gayo-ko bad ha. 4. kisano-ne bailo-ko khilaya tha. 5. aurat-ne ghar-ke pas gayko suna hai. 6. pathik-ne naukar-ko bulaya tha. 7. naukar-ne malik-ko samjha. 8. ham-ne khet-ke pas kisan-ko dekha. 9. gadhe-ne dhobl-ko khTca. 10. gay-ne kue-ke pas bachreko khilaya hoga. 11. adhyapak-ne vidyarthiyo-ko parhaya hai. 12. pati-ne ghar-me patnlko suna tha. 13. kisan-ne bete-k5 bulaya hai. 14. ham-ne us-ko samjha hai. 15. sikari-ne jaftgal-m? hathiyo-ko dekha hai. 16. sipahl-ne d u k a n - m ? cor-ko pakra hoga. 17. aurto-ne bazar-me har tarah-kl cizo-ko kharlda tha. 18. ham-ne dhobl-ko bulaya hoga. 19. sikari-ne bagh-ko mara hoga. 20. unho-ne stesan-me gari-ko suna hoga. R E M A R K S : Verbal stems of two syllables or more drop the vowel, -a, when the suffixes of the past participle are attached—provided that the vowel -a is not in the first syllable of the stem. (Compare 3.4, Remarks.) For example, the past participle of samajhna is samjha, and that of pakarna is p a k r i .

LESSON 21

165

21.1.6 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. The man bathed the elephant. 2. We had seen the woman near the well. 3. The oxen had dragged the plow for two hours. 4. The woman has fed the hens. 5. The bear will have dragged the little goat into the jungle. 6. T h e traveller bought ( a ) horse in the city. 7. The cat had seized the mouse. 8. T h e servant cut wood from the tree. 9. I had sent the orderly into the office. 10. T h e gardener has tied our cow near the well. 11. The woman will have bought the fish from the fisherman. 12. The cat will have grabbed the • fat sparrow. 13. When had you seen that man? 14. The hunter killed the animal in the jungle: 15. Mother has cooked food for us. 16. The servant pointed out the road. 17. Mother has sent the servant to the bazaar to buy vegetables. 18. The dog will have bitten the old man. 19. Have you bought a house for me? 20. The boy drew cold water from the well for the traveller. 21.2 bete-ne larka dekha. bete-ne larke dekhe. beto-ne larkc dekhe.

T h e son saw the boy. T h e son saw the boys. T h e sons saw the boys.

bete-ne larki dekhi. bete-ne larkiya dekhi. beto-ne larkiyl dekhi.

The son saw fhe girl. The son saw the girls. The sons saw the girls.

beti-ne larki dekhi. beti-ne larkiya deklu. betiyo-ne larkiya dekhi.

T h e daughter saw the girl. T h e daughter saw the girls. T h e daughters saw the girls.

beti-ne larka dekha. beti-ne larke dekhe. betiyo-ne larke dekhe.

T h e daughter saw the boy. The daughter saw the boys. The daughters saw the boys.

This section presents an alternative Hindi equivalent for English constructions containing transitive verbs in the Simple Perfect tense. (See 21.1.1.) T h e English subject is placed in the Hindi construction in the object form before the postposition -ne (See 21.1, Remarks.); the English direct object is placed in the subject form; and the past participle is made to agree with this subject in gender, number and form. R E M A R K S : ( 1 ) The suffix -i of the feminine plural is nasalized when the participle is final in the utterance. (Compare the following constructions where the participle is not final and, therefore, not nasalized.) ( 2 ) See Remarks of section 21.1.1.

21.2.1 bete-ne larka dekha haL

The son has seen the boy.

bete-ne larke dekhe hai. beto-ne larke dekhe hai.

The son has seen the boys, The sons have seen the boys.

bete-ne larki dekhi haL bete-ne larkiya dekhi hai. beto-ne larkiya dekhi hai.

The son has seen the girl. The son has seen the girls. T h e sons have seen the girls.

166

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

This section presents an alternative Hindi equivalent for English constructions containing transitive verbs in the Present Perfect tense. (Compare 21.1.2.) This construction is identical with that described in section 21.2 with the addition of the present tense of hona. 2122 The son had seen the boy. bètè-nè larki dèkhi tha. The son had seen the boys. bète-nè larkè dèkhe the. The sons had seen the boys. bètò-nè larkè dèkhè the. betè-ne larki dèkhi thl. bètè-nè larkiya dekhi thf. bèto-nè larkiya dèkhi thT.

The son had seen the girl. The son had seen the girls. The sons had seen the girls.

This section presents an alternative Hindi equivalent for constructions containing transitive verbs in the Past Perfect tense. (Compare 21.1.3.) This construction is identical with that described in section 21.2 with the addition of tha, the imperfect of the verb hona, which along with the past participle agrees in gender, number, and form with the subject of the sentence. The -i, of the feminine plural of tha is nasalized.

21.2.3

betc-ne larka dekha hogi. bete-ne larke dekhe hoge. beto-ne larke dekhe hoge.

The son will have seen the boy. The son will have seen the boys. The sons will have seen the boys.

bete-ne larki dèkhi högi. betè-ne larkiya dèkhi hogi. bèto-nè larkiya dèkhi hogi.

The son will have seen the girl. The son will have seen the girls. The sons will have seen the girls.

This section presents an alternative Hindi equivalent for English constructions containing transitive verbs in the Future Perfect tense. (Compare 21.1.4.) This construction is identical with that described in section 21.2 with the addition of the future of hona, which agrees with the subject of the sentence in gender and number. R E M A R K S : See remarks of 20.1.4 and 21.1.4. 21.2.4 More examples of the constructions described in sections 21.2 to 21.2.3 are: vidyarthiyo-ne' adhyipak-se saval puche. The students asked the teacher questions. kyi ap-nè kabhi Kalkatti dèkhi hai? Have you ever seen Calcutta? idmi-nè èk khat likhä thä. The man had written a letter. The boy picked up my luggage. larkè-nè mèri s i m i n uthiyi. The servant had made the tea at four o'clock. naukar-nè car bajè cày baniyi thl. The dog licked the boy's hand. kuttè-nè larkè-ki hith citi, The man will have told (his) friends the idmi-nè döstö-kö kahäni suniyi högi. naukar-nè milik-ki hukam kyö galat samjhä thä? kyi unhö-ne Hindi thik bòli? mai-nè dukin-mè kalam kharidä thä.

story. Why had the servant misunderstood the master's order? Did they speak Hindi correctly? I had bought the pen in the shop.

LESSON

21

167

ham-nc chat-se nahar dekhl. We saw the canal from the roof, larko-ne chidra-me patthar dale. The boys threw rocks into the hole, kisan-ne bail-ki or chari pheki. The farmer threw the stick at the bullock, sam-kd aurto-ne git gàyè thè. In the evening the women had sung songs, unho-ne bare sahar-ke pas nahrè dèkhi thi. They had seen the canals near the large city. REMARKS: òr (I) direction, -ki or in the direction of, towards, galat (adj.) incorrect, wrong, galat samajhna to misunderstand, chidra (a) hole, nahar (1) canal, patthar (a) stone, hath (S) hand. 21.2.5 Exercise 1. Translate into English: 1. kyà naukar-nè khànà pakàyà hai? 2. mal-ne burhé àdml-kè liyè khat parhà. 3. aurat-nè bàzàr-mè yah tasvlr kharidl hògl. 4. kisàn-né bail khilàyè. 5. dukàndàr-nè ham-kó phal bècè thè 6. àp-nè garm pani kyo piyà thà? 7. kya naukar-nè càr bajè cày banàyl? 8. bandarò-nè pèr-kè pakkè phal khàyè hògé. 9. us-nè pathik-kó Kalkattà-kl sarak batayl. 10. mal-nè àp-kà hukam galat samjhà. 11. unhó-nè hamàrè khat kal parhè thè. 12. kyà us-ne AligrèzI thlk samjhl? 13. larkè-nè nahar-sè pani khTcà hai. 14. baccó-nè bailò-kó kyo patthar phekè thè? 15. sikàri-né jànvar kahl mara hai? 16. àdmiyò-nè chòtl nadi-mè hàthl nahlàyà hógà. 17. kyà màll-nè paudho-par pani dàlà? 18. ham-nè bhukhé àdmiyo-kò khànà bhèja. 19. larkè-nè garl-me bhàrl bòjh rakhà hai. 20. mat-né us-kà kalam mèz-par rakhà thà. 212.6 Exercise 2. Translate into Hindi: 1. Why did you eat the candy? 2. The man had placed the light luggage on the bed. 3. Had he read your book? 4. Will he have seen Calcutta? 5. When had he watered the plants in the garden? 6. They threw stones at the oxen. 7. Has the servant placed the plates on the table? 8. Who had written this letter? 9. When did you hear their song? 10. They misunderstood my orders. 11. To whom had the woman sent the food? 12. Who sent me this letter? 13. This man tied the grass with a rope. 14. Why did the dog bite the horse? 15. He understood my Hindi exacdy. 16. Who picked up my luggage? 17. Will he have heard your story? 18. Where did the tiger drag the goat? 19. Why did you stop the automobile near the canal? 20. Where had the servant placed the shoes? 21.7 Text 5. Ram'katha. Translate into English. Answer the questions in Hindi: Ma: Ràmu,1 Syàmù 1 aur Muniyà,2 ab sónè 3 calo. Ramù: Mi, pahilè tum èk kahànl sunào. us-kè bàd ham soegè. acchà, sunò. bahut din pahilè,4 Ayódhyà5 -mè ràjà 8 Dasrath'7 ràjya 8 kartè 9 thè. un-kè tin ràniyà 10 thi—Kausilyà,11 Kaikèyl 11 aur Sumitrà.11 kisl-kè pàs baccè nahl thè. ràjà-kó bahut dukh thà ki un-kè bàd Ay6dhyà-mè ràjya kaun karègà. ràjà-kè guru 12 -nè yagya 13 karnè-kè liyè kahà. ràjà-nè èk bahut bara yagya kiyà. us-mè èk dèvtà 14 hàth-mè khir 1 5 -kà bartan lèkar 18 niklè aur ràjà-sè kahà, "khlr apnl ràniyò-kò do." Kauiilyà aur Kaikèyl-nè àdhl àdhi 17 khir li, aur uskè bàd donó-nè apnl-sè adhè Sumitrà-kò di. Muniya: Sumitrà-kó zyàdà khir mill. Ma: hà, Sumitrà-kò dò hissè 18 milè, aur Kaikèyl aur Kausilà-kò èk èk.17 Syimu: phir kyà huà? Ma: khir khànè-kè kuch mahlnè-kè bad tino ràniyo-kè larkè paidà hue,19 Kauiilyà-kè Ràm,20 Kaikèyl-kè Bharat.20 Sumitrà-nè dò hissè khàyè thè, is liyè un-kè dò

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

168

larkë, Laksman aur Satruhan 2 0 Tiuë. râjâ-kë râjya-më bahut khuSî huî. garîbô 2 1 2 2 -kô kaprë rûpayê diyê gayë. 23 khüb nâc 2 4 gane 2 5 hue. sab lôg bahut khus thé. 20

jab baccê barë huë, tô vë ëk guru-së tir calânâ, 2 6 parhnâ, likhnâ sîkhnë lagê vë lôg bahut hôsiyâr thé. 27

ëk din ëk riiî, 2 8 Visvàmitra, 29 râjâ-kë pas âyë, aur kahnë lagë 2 7 ki "jafigalmë râksas 3 0 haï, jin-kë kâran 3 1 mai tap 3 2 nahl kar saktâ. kyâ tum Ram aur Laksman-kô mërî raksâ 3 3 -kë }iyê bhëj saktë hôP" râjâ-kô yah bât pasand na thî, par unho-në risi-kï prârthnâ 3 4 mân lï. 3 5 Râm aur Laksman risl-kê sâth b a n 3 8 -me gayë. Râmû: Ma, kyâ vë lôg sër 3 7 aur bâgh-së nahï darte 3 8 thë? Mâ: nahî, risï-kë â s r a m 3 9 -më sër kuttë-kï tarah p à l t û 4 0 h ô t e 4 1 thé. vë kisl-kô kâttë nahï thë. Syâmû: kyâ baccë râksasô-sê zyâdâ balvân 4 2 thë? Mâ: hâ, vë lôg bahut acchâ tir calâ saktë thë. unhô-në bahut-sê râksas râksasî 4 3 mârë. risï din-rât 2 2 tapasyâ 4 4 kar sakë. kaî sâl bâd, 4 5 jab un-kâ tap khatam huâ, tab vë donó râjkumârô

46

-kô lëkar 4 7 vâpas Ayôdhyâ calé, râstë-më ëk râjà Janak

48

-kâ

râjya thâ. un-kë pâs câr larkiya thî, par sab-së barí larkï Sïtâ bahut-hî sundarî 5 0 5 1 thî. un-kl sâdî-kë liyë svayambar thâ aur dur dûr-së sab râjâ aur râjkumâr âyë 49

thë. risï râjkumârô-kô lëkar vahâ gayë aur kahnë lagë ki "calô, Sïtâ-kâ svayambar dëkhë." i —' Muniyi: Mâ, svayambar kyâ hôtâ hai? Mâ: purânë zamânë-më 5 2 jab râjkumâriyô 5 3 -kî sâdî hôti thî, tô âs pâs 54 -kë sab râjkumâr bulâyë jâtë thë. 5 5 sâdî-kë din sab lôg ëk barë maidân 5 8 -më baithtë thë aur râjkumârî apnî sakhiyô 5 7 -kë sâth khub acchë kaprë pahankar 5 8 âtî thî. vah har ëk râjkumâr-kë pâs ruktï thî. râjkumâr-kë âdmî jô bhât 5 9 kahlâtë 8 0 thë us-kê bârë-më 8 1 sab kuch batâtë thë. râjkumârî j i s ê 6 2 pasand kartî thî us-kë gaîë 6 3 -më rnâlâ 6 4 dâltï thî. us-kë bâd usî-së us-kî sâdî hôtî thî. Muniyâ: Sîtâ-në Râm-së sâdî kî? Mâ: hâ. râjâ Janak-kë pâs ëk bahut bhârî dhanus 6 5 thâ. un-hô-në vah dhanus sabhâ 9 6 -më rakhâ aur kahâ, "jô râjâ is-kô uthâ sakëgâ usî-së Sïtâ-kï sâdî hôgï." sab râjâo-në kôsis kî, par kôï us-kô nahï uthâ sakâ. râjâ Janak-kô bahut dukh thâ ki unhô-në aisî sart 6 7 kyô kî. Râmû: kyâ Râm-bhî nahî uthâ sakë? Mâ: nahï. Râm-në kôiii nahï kî thî. sab-se bâd-më Râm vahâ gayë. unho-në us-kô uthâyâ aur carhâkar 6 8 tôr 6 9 diyâ. Syâmû: Mâ, Râm itnë chôtê thë. unhô-në bhârî dhanus kaisë uthâyâ? Mâ: Râm Bhagvân-kë avatar 7 0 thë. is liyë vah d ë k h n ë 7 1 -më chôtë thë, par bahut balvân 7 2 thë. Muniyâ: vah yahâ kyô âyë thë? Mâ: Bhagvân apnê bhaktô 7 3 -kî madad karnë-kë liyë duniyâ 7 4 -më kabhî kabhï âtë thë. Râm-bhï Bhagvân-kë aisë-hî avatâr thë. isî liyë vah barë barë kâm-bhî kar saktë thë. dhanus tutnë-së râjâ Janak aur sab lôg bahut khus huë. Sïtà-kô-bhï Râm bahut pasand thë. inhô-në ëk din in-kô bâg-më dëkhâ thâ. dhanus tutnë-kë bâd Sîtâ ëk bahut sundar mâlâ lëkar apnî sakhiyô-kë sâth darbâr 7 5 -më âyî. sakhiyâ

LESSON

169

21

gatl hul Slta-ke sath thi. Slta-ne apne hath-kl varmala Ram-ke gale-me da! dl. 78 acche acche baje 7 9 bajne 8 0 lage sab log un-par phul phekne lage. Ramu: Ma, kya Ram-ke pita-ko kisl-ne sadl-kl khabar nahl dl? M i : raja Janak-ne ek adml ghore-par Ayodhya bheja aur us-ne Dasrath-ko sab hal 8 1 bataya. Dasrath sunkar bahut khus hue, aur bar! barat 8 2 lekar aye. khub khusi-se Ram aur Slta-kl sadl hul. Slta-ke tin aur bahne thi. un-kl sadl ram-ke tlno bhaiyo-ke sath ho gayl. ab raja Dasrath car bahuo 8 3 -ko lekar vapas aye. tino raniya bahut khus thi. sari Ayodhya phulo-se aur dipako 8 4 -se sajl 8 5 thi. har ghar-me bandanvar 8 6 thi. caro taraf 8 7 khusl thi. raniyo-ne apnl apnl bahuo-ka svagat 8 8 kiya. aur sab log khusi-se rahne lage. Ramu: phir kya hua? 78

77

Ma: ab'aur kal sunaugl. aj rat zyada ho gayl. 89 turn log so jao. 90 prasna: 1. Ayodhya-ka raja kyo dukhl tha? 2. us-ne kis liye yagya kiya? 3. yagya karne-ke bad kya hua? 4. raja-kl kitnl raniya thi? un-ke kitne larke hue? 5. Ram aur Laksman ban-me kyo gaye? 6. risl ban-me kya karte the? 7. Sita kaun thi? 8. svayambar kya hai? 9. Slta-ke svayambar-me kya hua? 10. Ram-ki sadl hone-ke bad Ayodhya-ke logo-ne kya kiya? NOTES: 1. boy's name; 2. girl's name; 3. for the infinitive without -ko see 37.2.2; 4. = long ago; 5. = modern Oudh; 6. king ( a ) ; 7. name of king; 8. rule, realm, empire ( a ) ; 9. rajya karna to rule; 10. rini queen ( i ) ; 11. name of queen; 12. spiritual preceptor ( a ) ; 13. religious ceremony, offering ( a ) ; 14. divinity ( a ) ; 15. dish made of rice and milk ( i ) ; 16. = with, the gerund of lcna, cf. 30.1; 17. for the repetition see 36.2, the second group of sentences; 18. part, share ( a ) ; 19. born; 20. name of man [Note: letters written with a dot underneath them (e.g., s, n,) represent consonantal sounds made with the tongue in the same position as for making the retroflex consonants—e.g., t, [ a ']> au, [au]; and then the consonants: the gutturals, k, [k], kh, [kh], g, [g], gh, ii, the palatals, c, ch, j, [z], [n], the Unguals, t, th, d, r, dh, rh, n, the dentals, t, th, d, dh, n, the palatals, p, ph, [f], b, bh, m, the semivowels, y, r, L, v, the sibilants, s, s, s, and the aspiration, h. Nouns are marked by gender, i.e., msc. and fm. Adjectives which do not change their form for gender, number or case are marked n.c. Other adjectives are given in their masculine form. A list of grammatical abbreviations follows. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS adj. adv. art aux. cf. conj. dem. egemph. excL fm. g er hon. indef. inf.

340

adjective adverb article auxiliary compare conjunction demonstrative for example emphatic exclamation feminine gerund honorific indefinite infinitive

GLOSSARY

int. interr. intj. msc. n. n. c neg. obi. part. pers. pL pL n. postpos. pr. n. preppron. pst pt refi. rei. s. tr. vb.

intransitive interrogative interjection masculine noun no change (i.e., for gender, number or case) negative oblique participle personal plural place name postposition proper noun preposition pronoun past particle reflexive relative singular transitive verb

akeli: adj., alone aktubar: msc, Octobcr akbban msc, newspaper agar: conj., if agast: msc, August agni: msc, fire agla: adj., next, forthcoming angutbi: fm., ring Angrezi: n., fm., and adj., English acanak: adv., suddenly acar: msc, pickle accha: adj., good accha: adv., well, good achut: n., msc, and adj., untouchable ajnabl: n., msc, stranger ajnabi: adj., n.c., foreign, strange atthanve: adj., nx., ninety-eight atthara, atthirah: adj., n . c , eighteen atthavan: adj., n . c , fifty-eight atthasi: adj., n.c, eighty-eight atthais: adj., nx., twenty-eight

341

342

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

ath * hattar: adj., n.c., seventy-eight athanni: fm^ half-rupee (according to older system of Indian coinage) adda: msc, a stopping place, a stop (as in a bus stop) artifis: adj., n.c, forty-eight artis: adj., n.c., thirty-eight arsath: adj., n.c, sixty-eight áthi: fnu, seed anda: msc., egg adi: fnu, payment atyacar: msc., outrage, violation ada karna: vb., tr., to pay off (debt) adhik: adv., more, much adhik hona: vb., int., to increase, rise adhikir: msc., authority, privilege adhiktan adv., mosdy adhisthit: adj., appointed adhyaksata: fm., leadership adhyan: msc, study adhyapak: msc, teacher anaj: msc., grain onuyiyi: msc., follower anuvad: msc, translation anusandhan: msc, research anusar: msc, conformity anek: adj., n.c many ant: msc, end antar: msc, difference antarrastriya: adj., n.c, international andar: adv., in andar-tak: adv., down to, within andha: adj., blind andhcra: msc, darkness anban: msc, misunderstanding anya: adj., n.c., other ansan: msc., hunger strike, fast apil: fnu, appeal apQ karna: vb., to appeal, make an appeal apna: refl. adj., own Afganistan: msc, Afghanistan Afrika: msc, Africa afsar: msc, officer, official afsos: msc, regret, sorrow ab: adv., now ab-tak: adv., still, up to now abin msc, red powder

GLOSSARY

abhl: adv., now right now, immediately abhi-to: conj., still, yet amar: adj., n.c, immortal amir: adj., n.c., rich Amerika: msc, America Amerikan: a d j , n.c^ American Ambedkar: my., name of Indian political leader Ayodhya: pL n., fm., Ayodhya, modern Oudh alag: adj., n.c., separate alag-sc: adv., extra alava: adv., besides Alahabad: pL n., msc, Allahabad (see Ilahabad, £ lahabad) avatar: msc, incarnation Avadh: pL n^ m s c , Oudh avasya: adv., surely, certainly avnati: f m , downfall Aiok Vardhan: pr. i l , msc., Aioka Vardhana, ancient ruler of India asantusb adj^ n x ^ dissatisfied asar: msc, effect, impression atahyog: msc, non-cooperation ast hona: vb., i n t , to set (of sun) supatal: msc, hospital aau: a d j , iuc, eighty ahlsS: f m , non-violence

akarsit: a d j , n . c , attracted akarsit karaa: vb., tr., to attract akar: msc, shape akas: msc, sky akraman: m s c , attack, invasion akhir: adv, finally akhri: a d j , n x ^ last ag f m , fire Sga: msc^ forehead, front pan age: adv., ahead, henceforth aj: adv., today aj * kal: adv., now-a-days aj * rat: adv., tonight aj * sam: adv., this evening azadi: f m , freedom ata: msc, flour, ground grain

343

344

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

a t f c ^ a d j . , n . c , eight Ithva: adj., eighth atmakatha: f m , autobiography idat: fm., habit adar: msc., respect adi: -and so on, etc. ades: m s c , instruction, rule adcs karna: vb., tr., to order adml: m s c , man adha: adj., half adhinta: fm., submission, adhanik: adj., n.c., modern idhrupaya: msc., half-rupee Anand * Bhavan: msc., Nehru's childhood home ( l i t , Abode of Bliss) ana: vb., i n t , to come ana:

m y . , anna, a sixteenth of a rupee (according to older system of coinage)

anevala: adj., coming, approaching andolan: msc., movement ip:

pers. p r o a , you

ap: refl. pron., self abadi: fm., population am: msc., mango am: adj., n.c., common am janta: fm., general public im-taur-par: adv., generally amaran: adv., till death, throughout one's life amaran * vrat: msc., vow until death amdanl: amla:

fm., income

msc., olive

ayna: msc., mirror iyran: msc., iron aram: msc., rest aram karna: vb., tr., to rest, repose Al Indiya Sedul Kast Federesan: group alu: m s c , potato alocna: fm., criticism, review avasyak: adj., necessary Ivasyakta: fm., necessity avaz: fm., voice isirvad: msc., blessing asram: m s c , hermitage, abode as-pas: adv., all around asan: msc., seat asan: adj., n.c., easy

msc., All India Scheduled Castes Federation, a political

GLOSSARY

asani: fm., ease asani-se: adv., easily asman: msc., sky akh: fm., eye akhe khul jana: vb., int., wake up

ikatthl: adj., collected, accumulated ikkanvc: adj., n.c, ninety-one ikkasi: adj., nx., eighty-one ikkis: adj., iuc, twenty-one iktaGs: adj., i l c , forty-one iktis: adj., nx., thirty-one ikyavan: adj., n.c, fifty-one iklauta: adj., only iksath: adj., nx. sixty-one ik'hattar: adj., nx., seventy-one Inglaind: msc, England Iiiglistan: msc, England iccha: fin-, wish, desire ijizat: msc., permission injiniyaring: msc, engineering Lnjinir: msc, engineer itihas: msc, history itna: adj., this much, so much itne pas: adv., so close itvar: msc, Sunday idhan adv., hither, here idhar udhar: adv., hither-thither in: see yah inam: msc, prize, reward inkar: msc, refusal inc: fm^ inch incna: vb., intr., to be pulled intazim: msc, arrangement [-ka] intazam karnl: vb., tr., to arrange intazar: msc, waiting, expectation [-ka] intazar karna: vb., tr., to wait for Indira: pr. n., fm., Indira Indraprasth: msc., ancient name of E)elhi inhe: see yah a

inho:

see yah

345

346

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

imandin adj, n.c^ honest imamhara: msc., enclosure sacred to Muslim sect Lmirat: fnu, building imtchan (also, imtchin): msc, examination impiriyalizm: my., imperialism flihabid: pL n^ msc, Allahabad ista: adj., ax^ desired is: see yah is liye: adv., therefore is vakt: adv., now is-se: adv., therefore isc: see yah istemal: msc, use, employment [-ka] istemal karna: vb., tr., to use

•I: emph. p t Id: fin., Muslim festival Isvar: msc., God Is3: msc, Jesus Christ Isayi: adj., n.c, Christian it: fm., brick idhan: msc, fuel

uginä: vb, tr., to grow ugnä: vb., int, to grow uthânâ: vb., tr., to pick up, lift, reap; (cf. uthni) uthni: vb., int, to get up uth baithnä: vb., int, to get up Urïsà: pL n., msc., Orissa urnä: vb., int., to fly utarnä: vb., int, to descend, get out of uttar: msc, north uttari pascimi: adj., n.c, northwestern uttarpfirv: msc, northeast utnâ: adj., that much uthlä: adj., shallow Udaypur: pL n., msc., Udaipur udirdalvlli: msc^ liberal, progressive

GLOSSARY

udas: msc., loneliness udas hona: vb., int, to be homesick udasin: adj., nx., indifferent udyand: adj., n x , improper udyog * dhandha: msc, industry udhar: msc., loan, debt udhar lena: vb., tr, to borrow udhar dena: vb., tr., to lend un: see vah unaa: adj., n.c, seventy-nine uncas: adj., n.c, forty-nine untalis: adj., n.c, thirty-nine untis: adj., itx., twenty-nine unnati: f m , advance, progress annis: adj., i l c , nineteen unsath: adj., n x , fifty-nine unhattar: adj., n.c., sixty-nine unhe: see vah unho: see vah upaj: fm., produce upanyas: msc, novel upjau: adj., n.c, fertile updH: mtr., instruction, sermon upyukt: adj., n.o, fitting, satisfactory upvSs: msc., fast ubSlna: vb., tr., to boil umar: f m , age ummid: fm., hope ullekh: msc., mention, description ui: see vah ua-ke bad-se: adv., from that time on 11* vakt: adv., then us samay: adv., at that time un: see vah use: see vah ustara: msc, razor

upar: adv., up uci: adj, high, loud uca nidi: adj., uneven, not level ut: msc, camel utgiri: fm., camel cart

347

348

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

c k : adj., n . c , one c k : indcf. a r t , a, an ck aur-bhi: adj., n . c , another ck * dam: adv., suddenly ek-sath: adv., together ck-sa: adj., similar, alike ck-hi: adj., n . c , oijly one c k hokar: adv., tQgether, as one ekar: m s c , acre ekt: m s c , act, legislation ekta: fm., unity embasl: fm., embassy crodrom: msc., airdrome Clahabad: pL n., msc., Allahabad (see Alahabad, Ilahabad) eluviyal: adj., n . c , alluvial Csiya: pi. n., msc., Asia

aisà:

adj., such, of this sort

aita, aisè:

adv., thus, in this manner

ok: adj., n.c., oak or: fm., side, direction os: fm., dew os-ke bund: msc., dewdrops ohada: msc., position, rank

auzir: aur:

m s c , tool conj., and

GLOSSARY

aur: adj., more, another aur-bhi kuch: pron. adj., some more aur-bhi kol: pron., some one else aurat: fm., woman ausadhalay: msc., hospital, dispensary

kai: adj., n.c., several kanghi: fm., comb kacci: adj., raw, uncooked katavdar: adj., nx., embroidery katna: vb., int., to be cut katvana: vb., tr., cause to be cut kathin: adj., n x , severe, difficult kathinayi (also kathinai): ( m , difficulty kara: adj., harsh, sharp, hard kanda: msc., dung-cake kapas: msc, cotton kapra: msc, cloth, clothing kaprc: msc, pL, clothes, clothing kapre-ki mil: fm., cloth mill kab: adv., when kabutar: msc., pigeon kabhi: adv., ever kabhi kabhi: adv., sometimes kam: adj., less, little kam: adv., little (in quantity) kam karna: vb., tr., to reduce kam-se kam: adv., at least kamal: msc., lotus kamana: vb., tr., earn kamisan: msc., commission kamiz: msc., shirt kamzor: adj., n.c, weak, poor kampani: fm., company kambal: msc, blanket Kamyunizm: msc, Communism kamra: msc, room Kamla: pr. a , fm., Kamla kar: msc, tax karana: vb., tr., to cause to do (cf. karna) karo: see karna

350

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

karon msc., ten millions karna: vb., tr., to make, do kartavya: m s c , duty kal: m s c , tomorrow, yesterday kal-se: adv., yesterday kala: fm., art kalakar: m s c , artisan Rating: pL iu, m i c , ancient Indian Kingdom Kalkatta: pL n^ msc., Calcutta kavita: fm., poem, story kavi: msc., poet kasrat: fm., exercise kart: m s c , hardship, distress kahani: f m , story kaha: adv., where kahi: adv., somewhere kahna: vb., tr., to say kahlanl: vb., tr., to be called (cf. kahna) -ka: postpos., see I N D E X kagaz: msc., paper, note Kangres: pr. n., fm., the Indian National Congress Party katna: vb., tr., to bite, cut katnevala: m s c , woodcutter kath: m s c , wood kata: msc., earring, thorn katna: vb., tr., to spin Kanpurvala: m s c , man from Kanpur kafi: adj., enough kafi pas: adv., very near kam: msc., work kam karna: vb., tr., to work kamars: m s c , commerce kayar: adj., n.c, cowardly kayarta: fm., cowardice karan: msc., cause, reason karigar: m s c , mechanic karkhana (also karkhana): m s c , factory, electrical plant karya: m s c , work, task karya karna: vb., tr., to function, operate kala: adj., black kalcj: m s c , college K a n : pL iu, fm., Banaras Kasmir: pL n., m s c , Kashmir Kasmiri: n. and adj., nx., Kashmirian ki: conj., that

GLOSSARY

kitib: fm., book kitna: interrog. adj., how much kin: see kaun kinara: msc, bank, shore, edge kinho: see kaun kimti (also kimd): adj., n x , expensive kiya: past part, see karna kirana: vb., tr., to rent kiiiya: msc., rent, hire kila: msc, fort (sec kila) kisti: f m , boat kit: see kaun kis liye: interr. adv., why? wherefore? kisan: msc, farmer Kisan Mazdur Praja Parti: fm., Praja party, a political group kisi: see kol klcar: msc, mud kicarvala: adj., muddy kijiye: see karna kll:A ' fm., nail kuS: msc, well kuch: indeL pron. and adj., something, anything, some, several kuch aur: indeL pron. and adj., something else kuch nahi: proiu, nothing kunp: f m , key kutnmb; msc., family Kutubuddin-cbak: pr. i l , m i c , name of an emperor Kutub Minan pr. n^ msc., historic shrine kutta: msc, dog kumir: msc, prince kurn: fau, chair kuE: msc, coolie kulhari: fm., hatchet Kui: pr. IL, msc, Kusha kudna: vb., int. to jump -ke atirikt: postpos^ besides -ke annsar: postpos^ according to, in accordance with -ke alava: postpos^ besides -ke age: postpos., in front of -ke aspas: postpos., near, in the neighborhood of -ke upar: postpos^ upon, above -ke kiran: postpos^ because of -ke dvaii: postpos., by means of -ke nice: postpos., under -ke pas: postpos^ beside, belonging to, by, near

352

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

ke pichc: postpos., behind -ke porv: postpos., before -ke bid: postpos., after -ke bare-me: postpos., about, concerning -ke bahar: postpos^ out of, outside of -ke bina: postpos^ without -kc liye: postpos., for, in order to -ke samne: postpos^ in view of, in front of -ke sath: postpos., with -ke sthan-me: postpos., in place of Kenat Sarkal: pL n., msc., Connaught Circle kendra: msc., center kebinet: msc, cabinet Kembrij: pL n., msc., Cambridge kemra: msc*, camera keval: adj., n.c, only keval: adv., only Kaikeyi: pr. n., fm., a queen in the Ramayana kaisa: interr. adj., what sort? kaise: interr. adv., how? kobra: msc, fog -ko: postpos., to Koaparetiv Sabha: fm., Cooperative Society koi: adv., about koi: indef. pron., something, anything koi: indef. adj., some, any koi aur: indef. pron., anyone else koi bat: fm., no matter koela: msc., coal kot: msc, coat kona: msc, corner kop: msc, anger kop * bhavan: msc, anger-chamber komal: adj., n.c, gentle, soft Koromandal Kost: pL n., msc., Coromandal Coast kosis: fm., attempt [-ki] kosis karni: vb., tr., to attempt, try kaun: interrog. adj., what? which? kaun-sa: adj., which particular Kaunsil Cembar: msc., Council Chamber Kausilya: pr. n n fm., a queen in the Ramayana kyi: interrog. pron. and adj., what? kya: adverial particle indicating a question kyo: adv., why? kyo-ki: conj., because

GLOSSARY

kràntikari: adj., revolutionary kripa: f m , favor, grace, kindness krin: fm., agriculture krodh: msc, anger krodh-mc ani: vb., int., to become angry klab: msc, club klark: msc, clerk klas: fm., class, grade ksamà: fm., indulgence (also ksama) [ ko] ksama karna: vb., t r , to excuse ksetraphal: msr., area

kaban f m , grave kamiz: msc, shirt karib: adv, nearly, about, approximately karz: msc., loan, debt karz lena: vb, t r , to make a loan kalam: fm. and msc, pen kanun: msc, law kila: msc, fort (see kill) kaid: f m , imprisonment kaid karna: vb, t r , to imprison, jail

khatta: adj, sour khara: adj, upright khara honi: vb, int., to stand, be standing khand * han msc, ruin, ruins khaddar: msc, homespun cloth khanij * padarth: msc, mineral khabar: f m , news (also khabar) khambha: msc, post, pillar kharif: f m , autumn corp (also kharif) kharboza: msc, melon khad: f m , manure khadi: f m , coarse cotton stuff khan: f m , mine khana: vb, tr, to eat

354

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

khana: msc, dinner, food khal: f m , hide, skin khaE: adj., nx., empty khirki: fm., window khilana: vb^ t r , to feed (cf. khana) khilauna; msc, toy khicna: v b , t r , to drag, pull, draw khin fm-, dish made of rice and milk khudna: vb., int., to be dug, be inscribed (cf. khodna) khudvina: vb., tr., to cause to be dug (cf. khudna) khurduri: a d j , i l c , rough khula: adj., open khulna: y b , i n t , to be open (cf. kholna) khulvana: vb, int., cause to be opened (c£ khulna) khet: m y . , field kheti: f i n , agricuture khelna: vb., tr., to play khodnaj v b , t r , to dig (cf. khudna) kholna; v b , tr., to open (cf. khulna)

khat: msc., letter khatam: msc, end khatam: adj., n.c., done, finished khatam karna: vb, tr., to finish, conclude khatam hona: vb., int, to be finished khatam kar dalna: vb, t r , to kill khatarnak: adj., dangerous khabar: fm., news (also khabar) khayal: msc., opinion, thought ( m e n ) khayal hai: (I) think kharab: adj., bad kharidar: msc, buyer kharidna: vb., t r , to buy kharif: f m , autumn corp kharc: msc, expenditure, expenses khalis: adj., n.c, pure khas: adj., n.c., special k haskar: adv, especially khud: rcfl. pron., self khus: adj., n.c, happy

GLOSSARY

khus rahna: vb., int, to be healthy and happy khuii: fm^ gladness khusi-sc: adv., with pleasure, gladly (mujhe) khuii hue: (I) am) glad khusl manana: vb., tr., to rejoice khus h5na: vb., int, to be glad khusmizaj: adj., nx^ sweet-tempered khub: adv., very khubsurat: adj., nx^ beautiful

Gangi: pr. n., fnu, Ganges Gaiiga * Sindhu: pr. n., m«c., confluence of the Ganges and the Indus rivers gaj: my., elephant gaddi: fm., throne gadhS: m«r., donkey ganda: adj., dirty ganna: mac, sugar cane gaya: pit part, (see jana) garajna: vb, int, to roar gardan: fnu, neck garbhavati: adj., nx^ pregnant garm: adj., warm garml: fnu, summer gala: msc., neck, throat gaG: fnu, street gale milna: vb, tr., embrace gavarnar: msc,, governor gahna: msc^ jewel, jewelry gahra: adj., deep gavani: vb., tr., to waste (time) gajar: msc^ carrot gin: fm., carriage, train, cart, wagon gaiivan: msc., driver gana: vb., tr., to sing gana: msc, song, singing, music ginevala: msc, singer ginevala: adj., singing gay: fm., cow giyak: msc, musician, singer Gadhi: pr. n., msc^ [Mohandas Karamchand] Gandhi

355

356

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

gav: msc., village, town gawala: msc., villager ginna: vb., tr., to count girana: vb., tr., to drop (cf. girna) girna: vb., int., to fall gir jana: vb., int., to fall down girvi: fm., mortgage girvi rakhna: bv., tr., hold a mortgage git: msc., song GIta: fm., Bhagavad Gita gila: adj., wet Gujarati: msc., a native of Gujarat Gujarati: adj., pertaining to Gujarat Gujarati: fm., the language of Gujarat gnzarna: vb., int, to pass by gar: m s c , gur (raw sugar) guriya: fm., doll guna: m^c., multiplication, "times" guptcar: msc., secret service spy gupha: fiji., cave gumbad: msc, dome guru: msc., spiritual preceptor, teacher gurukul: msc., educational center guruvar: msc., Thursday gulil: msc., pink powder Geribaldi: pr. n., mstu, Garibaldi gehu: msc., wheat ged: msc., ball Goa: pi. n., msc., Goa god: fm., lap Godavari: pr. n., fm., Godavari River gobhi: fm., cauliflower Gomati: pr. m, fm., Gomati River gora: adj., white gori camri: fm., white-skin gol: adj., round goII: fnu, bullet gost: m s t , meat Gautam Buddha: pr. n., msc., Gautama Buddha gyara, gyarah: adj., nx^ eleven gyarva: adj., eleventh grihaniti: fm., internal policy grnp: fnu, group, faction grenait: msc», granite glas: msc., glass

GLOSSARY

gadan msc., mutiny garib: adj., poor galat: adj., incorrect gayab: adj., disappeared, vanished gayab bona: vb., int, to disappear gnsalkhana (also * khana): msc, bathroom gussa: msc, anger gassOa: adj., angry

ghatana: vb., tr., to subtract gbatna: fnu, incident ghara: msr.t water pot ghari: fm^ watch gharisaz: msc, watchrepairman ghanta: msc, bell ghanta: msc, hour ghana: adj., thick, dense ghabrana, (ghabrana): vb^ int, be upset, be confused, be agitated ghan msc, home, family, house ghar jana: v b , int, to go home ghanrSla: msc, householder ghat; msc, bank, landing ghati: fm., valley, mountain pass ghayal: adj., wounded, injured, bruised ghas: fnL, grass ghi: msc, clarified butter ghnmana: vb., tr, to spin (cf. ghumna) ghumna: vb., int, to walk about ghora: msc, horse ghori: f m , mare ghoR adj., n.c, awful, dreadful ghosna: faru, proclamation ghrina: f m , abhorrence, aversion

358

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

cakia: msc, wheel catta: msc, rock, block of stone carhana: vb., tr., to cause to climb (cf. carhna) carhna: vb., int., to climb, mount cana: mtc, gram, chickpea canda: mv., contribution candra: msc, moon capti: adj^ n.c., flat cappal: msc, sandal caprasi: msc, orderly, attendant camakna: vb., int, to shine camar: msc^ leatherworker camra: msp, leather, hide, skin camri: fm., leather, hide, skin Camparan; pL n , msc, Cham paran, district in N. Bihar carna: vb., int, to graze, browse, loiter car rahna: vb., int, to graze caragah: msc, grazing land, pasture land carkha: msc, spinning wheel calana: vb., tr., to drive (cf. calna) calanevala: msc., driver, motorist calna: vb., int., to walk, travel cala jana: vb., int, go away caca: msc, paternal uncle cad: fm., paternal aunt (paternal uncle's wife) cacera: adj., related through paternal uncle cabi: fm., key. cay: msc, tea car:^ adj., n.c, four caro taraf: adv, everywhere calak: adj., n.c, cunning, clever caGs: adj., n.c, forty caval: msc, rice [-k5] cahiye: need, should, ought to (see INDEX, cahiye) cahna: vb, tr., to want to, wish did: msc, moon cadi: fm., silver A*

Cadni Cauk: pr. n., msc, name of a bazaar cingharna: v , tr., to roar citthi: fm., letter citthi' patri: fm., correspondence ciriya: fm., sparrow, bird cita: fm., pyre citra: msc, picture

GLOSSARY cinha:

mcs., sign, symbol

rillanii:

dz:

vb., tr., to s c r e a m fm., thing

Cln:

pL i u , m s c ^ C h i n a

cini:

fm., sugar

cukna:

vb., i n t , to h a v e c o m p l e t e d

cugna:

vb., tr., to p e c k

cunav:

msc^ election

cunna: cup:

v b . , t r . , to e l e c t , select, c h o o s e adj.,

silent, quiet

cup rahna:

vb., i n t , to k e e p q u i e t

cupcap:

adj., o x ,

curana:

vb., tr., to steal

cuhiya:

fnu, mouse

ca cn karna: cok:

fa»,

vb., tr., to c h i r p

error, m i s t a k e

cuk jana: curi:

quiet

vb., int-, to m i s s , f a i l

fm., bangle

cumna:

vb., tr., to lick

cumna:

vb., tr., to k i s s

Ccrapunji:

pL n., fm., Cherapunji

ccsta:

attempt

fm.,

cehra also c e h i i : cot;

mtc., facc

fm., hurt

cot l a g j i n a :

v b ^ i n t , to b e h i t

cofi:

fm., peak, top

cor

m s c , thief

con:

f—-, s t e a l i n g

cank:

m t c , market

canri: cautha:

adj., fourth

cauda, candah: Caapati:

adj., i l c , fourteen

pL n ^ f m . , n a m e of seashore in B o m b a y

caupayS: caubis:

square

adj., broad, w i d e

m s c , cattle adj., n . c , twenty-four

cauranve:

adj., n x . , ninety-four

caurasi:

adj., i u c ,

eighty-four

cauvan:

adj., a x . ,

fifty-four

caavSCs:

adj., n x ^ forty-four

cauhattan caukna:

adj., n . c , seventy-four vb., i n t , startle, start u p f r o m sleep

cank uthna: cautis: causa th:

vb., i n t , to w a k e u p

adj., i l c , adj., a x . ,

thirty-four sixty-four

359

360

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

cha (also che):

adj., nx^ six

chatha: adj., sixth chari: fm., stick chat: f m , roof Chatar Manzil: pr. n , fm., l i t , "umbrella-abode," name of a building in Lucknow chattis: a d j , n . c , thirty-six chatri: f m , umbrella, pavilion chappan: a d j , n x , fifty-six chabbis: adj., n.c., twenty-six chata: m s c , umbrella chad:

f m , breast

china: vb., tr., to spread chaya: fnu, shade chavni: fnu, cantonment chidra: m y , hole chipna: vb., i n t , to hide chipina: v b , tr., to hide chiyanve: adj., nx., ninety-six chiyalis: a d j , n . c , forty-six chiylsath: adj., n.c., sixty-six chiyaa: adj., n.c., eighty-six chihattar: adj., n . c , seventy-six chutti: chwpna:

fm., vacation vb., i n t , to hide

chupana: vb., t r , to hide chutna: vb., i n t , to leave churi:

fm., knife

che (see cha): adj., n.c., six ched: msc., hole chota:

adj., small

Chota Nagpur: pL n., m s c , Chota Nagpur chorna: vb., tr., give up, leave chot ana: vb., i n t , to abandon ch5rkar: g e r , leaving, with the exception of

jagah:

fm., place

GLOSSARY

jagana: vb, t r , to wake up (someone) janksan: msc., junction jangal: msc., jungle jangE: msc, savage jangE: adj., n.c, wild, savage jaziyi: msc., tax on non-Muslims jara: adj., set, studded Janak: pr. n , msc, King Janak janta: f m , people jamna: msc, birth janrajya: msc, popular rule janvari: msc, January jab-tak: adv., until jama: fm., accumulation, amount jama karna: vb, t r , to collect, gather jama hona: vb., int, to be gathered together Jam una: pr. n , fm., Jumna River Jamicdpur: pL n , msc, Jamshedpur jay: f m , victory jay kahna: vb, t r , to hail victory Jayprakis Narayan: pr. n , msc, J. P. Narayan jalana: v b , t r , to cause to burn, light jaius: msc, procession jakC: f m , speed, haste jakC: adv, early jaldi-sc: adv, quickly jalna: v b , int, to burn jalviyu: f m , climate jalsa: mac, meeting javan: adj., n.c., young javib: msc, answer Javaharlal Nehru: pr. n , msc, Javaharlal Nehru Jahagir: pr. n , msc, Jahangir jahaz: msc, ship jahazi: msc, sailor jakar: ger., having gone jagna: vb., int, to get up jan: fm., life jana: v b , int, to go, leave janevala: adj., going to janna: v b , t r , to know janvar: msc, animal Japan: pL n , msc, Japan Jarj: pr. n., msc, George jal: msc, net

362

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

jail: fm., net jac: fm., investigation jitna: rel. adj., as much as jin: see jo Jinna: pr. u , m r . , Jinnah jinhc: see jo jinho: see jo jild: fm., cover jis: see jo jise: see jo -jl: hon. part. ji nahi: no ji ha: yes jijl: fnu, elder sister, sister-in-law jit: fnL, victory jitna: vb., tr., to conquer jlv * hisi: fm., destruction of life jlvan: msc., life juta: msc., shoe jun: msc., June jel: msc, jail jaisa: rel. adj., like jo: reL pron. and adj., which jorna: vb., tr., to join hands, add j5tna: vb., tr., to till

zamana: msc., time zamin: fm., earth, ground, soil zari: adv., a little zara-bhi: adv., at all zarur: adv., certainly zarurat: fm., need [-ki] zarurat hona: vb., int^ need zayadad: fm., property zinda: adj., n. live zor: msc., force zor-se: adv., swiftly zyada: adv., too much zyadi pasand hona: vb., int, prefer to zyada pasand karni: vb., tr., prefer zyadatar: adv., greater, for the most part, generally, mostly

GLOSSARY

jhagra: msc., quarrel jhaii: fm., bush jhanda: msc, flag jhaii: fm., waterfall jharii: msc, broom jharii dcna: vb., tr., to sweep jhnkna: vb., int, bend, tih jhnk jana: vb., int, bend jhnth: m*c,, lie jhutha: adj., false Jhclnm: pr. n , f m , Jhelum River jhopn: fm., hut

takiina: vb., tr., to strike against tatta: msc, pony Umitan msc, tomato Tata Ayran Stfl Kampani: pr. n., fm., Tata Iron Steel Co. tap fm., leg tit: fm^ top of head tila: msc, mound tukia: msc, piece, scarf tut jana: vb., inL, to be broken tuta: adj. (pst part.), broken, destroyed tutna: vb., int, to break tutna: mtc., breakdown teknikal: adj., technical teknoloji: msc, technology teks: msc., tax teksi: (also taika): fm., taxi tenis: msc, tennis tebil: msc, table taiksi: (also teka): fm., taxi Taigor: pr. n., msc., Rabindranath Tagore tok: fm., hindrance tok dena: vb., tr., interrupt tokri. fm., basket

363

364

H I N D I G R A M M A R AND READER

Todarmal: pr. n., msc., Todarmal tòpi: fm., cap, hat trak: fm., truck tram: fm., trolley Travankor * Kòcin: pi. n., msc., Travancore-Cochin tren: f m , train traib: msc., tribe

thand: fm., cold, coldness thanda: adj., cold diaharna: vb., int., to stop thik: adv. and adj., all right, exactly thik thak: adj., completely all right thik samay-par: adv., punctually thekedar: msc., contractor

dagar: msc., path dar: msc., fear darnl: vb., int., to fear, be afraid dakkhana (also " khana): msc., post office dakgari: fm., mail train daktari: fm., profession of physician dalna: vb., tr., to drop, post, throw, put, pour digri: fm., degree digri lena: vb., tr., take a degree dibba: msc., box dubna: vb., i n t , to sink, down dub jana: vb., i n t , to sink, drown derh: adj., one and a half Dogra: pi. n., msc., Dogra dora: msc., thread

dhakni:

bv^ tr., to cover, conceal

GLOSSARY

dha:

adj., two and a half

dha:

msc., slope

dhaii:

adj., n.c., sloping

dhirhna, dhudhna:

vb., tr., to seek, look for, search

takavi: fin., taccavi, money lent to cultivators taklf: f m . , trouble T a k i l a : pi. n , fm., Taxila tang adj., n.c., narrow tang karna:

vb., tr., annoy

tatlo: conj., and tan: m s c , body tan&irusti: fm., health of body, condition tap: m s c , penance, devotion tap karna: vb., tr., to do penance tapasya: f m . , devotion, devout austerity tab: conj., then tabqat: f m . , health, condition, disposition tay karna: vb., tr., to decide tarai: f m , direction, side tank: f m . , kind, manner taraiu: m s c , scales tank: msc., method, technique, habit, custom tarbiz: m s c , melon talis f m , search [-klj talai karna: talvir:

vb., t r , to look for

f m , sword

tasvir: f m , picture T a j Mahal: m s c , T a j Mahal tiza: adj., fresh Tansen: pr. n , m s c , Tansen tar: m s c , telegram tara: m s c , star tirikh: f m . , date tirghar: f s c , telegraph office ¿lab: tall: taga:

m s c , tank f m , key m s c , tonga

tagevila: m s c , tongawala, tonga driver tikona: a d j , triangular, three-cornered Tibbat: pL n., m s c , Tibet

366

HINDI GRAMMAR AND READER

tirinve:

adj., n.c., ninety-three

tirasi:

adj., n . c , eighty-three

tilak:

m s c , mark on forehead

tisra:

adj., third

tihattar:

adj., n.c., seventy-three

tin:

adj., n . c , three

tir:

m s c , arrow

tir calana: tirth:

vb., tr., to shoot arrows

msc., pilgrimage, sacred place

firth' sthan:

msc., holy place

tirth * yatra:

fin., pilgrimage to a holy place

tis:

adj., nx., thirty

turn:

pers. pron., you

tumhiia: tumhe:

adj., your see turn

tulna:

vb., inL, to be weighed

Tuls! Das: tufan:

pr. n^ m s c , Tulsi Das

m s c , storm

teis:

adj., n . c , twenty-three

tez:

adj., n.c., fast, sharp, hot

tezl:

fm., swiftness

tezl-se: tera:

adv., quickly

adj., your

tera, terah: tel:

adj., n . c , thirteen

m s c , oil

telefon: tetalls:

fm., telephone adj., n . c , forty-three

tctis:

adj., n.c., thirty-three

taiyar:

adj., n.c., ready

taiyar karna:

vb., tr., to prepare

taiyari:

fm., preparation

tairna:

vb., int., to swim

to:

conj., moreover, then

torna: tota:

vb., tr., to pluck, break msc., parrot

tolna:

vb., tr., to weigh (cf. tulna)

tyohar, tyauhar:

msc., holiday, festival

trepan:

adj., n . c , fifty-three

tresath:

adj., n . c , sixty-three

thak j i n l :

vb., i n t , to become tired

GLOSSARY

thaka: adj., tired tha: see hona thana: msc., police station thala: msc., dish, plate, flat dish thaG: fm., dish (smaller than thala) thaila: msc, bag thori: adj., little thori der: fm., little while

daksin: msc, south dakhal: msc., interference, intrusion dakhfl: adj., nx^ entered, allowed entrance dand: msc, punishment daftar: msc, office dabana: vb., tr., to suppress, put down dabe'pav: adv., silently, on tiptoe dabna: vb., int., to be pressed down daya: fm., favor, kindness dayapurna * karya: msc, deeds filled with kindness dayaln: adj., n.c., kind dayavan: adj., n.c, kind-hearted dSya: adj., right (Le^ direction) darzan: msc, dozen d a m : msc, tailor darbar: msc, court, audience hall darra: msc, pass darvaza: msc, door darvaze-kl ghanti: fm., doorbell darian: msc, visit to sacred shrine, worship of image, an audience, a viewing darsan dena: vb., tr., give audience dava: fnu, medicine, medical treatment daval: fm^ medicine, medical treatment dasa: fm., condition Dasrath: pr. n., msc, King Dashrath das: adj., n.c, ten das lakh: adj., n.c., one million dasvi: adj., tenth dahl: msc., curds daga: msc, riot dakhil karvana: vb., tr., to enroll, cause to be admitted dag: msc., stain

367

368

HINDI G R A M M A R AND READER

d i d î * ammâ: fm., grandmother dâm: m s c , cost, price d i l : fm., pulse (a vegetable) d i n : fnu, handmaiden, female slave dat: msc^ teeth d i k h i n i : vb., tr., to point out, show (cf. dêkhnâ and d i k h l i n a ) dikhiyï d é n i : vb., tr., to be seen, appear dikhlina: vb., tr., to point out, show (cf. dêkhnâ, d i k h à n i ) din: msc., day, morning din b i t i n i : vb., tr., to live, spend time dincarya: fm., daily routine d i y i : see déni dil: ms